HK1219145B - Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact - Google Patents
Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- HK1219145B HK1219145B HK16107033.6A HK16107033A HK1219145B HK 1219145 B HK1219145 B HK 1219145B HK 16107033 A HK16107033 A HK 16107033A HK 1219145 B HK1219145 B HK 1219145B
- Authority
- HK
- Hong Kong
- Prior art keywords
- contact
- intensity
- touch
- display
- content
- Prior art date
Links
Description
本申请是申请日为2013年5月8日、申请号为201380035982.1、发明名称为“用于响应于用户接触来显示附加信息的设备、方法和图形用户界面”的发明专利申请的分案申请。This application is a divisional application of the invention patent application with application date of May 8, 2013, application number 201380035982.1, and invention name “Device, method and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to user contact”.
相关专利申请Related patent applications
本专利申请要求以下临时专利申请的优先权:于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Displaying AdditionalInformation in Response to a User Contact”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,171、于2012年12月29日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface forManipulating User Interface Objects with Visual and/or Haptic Feedback”的美国临时专利申请No.61/747,278、以及于2012年5月9日提交的名称为“Device,Method,andGraphical User Interface for Manipulating User Interface Objects with Visualand/or Haptic Feedback”的美国临时专利申请No.61/688,227,这些专利申请均全文以引用方式并入本文。This patent application claims priority to U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,171, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying Additional Information in Response to a User Contact,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/747,278, filed on December 29, 2012, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating User Interface Objects with Visual and/or Haptic Feedback,” and U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/688,227, filed on May 9, 2012, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating User Interface Objects with Visual and/or Haptic Feedback,” all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
本专利申请还与以下临时专利申请相关:于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Selecting Object within aGroup of Objects”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,092、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Navigating User InterfaceHierarchies”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,125、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating Framed GraphicalObjects”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,156、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Scrolling Nested Regions”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,179、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,andGraphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Correspondingto an Application”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,191、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Facilitating UserInteraction with Controls in a User Interface”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,211、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interfacefor Forgoing Generation of Tactile Output for a Multi-Contact Gesture”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,239、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,andGraphical User Interface for Providing Tactile Feedback for OperationsPerformed in a User Interface”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,284、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for ProvidingFeedback for Changing Activation States of a User Interface Object”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,287、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,andGraphical User Interface for Transitioning between Touch Input to DisplayOutput Relationships”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,363、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Moving a User InterfaceObject Based on an Intensity of a Press Input”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,367、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interfacefor Transitioning between Display States in Response to a Gesture”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,265、于2013年3月12日提交的名称为“Device,Method,andGraphical User Interface for Managing Activation of a Control Based onContact Intensity”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,373、于2013年3月13日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface for Displaying ContentAssociated with a Corresponding Affordance”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,412、于2013年3月13日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interfacefor Selecting User Interface Objects”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,413、于2013年3月13日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interface forMoving and Dropping a User Interface Object”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,414、于2013年3月13日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical User Interfacefor Determining Whether to Scroll or Select Content”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,416、以及于2013年3月13日提交的名称为“Device,Method,and Graphical UserInterface for Switching between User Interfaces”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/778,418,这些专利申请均全文以引用方式并入本文。This patent application is also related to the following provisional patent applications: U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,092, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Selecting Object within a Group of Objects”; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,125, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Navigating User Interface Hierarchies”; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,156, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Manipulating Framed GraphicalObjects”; and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,157, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Scrolling Nested Objects”. No. 61/778,179, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying User Interface Objects Corresponding to an Application,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,191, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Facilitating User Interaction with Controls in a User Interface,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,211, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Forgoing Generation of Tactile Output for a Multi-Contact Gesture,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,239, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Providing Tactile Feedback for Operations Performed in a User Interface”; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,284, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Providing Feedback for Changing Activation States of a User Interface Object”; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,287, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Transitioning between Touch Input to DisplayOutput Relationships”; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,363, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Moving a User InterfaceObject Based on an Intensity of a Press Input”; U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,367, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Providing Feedback for Changing Activation States of a User Interface Object” No. 61/778,265, entitled “Transitioning between Display States in Response to a Gesture,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,373, filed on March 12, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Managing Activation of a Control Based on Contact Intensity,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,412, filed on March 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Displaying Content Associated with a Corresponding Affordance,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,413, filed on March 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Selecting User Interface Objects,” U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/778,414, filed on March 13, 2013, entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Moving and Dropping a User Interface Object,” No. 61/778,418, filed on March 13, 2013, and entitled “Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Switching between User Interfaces,” are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety.
本申请还与以下临时专利申请相关:于2012年5月9日提交的名称为“AdaptiveHaptic Feedback for Electronic Devices”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/645,033、于2012年6月28日提交的名称为“Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/665,603、以及于2012年8月8日提交的名称为“AdaptiveHaptic Feedback for Electronic Devices”的美国临时专利申请序列号61/681,098,这些申请均全文以引用方式并入本文。This application is also related to the following provisional patent applications: U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/645,033, entitled “Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices,” filed on May 9, 2012, U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/665,603, entitled “Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices,” filed on June 28, 2012, and U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/681,098, entitled “Adaptive Haptic Feedback for Electronic Devices,” filed on August 8, 2012, all of which are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
技术领域Technical Field
本文整体涉及具有触敏表面的电子设备,包括但不限于检测用于操纵用户界面的输入的具有触敏表面的电子设备。This document generally relates to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces, including but not limited to electronic devices with touch-sensitive surfaces that detect input for manipulating a user interface.
背景技术Background Art
触敏表面作为计算机和其他电子计算设备的输入设备的使用在近年来显著增长。示例性触敏表面包括触摸板和触摸屏显示器。此类表面广泛地用于操纵显示器上的用户界面对象。The use of touch-sensitive surfaces as input devices for computers and other electronic computing devices has grown significantly in recent years. Exemplary touch-sensitive surfaces include touchpads and touch screen displays. Such surfaces are widely used to manipulate user interface objects on displays.
示例性操纵包括调整一个或多个用户界面对象的位置和/或尺寸或激活按钮或打开由用户界面对象表示的文件/应用程序,以及将元数据与一个或多个用户界面对象相关联或以其他方式操纵用户界面。示例性用户界面对象包括数字图像、视频、文本、图标、控制元件诸如按钮和其他图形。在一些情况下,用户将需要在以下程序中对用户界面对象执行此类操纵:文件管理程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的Finder)、图像管理应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的Aperture或iPhoto)、数字内容(例如,视频和音乐)管理应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的iTunes)、绘图应用程序、呈现应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的Keynote)、文字处理应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的Pages)、网站创建应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(upertino,California)iWeb)、盘编辑应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的iDVD)或电子表格应用程序(例如,得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的Numbers)。Exemplary manipulations include adjusting the position and/or size of one or more user interface objects or activating a button or opening a file/application represented by a user interface object, as well as associating metadata with one or more user interface objects or otherwise manipulating the user interface. Exemplary user interface objects include digital images, videos, text, icons, control elements such as buttons, and other graphics. In some cases, a user will need to perform such manipulations of user interface objects in a file management program (e.g., Finder from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), an image management application (e.g., Aperture or iPhoto from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), a digital content (e.g., video and music) management application (e.g., iTunes from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), a drawing application, a presentation application (e.g., Keynote from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), a word processing application (e.g., Pages from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), a website creation application (e.g., iWeb from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), a disc editing application (e.g., iDVD from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), or a spreadsheet application (e.g., Numbers from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)).
但是,用于执行这些操纵的现有方法是麻烦且低效的。此外,现有的方法花费比所需时间更长的时间从而浪费能量。这后一考虑在电池驱动设备中是特别重要的。However, existing methods for performing these manipulations are cumbersome and inefficient. Furthermore, existing methods take longer than necessary, wasting energy. This latter consideration is particularly important in battery-powered devices.
发明内容Summary of the Invention
因此,电子设备需要具有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于操纵用户界面。此类方法和界面任选地补充或替换用于操纵用户界面的常规方法。此类方法和界面减小了对用户所造成的认知负担并产生了更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动设备,此类方法和界面节省了功率并增加了电池充电之间的时间。Therefore, electronic devices need to have faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for manipulating user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces optionally supplement or replace conventional methods for manipulating user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on users and create more efficient human-computer interfaces. For battery-powered devices, such methods and interfaces save power and increase the time between battery charges.
通过所公开的设备减少或消除了与用于具有触敏表面的电子设备的用户界面相关联的上述缺陷和其他问题。在一些实施例中,该设备是台式计算机。在一些实施例中,该设备是便携式的(例如,笔记本电脑、平板电脑或手持设备)。在一些实施例中,该设备具有触摸板。在一些实施例中,该设备具有触敏显示器(又称为“触摸屏”或“触摸屏显示器”)。在一些实施例中,该设备具有图形用户界面(GUI)、存储器、一个或多个处理器以及存储在存储器中以用于执行多种功能的一个或多个模块、程序或指令集。在一些实施例中,用户主要通过触敏表面上的手指接触和手势来与GUI进行交互。在一些实施例中,这些功能任选地包括图像编辑、绘图、呈现、文字处理、网页创建、盘编辑、电子表格制作、玩游戏、接打电话、视频会议、收发电子邮件、即时消息发送、健身支持、数字摄影、数字视频记录、网络浏览、数字音乐播放和/或数字视频播放。用于执行这些功能的可执行指令任选地被包括在被配置用于由一个或多个处理器执行的非暂态计算机可读存储介质或其他计算机程序产品中。The above-mentioned defects and other problems associated with the user interface of the electronic device with touch-sensitive surface are reduced or eliminated by the disclosed device. In some embodiments, the device is a desktop computer. In some embodiments, the device is portable (e.g., a laptop, tablet computer or handheld device). In some embodiments, the device has a touchpad. In some embodiments, the device has a touch-sensitive display (also known as a "touch screen" or "touch screen display"). In some embodiments, the device has a graphical user interface (GUI), a memory, one or more processors and one or more modules, programs or instruction sets stored in the memory for performing multiple functions. In some embodiments, the user interacts with the GUI mainly through finger contacts and gestures on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, these functions optionally include image editing, drawing, presentation, word processing, web page creation, disk editing, spreadsheet production, playing games, making and receiving calls, video conferencing, sending and receiving emails, instant messaging, fitness support, digital photography, digital video recording, web browsing, digital music playback and/or digital video playback. The executable instructions for performing these functions are optionally included in a non-transient computer-readable storage medium or other computer program product configured for execution by one or more processors.
电子设备需要具有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于在具有跟踪垫或触摸屏的电子设备上执行用户界面操作。此类操作的实例包括滚动通过项目列表或删除列表中的项目。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于执行用户界面操作的常规方法。此类方法和界面减小了对用户所造成的认知负担并产生了更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动设备,此类方法和界面节省了功率并增加了电池充电之间的时间。Electronic devices need faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for performing user interface operations on electronic devices with trackpads or touchscreens. Examples of such operations include scrolling through a list of items or deleting items from a list. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for performing user interface operations. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on users and create more efficient human-computer interfaces. For battery-powered devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
根据一些实施例,在具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备处执行一种方法。所述方法包括:在显示器上显示用户界面并且检测用户在触敏表面上的手势,该手势包括与用户界面中的相应位置处的焦点选择器对应的接触,其中该手势与相应操作相关联。该方法还包括响应于检测到手势,根据确定该接触具有低于第一强度阈值的最大强度,请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作。该方法还包括根据确定该接触的最大强度高于第一强度阈值,在不请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作的情况下执行该相应操作。In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed at an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes displaying a user interface on the display and detecting a gesture of a user on the touch-sensitive surface, the gesture including a contact corresponding to a focus selector at a corresponding location in the user interface, wherein the gesture is associated with a corresponding operation. The method also includes, in response to detecting the gesture, requesting confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation based on determining that the contact has a maximum intensity below a first intensity threshold. The method also includes performing the corresponding operation without requesting confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation based on determining that the maximum intensity of the contact is above the first intensity threshold.
根据一些实施例,电子设备包括显示单元,该显示单元被配置为在显示单元上显示用户界面;触敏表面单元,该触敏表面单元被配置为检测用户在触敏表面单元上的手势,该手势包括与用户界面中的相应位置处的焦点选择器对应的接触,其中该手势与相应操作相关联;和处理单元,该处理单元耦接到显示单元和触敏表面单元。该处理单元被配置为:响应于检测到手势:根据确定接触具有低于第一强度阈值的最大强度,请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作;以及根据确定接触的最大强度高于第一强度阈值,在不请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作的情况下执行该相应操作。In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a user interface on the display unit; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a gesture by a user on the touch-sensitive surface unit, the gesture comprising contact corresponding to a focus selector at a corresponding location in the user interface, wherein the gesture is associated with a corresponding operation; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the gesture: request confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation based on determining that the contact has a maximum intensity below a first intensity threshold; and perform the corresponding operation without requesting confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation based on determining that the maximum intensity of the contact is above the first intensity threshold.
因此,具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备被提供有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于执行用户界面操作,从而增大此类设备的效能、效率和用户满意度。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于执行用户界面操作的常规方法。Thus, electronic devices having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for performing user interface operations, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for performing user interface operations.
电子设备需要具有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于当在对应于接触的焦点选择器位于显示器上的与附加信息相关联的位置处的情况下检测到用户接触时显示附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于显示此类附加信息的常规方法。此类方法和界面减小了对用户所造成的认知负担并产生了更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动设备,此类方法和界面节省了功率并增加了电池充电之间的时间。There is a need for electronic devices to have faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for displaying additional (e.g., not initially displayed) information when a user contact is detected while a focus selector corresponding to the contact is at a location on the display associated with the additional information. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for displaying such additional information. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on the user and produce a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered devices, such methods and interfaces save power and increase the time between battery charges.
根据一些实施例,在具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备上执行方法。该方法包括当对应于接触的焦点选择器位于显示器上的与最初未在显示器上显示的附加信息相关联的相应位置处时,检测触敏表面上的接触。该方法还包括在焦点选择器位于相应位置处时:根据确定在焦点选择器位于相应位置处的情况下在已经流逝预定义的延迟时间之前接触具有高于相应强度阈值的强度,显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息而无需等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间;以及根据确定接触具有低于相应强度阈值的强度,当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间以显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息。In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes detecting a contact on the touch-sensitive surface when a focus selector corresponding to the contact is at a corresponding position on the display that is associated with additional information that was not initially displayed on the display. The method also includes, when the focus selector is at the corresponding position: based on determining that the contact had an intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold before a predefined delay time had elapsed while the focus selector was at the corresponding position, displaying the additional information associated with the corresponding position without waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed; and based on determining that the contact had an intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold, waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed to display the additional information associated with the corresponding position while the focus selector is at the corresponding position.
根据一些实施例,电子设备包括显示单元,该显示单元被配置为显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息;触敏表面单元,该触敏表面单元被配置为接收触敏表面单元上的接触;一个或多个传感器单元,该一个或多个传感器单元被配置为检测与触敏表面单元的接触的强度;和处理单元,该处理单元耦接到显示单元、触敏表面单元和传感器单元。该处理单元被配置为:当对应于接触的焦点选择器位于显示单元上的与最初未在显示单元上显示的附加信息相关联的相应位置处时,检测触敏表面单元上的接触;以及当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时:根据确定在焦点选择器位于相应位置处的情况下在已经流逝预定义的延迟时间之前接触具有高于相应强度阈值的强度,使能与相应位置相关联的附加信息的显示而无需等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间;以及根据确定接触具有低于相应强度阈值的强度,当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间以使能与相应位置相关联的附加信息的显示。In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display additional information associated with a corresponding location; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit; one or more sensor units configured to detect an intensity of the contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the sensor unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit when a focus selector corresponding to the contact is located at a corresponding location on the display unit associated with additional information that was not initially displayed on the display unit; and when the focus selector is at the corresponding location: based on determining that the contact had an intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold before a predefined delay time had elapsed when the focus selector was at the corresponding location, enable display of the additional information associated with the corresponding location without waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed; and based on determining that the contact had an intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold, wait until the predefined delay time has elapsed when the focus selector is at the corresponding location to enable display of the additional information associated with the corresponding location.
因此,具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备被提供有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于当检测到接触时显示附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息,从而增大此类设备的效能、效率和用户满意度。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于当检测到接触时显示附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息的常规方法。Thus, electronic devices having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for displaying additional (e.g., not initially displayed) information when contact is detected, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for displaying additional (e.g., not initially displayed) information when contact is detected.
电子设备需要具有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于从预定义区域移除图标。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于从预定义区域移除图标的常规方法。此类方法和界面减小了对用户所造成的认知负担并产生了更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动设备,此类方法和界面节省了功率并增加了电池充电之间的时间。Electronic devices need faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for removing icons from predefined areas. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for removing icons from predefined areas. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on users and create a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
根据一些实施例,在具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备上执行方法。所述方法包括:在显示器上的预定义区域中显示多个图标,其中该多个图标包括相应图标;检测手势,该手势包括:当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时在触敏表面上的接触,以及该接触在触敏表面上的后续移动,该后续移动对应于焦点选择器在预定义区域之外的移动;并且响应于检测到手势:根据确定接触在手势期间具有低于相应强度阈值的最大强度,在手势期间显示手势正在被执行的指示,并且在手势已结束之后将相应图标保留在预定义区域中;以及根据确定接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标,并且在手势已结束之后从预定义区域移除相应图标。In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a plurality of icons in a predefined area on the display, wherein the plurality of icons includes a respective icon; detecting a gesture, the gesture comprising: contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is over the respective icon, and subsequent movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the subsequent movement corresponding to movement of the focus selector outside of the predefined area; and in response to detecting the gesture: displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed during the gesture based on a determination that the contact has a maximum intensity below a respective intensity threshold during the gesture, and retaining the respective icon in the predefined area after the gesture has ended; and based on a determination that the contact reaches an intensity above the respective intensity threshold during the gesture, moving the respective icon based on the movement of the contact during the gesture, and removing the respective icon from the predefined area after the gesture has ended.
根据一些实施例,电子设备包括显示单元,该显示单元被配置为在显示单元上的预定义区域中显示多个图标,其中多个图标包括相应图标;触敏表面单元,该触敏表面单元被配置为接收手势;一个或多个传感器单元,该一个或多个传感器单元被配置为检测与触敏表面单元的接触的强度;和处理单元,该处理单元耦接到显示单元、触敏表面单元和传感器单元。该处理单元被配置为:检测手势,该手势包括当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时在触敏表面单元上的接触,以及该接触在触敏表面单元上的后续移动,该后续移动对应于焦点选择器在预定义区域之外的移动,并且响应于检测到手势:根据确定接触在手势期间具有低于相应强度阈值的最大强度,在手势期间使能手势正在被执行的指示的显示,并且在手势已结束之后将相应图标保留在预定义区域中;以及根据确定接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标,并且在手势已结束之后从预定义区域移除相应图标。In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a plurality of icons in a predefined area on the display unit, wherein the plurality of icons includes a respective icon; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive a gesture; one or more sensor units configured to detect intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the sensor unit. The processing unit is configured to: detect a gesture comprising contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit while a focus selector is over the respective icon, and subsequent movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, the subsequent movement corresponding to movement of the focus selector outside of the predefined area, and in response to detecting the gesture: enable display of an indication that the gesture is being performed during the gesture based on determining that the contact has a maximum intensity below a corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, and retain the respective icon in the predefined area after the gesture has ended; and based on determining that the contact reaches an intensity above the corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, move the respective icon based on the movement of the contact during the gesture, and remove the respective icon from the predefined area after the gesture has ended.
因此,具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备被提供有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于从预定义区域移除图标,从而增大此类设备的效能、效率和用户满意度。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于从预定义区域移除图标的常规方法。Thus, electronic devices having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for removing icons from predefined areas, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for removing icons from predefined areas.
电子设备需要具有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于显示内容层。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于显示内容层的常规方法。此类方法和界面减小了对用户所造成的认知负担并产生了更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动设备,此类方法和界面节省了功率并增加了电池充电之间的时间。Electronic devices need faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for displaying content layers. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for displaying content layers. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on users and create a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered devices, such methods and interfaces conserve power and increase the time between battery charges.
根据一些实施例,在具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备上执行方法。所述方法包括:在显示器上显示第一内容,其中第一内容的部分与第二内容的未在显示器上显示的对应部分相关;当焦点选择器位于第一内容的第一部分上方时,检测触敏表面上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值;并且响应于检测到触敏表面上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值:停止显示第一内容的第一部分,并且显示第二内容的与第一内容的第一部分对应的第一部分。In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying first content on the display, wherein a portion of the first content is related to a corresponding portion of second content that is not displayed on the display; detecting an increase in intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above a corresponding intensity threshold when a focus selector is over the first portion of the first content; and in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface above the corresponding intensity threshold: ceasing to display the first portion of the first content and displaying a first portion of the second content that corresponds to the first portion of the first content.
根据一些实施例,电子设备包括显示单元,该显示单元被配置为在显示单元上显示第一内容,其中第一内容的部分与第二内容的未在显示器上显示的对应部分相关;触敏表面单元,该触敏表面单元被配置为接收接触;一个或多个传感器,该一个或多个传感器被配置为检测与触敏表面单元的接触的强度;和处理单元,该处理单元耦接到显示单元、触敏表面单元和传感器。该处理单元被配置为:当焦点选择器位于第一内容的第一部分上方时,检测触敏表面单元上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值;并且响应于检测到触敏表面单元上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值:停止显示第一内容的第一部分,并且使能第二内容的与第一内容的第一部分对应的第一部分的显示。In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display first content on the display unit, wherein a portion of the first content is related to a corresponding portion of second content that is not displayed on the display; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to receive a contact; one or more sensors configured to detect an intensity of the contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit, the touch-sensitive surface unit, and the sensors. The processing unit is configured to: when a focus selector is over a first portion of the first content, detect an increase in intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit to above a corresponding intensity threshold; and in response to detecting an increase in intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit to above the corresponding intensity threshold: stop displaying the first portion of the first content, and enable display of a first portion of the second content corresponding to the first portion of the first content.
因此,具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备被提供有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于显示内容层,从而增大此类设备的效用、效率和用户满意度。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于显示内容层的常规方法。Thus, electronic devices having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for displaying content layers, thereby increasing the utility, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for displaying content layers.
电子设备需要具有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于通过使用用户输入诸如跟踪垫或触摸屏上的输入或来自触敏表面的输入来在用户界面之间(例如在电子邮件客户端应用程序中的收件箱视图与会话视图之间)进行导航。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于在用户界面之间进行导航的常规方法。此类方法和界面减小了对用户所造成的认知负担并产生了更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动设备,此类方法和界面节省了功率并增加了电池充电之间的时间。There is a need for electronic devices to have faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for navigating between user interfaces (e.g., between an inbox view and a conversation view in an email client application) using user input, such as input on a trackpad or touch screen, or input from a touch-sensitive surface. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for navigating between user interfaces. Such methods and interfaces reduce the cognitive burden on the user and produce a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered devices, such methods and interfaces save power and increase the time between battery charges.
根据一些实施例,在具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备上执行方法。所述方法包括:在显示器上显示第一用户界面。该方法还包括当焦点选择器位于第一用户界面中的对象的第一表示上方时,检测触敏表面上的第一手势,该第一手势包括在第一手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第一接触。该方法还包括响应于检测到第一手势,用包括对象的第二表示的第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面。该方法还包括当焦点选择器位于第二用户界面中的对象的第二表示上方时,检测触敏表面上的第二手势,该第二手势包括在第二手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第二接触。该方法还包括响应于检测到第二手势,用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面。In accordance with some embodiments, a method is performed on an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contacts with the touch-sensitive surface. The method includes: displaying a first user interface on the display. The method also includes detecting a first gesture on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is over a first representation of an object in the first user interface, the first gesture including a first contact having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold during the first gesture. The method also includes, in response to detecting the first gesture, replacing the first user interface with a second user interface including a second representation of the object. The method also includes detecting a second gesture on the touch-sensitive surface while the focus selector is over a second representation of the object in the second user interface, the second gesture including a second contact having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold during the second gesture. The method also includes, in response to detecting the second gesture, replacing the second user interface with the first user interface.
根据一些实施例,电子设备包括显示单元,该显示单元被配置为显示包括对象的第一表示的第一用户界面和包括对象的第二表示的第二用户界面;触敏表面单元,该触敏表面单元被配置为当焦点选择器位于第一用户界面中的对象的第一表示上方时检测触敏表面单元上的第一手势,该第一手势包括在第一手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第一接触,并且当焦点选择器位于第二用户界面中的对象的第二表示上方时检测触敏表面单元上的第二手势,该第二手势包括在第二手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第二接触;和处理单元,该处理单元耦接到显示单元和触敏表面单元。该处理单元被配置为:响应于检测到第一手势,用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面;以及响应于检测到第二手势,用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面。In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display unit configured to display a first user interface including a first representation of an object and a second user interface including a second representation of the object; a touch-sensitive surface unit configured to detect a first gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit when a focus selector is over the first representation of the object in the first user interface, the first gesture including a first contact having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold during the first gesture, and to detect a second gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit when the focus selector is over the second representation of the object in the second user interface, the second gesture including a second contact having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold during the second gesture; and a processing unit coupled to the display unit and the touch-sensitive surface unit. The processing unit is configured to: in response to detecting the first gesture, replace the first user interface with the second user interface; and in response to detecting the second gesture, replace the second user interface with the first user interface.
因此,具有显示器、触敏表面和用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器的电子设备被提供有更快、更有效的方法和界面以用于在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航,从而增大此类设备的效能、效率和用户满意度。此类方法和界面可补充或替换用于在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的常规方法。Thus, electronic devices having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface are provided with faster, more efficient methods and interfaces for navigating between displayed user interfaces, thereby increasing the effectiveness, efficiency, and user satisfaction of such devices. Such methods and interfaces can supplement or replace conventional methods for navigating between displayed user interfaces.
根据一些实施例,电子设备包括显示器、触敏表面、存储器、一个或多个处理器、一个或多个程序以及用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的任选地一个或多个传感器;一个或多个程序存储在存储器中并被配置为由一个或多个处理器来执行,并且一个或多个程序包括用于执行在段落[0057]中提及的任何方法的操作的指令。根据一些实施例,具有显示器、触敏表面、存储器、用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的任选地一个或多个传感器以及执行存储于存储器中的一个或多个程序的一个或多个处理器的电子设备上的图形用户界面包括在段落[0057]中提及的任何方法中所显示的一个或多个元件,该一个或多个元件响应于输入进行更新,如段落[0057]中提及的任何方法中所描述的。根据一些实施例,计算机可读存储介质在其中存储有指令,所述指令当由具有显示器、触敏表面以及用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的任选地一个或多个传感器的电子设备执行时,使得该设备执行段落[0057]中提及的任何方法的操作。根据一些实施例,电子设备包括:显示器、触敏表面以及用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的任选地一个或多个传感器;和用于执行段落[0057]中提及的任何方法的操作的装置。根据一些实施例,用于在具有显示器和触敏表面、用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的任选地一个或多个传感器的电子设备中使用的信息处理装置包括用于执行段落[0057]中提及的任何方法的操作的装置。In accordance with some embodiments, an electronic device includes a display, a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, one or more processors, one or more programs, and optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface; the one or more programs are stored in the memory and configured to be executed by the one or more processors, and the one or more programs include instructions for performing the operations of any of the methods mentioned in paragraph [0057]. In accordance with some embodiments, a graphical user interface on an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, a memory, optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, and one or more processors executing the one or more programs stored in the memory includes one or more elements displayed in any of the methods mentioned in paragraph [0057], the one or more elements being updated in response to input, as described in any of the methods mentioned in paragraph [0057]. In accordance with some embodiments, a computer-readable storage medium has stored therein instructions that, when executed by an electronic device having a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, cause the device to perform the operations of any of the methods mentioned in paragraph [0057]. According to some embodiments, an electronic device includes: a display, a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface; and means for performing the operations of any of the methods mentioned in paragraph [0057]. According to some embodiments, an information processing apparatus for use in an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface, and optionally one or more sensors for detecting intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface, includes means for performing the operations of any of the methods mentioned in paragraph [0057].
附图说明BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
为了更好地理解本发明的各种所述实施例,应该结合以下附图参考下面的实施例的说明,在附图中,在所有附图中类似的附图标号表示对应的部件。For a better understanding of the various described embodiments of the present invention, reference should be made to the following description of the embodiments taken in conjunction with the following drawings, in which like reference numerals represent corresponding parts throughout the several views.
图1A是根据一些实施例示出具有触敏显示器的便携式多功能设备的框图。Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device with a touch-sensitive display in accordance with some embodiments.
图1B是根据一些实施例示出用于事件处理的示例性部件的框图。FIG. 1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event processing, according to some embodiments.
图2根据一些实施例示出了具有触摸屏的便携式多功能设备。FIG2 illustrates a portable multifunction device with a touch screen in accordance with some embodiments.
图3是根据一些实施例的具有显示器和触敏表面的示例性多功能设备的框图。3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunction device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface in accordance with some embodiments.
图4A根据一些实施例示出了在便携式多功能设备上的用于应用程序菜单的示例性用户界面。Figure 4A illustrates an exemplary user interface for an applications menu on a portable multifunction device in accordance with some embodiments.
图4B根据一些实施例示出了用于具有与显示器分开的触敏表面的多功能设备的示例性用户界面。Figure 4B shows an exemplary user interface for a multifunction device with a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display in accordance with some embodiments.
图5A-图5I根据一些实施例示出了用于执行用户界面操作的示例性用户界面。5A-5I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for performing user interface operations in accordance with some embodiments.
图6A-图6B是根据一些实施例示出执行用户界面操作的方法的流程图。6A-6B are flow charts illustrating methods of performing user interface operations according to some embodiments.
图7是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。7 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
图8A-图8N示出了根据一些实施例的用于基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)来在显示器上显示与位置相关联的附加信息的示例性用户界面。8A-8N illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying additional information associated with a location on a display based on contact intensity (eg, pressure) and contact timing (eg, duration) in accordance with some embodiments.
图9A-图9B是根据一些实施例示出基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)来在显示器上显示与位置相关联的附加信息的方法的流程图。9A-9B are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying additional information associated with a location on a display based on contact intensity (eg, pressure) and contact timing (eg, duration), in accordance with some embodiments.
图10是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。FIG10 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
图11A-图11U根据一些实施例示出了用于从预定义区域移除图标的示例性用户界面。11A-11U illustrate example user interfaces for removing icons from a predefined area, in accordance with some embodiments.
图12A-图12B是根据一些实施例示出从预定义区域移除图标的方法的流程图。12A-12B are flow diagrams illustrating a method of removing an icon from a predefined area, according to some embodiments.
图13是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。13 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
图14A-图14L根据一些实施例示出了用于显示内容层的示例性用户界面。14A-14L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying content layers, according to some embodiments.
图15A-图15C是示出根据一些实施例的显示内容层的方法的流程图。15A-15C are flow diagrams illustrating methods of displaying content layers according to some embodiments.
图16是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。FIG16 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
图17A-图17H根据一些实施例示出了用于在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的示例性用户界面。17A-17H illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating between displayed user interfaces in accordance with some embodiments.
图18A-图18C是根据一些实施例示出在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的方法的流程图。18A-18C are flow diagrams illustrating methods of navigating between displayed user interfaces, according to some embodiments.
图19是根据一些实施例的电子设备的功能框图。Figure 19 is a functional block diagram of an electronic device in accordance with some embodiments.
具体实施方式DETAILED DESCRIPTION
本文中所描述的方法、设备和GUI提供使得用户界面对象的操纵对于用户更有效且更直观的视觉和/或触觉反馈。例如,在其中触控板的点击动作与需要达到激活阈值的接触强度(例如,接触力、接触压力或其替代物)脱离的系统中,设备可针对不同的激活事件来生成不同的触觉输出(例如,“不同的点击”)(例如,使得实现特定结果的点击区别于不产生任何结果或实现与特定结果不同的结果的点击)。另外,可响应于与接触的增大强度不相关的其他事件来生成触觉输出,诸如当用户界面对象移动到特定位置、边界或取向时,或者当事件发生在设备处时生成触觉输出(例如,“止动”)。The methods, devices, and GUIs described herein provide visual and/or tactile feedback that makes manipulation of user interface objects more efficient and intuitive for the user. For example, in a system where a click action of a touchpad is decoupled from a contact intensity (e.g., contact force, contact pressure, or a substitute thereof) required to reach an activation threshold, the device can generate different tactile outputs (e.g., "different clicks") for different activation events (e.g., so that a click that achieves a specific result is distinguished from a click that produces no result or achieves a result different from the specific result). In addition, tactile output can be generated in response to other events that are not related to increased intensity of contact, such as when a user interface object moves to a specific position, boundary, or orientation, or when an event occurs at the device (e.g., a "stop").
另外,在其中触控板或触摸屏显示器对包括一个以上或两个特定强度值(例如,不只是简单的开/关二元强度确定)的接触强度范围敏感的系统中,用户界面可提供指示该范围内的接触强度的响应(例如,视觉或触觉提示)。在一些具体实施中,针对输入的预激活阈值响应和/或激活后阈值响应被显示为连续动画。作为此类响应的一个实例,响应于检测到接触强度增大但仍低于用于执行操作的激活阈值而显示操作的预览。作为此类响应的另一个实例,甚至在已达到用于操作的激活阈值之后还继续与操作相关联的动画。这两个实例均向用户提供对用户接触的力或压力的连续响应,该响应向用户提供更丰富且更直观的视觉和/或触觉反馈。更具体地,此类连续力响应给予用户能够轻轻按压以预览操作和/或深深按压以“穿过”或“通过”对应于该操作的预定义用户界面状态的体验。Additionally, in systems where the trackpad or touchscreen display is sensitive to a range of contact intensities that includes more than one or two specific intensity values (e.g., beyond a simple on/off binary intensity determination), the user interface can provide a response (e.g., a visual or tactile cue) indicating contact intensities within this range. In some implementations, the pre-activation threshold response and/or post-activation threshold response for an input is displayed as a continuous animation. As one example of such a response, a preview of an operation is displayed in response to detecting an increase in contact intensity but still below an activation threshold for performing the operation. As another example of such a response, an animation associated with the operation continues even after the activation threshold for the operation has been reached. Both examples provide the user with a continuous response to the force or pressure of the user's contact, which provides the user with richer and more intuitive visual and/or tactile feedback. More specifically, such a continuous force response gives the user the experience of being able to press lightly to preview an operation and/or press deeply to "step through" or "pass" through a predefined user interface state corresponding to the operation.
另外,对于具有对接触强度范围敏感的触敏表面的设备,多个接触强度阈值可由设备进行监测,并且不同功能可被映射到不同接触强度阈值。这样用于增大可用的“手势空间”,从而使得用户易于访问改善的特征,该用户知道在第二“深按压”强度阈值处或超过第二“深按压”强度阈值来增大接触强度将使得设备执行与在接触强度介于第一“激活”强度阈值与第二“深按压”强度阈值之间的情况下将执行的操作不同的操作。向第二“深按压”强度阈值指定附加功能同时在第一“激活”强度阈值处维持熟悉功能的优点在于,在一些情况下,对附加功能感到困惑的没有经验的用户可通过仅施加高达第一“激活”强度阈值的强度来使用熟悉的功能,而较有经验的用户可通过施加处于第二“深按压”强度阈值的强度来利用附加功能。In addition, for devices with touch-sensitive surfaces that are sensitive to a range of contact intensities, multiple contact intensity thresholds can be monitored by the device, and different functions can be mapped to different contact intensity thresholds. This serves to increase the available "gesture space," making it easier for users to access improved features, knowing that increasing the contact intensity at or above the second "deep press" intensity threshold will cause the device to perform an operation different from the operation that would have been performed if the contact intensity was between the first "activation" intensity threshold and the second "deep press" intensity threshold. An advantage of assigning additional functionality to the second "deep press" intensity threshold while maintaining familiar functionality at the first "activation" intensity threshold is that, in some cases, an inexperienced user who is confused by the additional functionality can use the familiar functionality by applying only an intensity up to the first "activation" intensity threshold, while a more experienced user can utilize the additional functionality by applying an intensity at the second "deep press" intensity threshold.
另外,对于具有对接触强度范围敏感的触敏表面的设备,该设备可通过允许用户利用单个连续接触执行复杂操作来提供附加功能。例如,当选择一组对象时,用户可围绕触敏表面移动连续接触并且可在拖动时进行按压(例如,施加大于“深按压”强度阈值的强度)以向选择添加附加元素。这样,用户可直观地与用户界面进行交互,其中利用接触较用力按压使得用户界面中的对象“更粘”。Additionally, for devices with a touch-sensitive surface that is sensitive to a range of contact intensities, the device can provide additional functionality by allowing the user to perform complex operations with a single continuous contact. For example, when selecting a group of objects, the user can move the continuous contact around the touch-sensitive surface and can press while dragging (e.g., applying an intensity greater than a "deep press" intensity threshold) to add additional elements to the selection. In this way, the user can intuitively interact with the user interface, where pressing harder with the contact makes objects in the user interface "stickier."
下文描述在设备上提供直观用户界面的多个不同方法,其中点击动作与需要达到激活阈值的力脱离和/或设备对宽的接触强度范围敏感。使用这些方法中的一种或多种方法(任选地彼此结合)有助于提供直观地向用户提供附加信息和功能的用户界面,从而减小用户的认知负担并且改进人机界面。人机界面的此类改进使得用户能够更快速且更有效地使用该设备。对于电池驱动设备,这些改进节省了功率并且增加了电池充电之间的时间。为了便于解释,下文如下描述了用于包括这些方法中的一些方法中的示例性实例的系统、方法和用户界面:The following describes a number of different methods for providing an intuitive user interface on a device, where the click action is decoupled from the force required to reach an activation threshold and/or the device is sensitive to a wide range of contact strengths. Using one or more of these methods (optionally in combination with each other) helps provide a user interface that intuitively provides additional information and functionality to the user, thereby reducing the user's cognitive burden and improving the human-computer interface. Such improvements in the human-computer interface enable the user to use the device more quickly and efficiently. For battery-powered devices, these improvements save power and increase the time between battery charges. For ease of explanation, the following describes systems, methods, and user interfaces for illustrative examples including some of these methods:
·许多电子设备具有用于执行用户界面操作诸如查看用户界面对象(照片、电子邮件消息等)和删除用户界面对象的用户界面。在一些情况下,执行破坏性操作(例如,删除电子邮件),并且在执行这些操作之前设备需要额外输入(例如,确认输入)。然而,提供输入序列对于用户来说可能是令人困惑且耗时的。在下文描述的实施例中,设备基于对应于执行特定破坏性操作的请求的接触强度来确定是否执行特定破坏性操作,从而提供用于执行破坏性操作的更直观且更有效的用户界面。具体地,图5A-图5I示出了用于执行用户界面操作的示例性用户界面。图6A-图6B是示出执行用户界面操作的方法的流程图。图5A-图5I中的用户界面用于示出图6A-图6B中的过程。Many electronic devices have user interfaces for performing user interface operations such as viewing user interface objects (photos, email messages, etc.) and deleting user interface objects. In some cases, destructive operations are performed (e.g., deleting an email), and the device requires additional input (e.g., confirming the input) before performing these operations. However, providing an input sequence can be confusing and time-consuming for the user. In the embodiments described below, the device determines whether to perform a specific destructive operation based on the contact intensity corresponding to the request to perform the specific destructive operation, thereby providing a more intuitive and efficient user interface for performing destructive operations. Specifically, Figures 5A-5I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for performing user interface operations. Figures 6A-6B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for performing user interface operations. The user interfaces in Figures 5A-5I are used to illustrate the process in Figures 6A-6B.
·许多电子设备具有包括用户界面对象的图形用户界面。在一些情况下,在用户的请求下显示与用户界面对象相关联的附加(例如,隐藏)信息。一些设备在例如在用户界面对象上方检测到焦点选择器持续延长的时间周期之后显示此类额外信息。Many electronic devices have graphical user interfaces that include user interface objects. In some cases, additional (e.g., hidden) information associated with a user interface object is displayed at the user's request. Some devices display such additional information after, for example, detecting a focus selector over the user interface object for an extended period of time.
然而,此类方法对于用户而言是耗时且令人沮丧的。下文描述的实施例提供基于触敏表面上的接触强度(例如,压力)来显示附加信息的改进的方法,从而提供用于显示附加信息的更方便且更有效的用户界面。具体地,图8A-图8N示出了用于基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)来在显示器上显示与位置(例如,对应于用户界面对象)相关联的附加信息的示例性用户界面。图9A-图9B是示出基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)来显示附加信息的方法的流程图。图8A-图8N中的用户界面用于示出图9A-图9B中的过程。However, such methods are time consuming and frustrating for users. The embodiments described below provide improved methods for displaying additional information based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure) on a touch-sensitive surface, thereby providing a more convenient and more efficient user interface for displaying additional information. Specifically, Figures 8A-8N show exemplary user interfaces for displaying additional information associated with a location (e.g., corresponding to a user interface object) on a display based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure) and contact timing (e.g., duration). Figures 9A-9B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for displaying additional information based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure) and contact timing (e.g., duration). The user interfaces in Figures 8A-8N are used to illustrate the process in Figures 9A-9B.
·许多电子设备具有包括应用程序任务栏或启动栏的图形用户界面。在一些情况下,用户能够在应用程序任务栏或启动栏中移除或重新布置图标。然而,当图标被意外地移除或重新布置时,用户可能变得沮丧或困惑。另外,添加回被意外移除的图标并撤销意外的重新布置操作对于用户来说是令人沮丧且低效的。下文描述的实施例提供用于从预定义区域诸如启动栏移除不想要的图标的改进方法,其中设备根据接触强度来确定是否在预定义区域中移除或重新布置图标,从而提供对于用户来说较不令人沮丧的更直观且更有效的用户界面。具体地,图11A-图11U示出了用于从预定义区域移除图标的示例性用户界面。图12A-图12B是示出从预定义区域移除图标的方法的流程图。图11A-图11U中的用户界面用于示出图12A-图12B中的过程。Many electronic devices have a graphical user interface that includes an application taskbar or launcher bar. In some cases, users are able to remove or rearrange icons in the application taskbar or launcher bar. However, when icons are accidentally removed or rearranged, users may become frustrated or confused. In addition, adding back the accidentally removed icons and undoing the accidental rearrangement operation is frustrating and inefficient for the user. The embodiments described below provide an improved method for removing unwanted icons from a predefined area, such as a launcher bar, wherein the device determines whether to remove or rearrange icons in the predefined area based on contact intensity, thereby providing a more intuitive and more efficient user interface that is less frustrating for the user. Specifically, Figures 11A-11U illustrate an exemplary user interface for removing icons from a predefined area. Figures 12A-12B are flow diagrams illustrating a method for removing icons from a predefined area. The user interfaces in Figures 11A-11U are used to illustrate the process in Figures 12A-12B.
·许多电子设备包括其中可显示不同的对应内容诸如内容层的应用程序或用户界面。用户易于在层内失去他们的位置或者对如何在该层中进行导航变得困惑。下文描述的实施例提供用于通过基于触敏表面上的接触强度确定是否展现下层以及任选地展现多少下层来导航并且显示内容层的有效且直观的用户界面。具体地,图14A-图14L示出了用于显示内容层的示例性用户界面。图15A-图15C是示出显示内容层的方法的流程图。图14A-图14L中的用户界面用于示出图15A-图15C中的过程。Many electronic devices include applications or user interfaces in which different corresponding content, such as layers of content, can be displayed. It is easy for users to lose their place within a layer or become confused about how to navigate within the layer. The embodiments described below provide an efficient and intuitive user interface for navigating and displaying layers of content by determining whether to reveal underlying layers, and optionally how many underlying layers to reveal, based on the intensity of contact on a touch-sensitive surface. Specifically, Figures 14A-14L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying layers of content. Figures 15A-15C are flow diagrams illustrating a method of displaying layers of content. The user interfaces in Figures 14A-14L are used to illustrate the process in Figures 15A-15C.
·许多电子设备包括具有相同对象(例如,内容诸如电子邮件或照片)的不同表示的用户界面。用于在具有触敏表面的设备上在用户界面之间导航的一些方法通常需要用户定位示能表示(例如,键或“按钮”)。然而,此类方法是有问题的,因为它们易于不准确(例如,当打算选择示能表示时,对示能表示的意外选择、对不同键的意外选择)。此类方法还通过需要另外的独立手势来增加用户的认知负担。下文描述的实施例提供用于当焦点选择器位于对象的表示上方时使用利用接触所执行的相似手势来在对应于对象的不同表示的用户界面之间进行导航的方便且直观的方法。具体地,图17A-图17H示出了用于在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的示例性用户界面。图18A-图18C是示出在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的方法的流程图。图17A-图17H中的用户界面用于示出图18A-图18C中的过程。Many electronic devices include user interfaces with different representations of the same object (e.g., content such as an email or a photo). Some methods for navigating between user interfaces on devices with a touch-sensitive surface typically require the user to locate an affordance (e.g., a key or "button"). However, such methods are problematic because they are prone to inaccuracies (e.g., accidental selection of an affordance when the affordance was intended to be selected, accidental selection of a different key). Such methods also increase the cognitive burden on the user by requiring additional, independent gestures. The embodiments described below provide convenient and intuitive methods for navigating between user interfaces corresponding to different representations of an object using similar gestures performed using touch when a focus selector is over the representation of the object. Specifically, Figures 17A-17H illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating between displayed user interfaces. Figures 18A-18C are flow diagrams illustrating a method for navigating between displayed user interfaces. The user interfaces in Figures 17A-17H are used to illustrate the process in Figures 18A-18C.
示例性设备Exemplary devices
现在将详细地参考实施例,这些实施例的实例在附图中被示出。在下面的详细描述中示出了许多具体细节以便提供对各种所述实施例的充分理解。然而,对本领域的普通技术人员将显而易见的是,可在没有这些具体细节的情况下实践各种所述实施例。在其他情况下,没有详细描述所熟知的方法、过程、部件、电路和网络,从而不会不必要地模糊实施例的各个方面。Reference will now be made in detail to the embodiments, examples of which are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. In the following detailed description, numerous specific details are provided to provide a thorough understanding of the various described embodiments. However, it will be apparent to one of ordinary skill in the art that the various described embodiments may be practiced without these specific details. In other instances, well-known methods, processes, components, circuits, and networks have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure aspects of the embodiments.
还将理解的是,虽然术语第一、第二等在本文中在一些实施例中用来描述各种元件,但是这些元件不应受这些术语限制。这些术语只是用来将一个元件与另一个元件区分开。例如,在不脱离各种所述实施例的范围的情况下,第一接触可被命名为第二接触并且类似地,第二接触可以被命名为第一接触。第一接触和第二接触二者都是接触,但是它们不是同一接触。It will also be understood that, although the terms first, second, etc. are used to describe various elements in some embodiments herein, these elements should not be limited by these terms. These terms are just used to distinguish an element from another element. For example, without departing from the scope of the various described embodiments, the first contact can be named as the second contact and similarly, the second contact can be named as the first contact. Both the first contact and the second contact are contacts, but they are not identical contacts.
在本文中对各种所述实施例的描述中所使用的术语只是为了描述特定实施例,而并非旨在进行限制。如在各种所述实施例和所附权利要求书的描述中所使用的,单数形式“一个”(“a”,“an”)和“所述”旨在也包括复数形式,除非上下文明确地另外指出。也将理解的是,本文所用的术语“和/或”是指并包括相关联的所列出的项目中的一个或多个项目的任何和所有可能的组合。另外将理解的是,当术语“包括”(“includes”“including”“comprises”和/或“comprising”)在本说明书中使用时,规定了所阐明的特征、整数、步骤、操作、元件和/或部件的存在,但不排除存在或增加一个或多个其他特征、整数、步骤、操作、元件、部件和/或它们的组。The terms used in the description of the various described embodiments herein are only for the purpose of describing specific embodiments and are not intended to be limiting. As used in the description of the various described embodiments and the appended claims, the singular forms "a," "an," and "said" are intended to include the plural forms as well, unless the context clearly indicates otherwise. It will also be understood that the terms "and/or" used herein refer to and include any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items. It will also be understood that when the terms "includes," "including," "comprises," and/or "comprising" are used in this specification, the presence of the features, integers, steps, operations, elements, and/or parts set forth are specified, but the presence or addition of one or more other features, integers, steps, operations, elements, parts, and/or groups thereof is not excluded.
根据上下文,如本文所用,术语“如果”任选地被解释为意为“当时”(“when”或“upon”)或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测到”。类似地,根据上下文,短语“如果确定”或“如果检测到[所陈述的条件或事件]”任选地被解释为意为“当确定时”或“响应于确定”或“当检测到[所陈述的条件或事件]时”或“响应于检测到[所陈述的条件或事件]”。As used herein, the term "if" is optionally interpreted to mean "when" or "upon," or "in response to determining," or "in response to detecting," depending on the context. Similarly, the phrases "if it is determined" or "if [stated condition or event] is detected" are optionally interpreted to mean "when it is determined" or "in response to determining" or "when [stated condition or event] is detected" or "in response to detecting [stated condition or event]," depending on the context.
描述了电子设备、用于这样的设备的用户界面和用于使用这样的设备的相关联过程的实施例。在一些实施例中,该设备是还包含其他功能诸如PDA和/或音乐播放器功能的便携式通信设备,诸如移动电话。便携式多功能设备的示例性实施例包括但不限于得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的iPod和设备。任选地使用其他便携式电子设备,诸如具有触敏表面(例如,触摸屏显示器和/或触摸板)的膝上型电脑或平板电脑。也应当理解的是,在一些实施例中,该设备并非便携式通信设备,而是具有触敏表面(例如,触摸屏显示器和/或触摸板)的台式计算机。Embodiments of electronic devices, user interfaces for such devices, and associated processes for using such devices are described. In some embodiments, the device is a portable communication device, such as a mobile phone, that also includes other functions, such as a PDA and/or music player functions. Exemplary embodiments of portable multifunction devices include, but are not limited to, iPods and devices from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California). Other portable electronic devices, such as laptops or tablets with touch-sensitive surfaces (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touch pads), are optionally used. It should also be understood that in some embodiments, the device is not a portable communication device, but rather a desktop computer with a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch screen displays and/or touch pads).
在下面的讨论中,描述了一种包括显示器和触敏表面的电子设备。然而,应当理解,电子设备任选地包括一个或多个其他物理用户接口设备,诸如物理键盘、鼠标和/或操纵杆。In the following discussion, an electronic device including a display and a touch-sensitive surface is described. However, it should be understood that the electronic device optionally includes one or more other physical user interface devices, such as a physical keyboard, mouse, and/or joystick.
设备通常支持多种应用程序,诸如以下应用程序中的一种或多种:绘图应用程序、呈现应用程序、文字处理应用程序、网页创建应用程序、盘编辑应用程序、电子表格应用程序、游戏应用程序、电话应用程序、视频会议应用程序、电子邮件应用程序、即时消息应用程序、健身支持应用程序、相片管理应用程序、数字相机应用程序、数字视频摄像机应用程序、网络浏览应用程序、数字音乐播放器应用程序和/或数字视频播放器应用程序。The device typically supports a variety of applications, such as one or more of the following applications: a drawing application, a rendering application, a word processing application, a web page creation application, a disk editing application, a spreadsheet application, a gaming application, a telephony application, a video conferencing application, an email application, an instant messaging application, a fitness support application, a photo management application, a digital camera application, a digital video camera application, a web browsing application, a digital music player application, and/or a digital video player application.
在设备上执行的各种应用程序任选地使用至少一个共用的物理用户接口设备诸如触敏表面。触敏表面的一种或多种功能以及显示在设备上的对应信息任选地从一种应用程序调整和/或变化至下一种应用程序和/或在相应应用程序内被调整和/或变化。这样,设备的共用物理架构(诸如触敏表面)任选地利用对于用户而言直观且清楚的用户界面来支持各种应用程序。Various applications executing on the device optionally use at least one common physical user interface device, such as a touch-sensitive surface. One or more functions of the touch-sensitive surface and corresponding information displayed on the device optionally adjust and/or change from one application to the next and/or within a respective application. In this way, the common physical architecture of the device (such as a touch-sensitive surface) optionally supports the various applications with a user interface that is intuitive and clear to the user.
现在关注具有触敏显示器的便携式设备的实施例。图1A是根据一些实施例示出具有触敏显示器112的便携式多功能设备100的框图。触敏显示器112有时为了方便被叫做“触摸屏”,并且有时被称为或被叫做触敏显示器系统。设备100包括存储器102(任选地包括一个或多个计算机可读存储介质)、存储器控制器122、一个或多个处理单元(CPU)120、外围设备接口118、RF电路108、音频电路110、扬声器111、麦克风113、输入/输出(I/O)子系统106、其他输入或控制设备116和外部端口124。设备100任选地包括一个或多个光学传感器164。设备100任选地包括用于检测设备100上的接触强度的一个或多个强度传感器165(例如,触敏表面,诸如设备100的触敏显示器系统112)。设备100任选地包括用于在设备100上生成触觉输出的一个或多个触觉输出发生器167(例如,在触敏表面诸如设备100的触敏显示器系统112或设备300的触摸板355上生成触觉输出)。这些部件任选地通过一根或多根通信总线或信号线103进行通信。Attention is now directed to embodiments of portable devices with touch-sensitive displays. Figure 1A is a block diagram illustrating a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch-sensitive display 112, in accordance with some embodiments. Touch-sensitive display 112 is sometimes referred to as a "touch screen" for convenience, and is sometimes referred to as or referred to as a touch-sensitive display system. Device 100 includes memory 102 (optionally including one or more computer-readable storage media), a memory controller 122, one or more processing units (CPUs) 120, a peripheral device interface 118, RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, a speaker 111, a microphone 113, an input/output (I/O) subsystem 106, other input or control devices 116, and external ports 124. Device 100 optionally includes one or more optical sensors 164. Device 100 optionally includes one or more intensity sensors 165 for detecting intensity of contact on device 100 (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface, such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100). Device 100 optionally includes one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output on device 100 (e.g., generating tactile output on a touch-sensitive surface such as touch-sensitive display system 112 of device 100 or touch pad 355 of device 300). These components optionally communicate via one or more communication buses or signal lines 103.
如在本说明书和权利要求书中所使用的,术语触敏表面上的接触“强度”是指触敏表面上的接触(例如,手指接触)的力或压力(每单位面积的力),或是指触敏表面上的接触的力或压力的替代物(代用物)。接触强度具有值范围,该值范围包括至少四个不同的值并且更典型地包括上百个不同的值(例如,至少256个)。接触强度任选地使用各种方法和各种传感器或传感器的组合来进行确定(或测量)。例如,在触敏表面下方或相邻于触敏表面的一个或多个力传感器任选地用于测量触敏表面上的不同点处的力。在一些实施例中,来自多个力传感器的力测量被合并(例如,加权平均数)以确定所估计的接触的力。类似地,触笔的压敏顶端任选地用于确定触笔在触敏表面上的压力。可替代地,在触敏表面上检测到的接触面积的大小和/或其变化、邻近接触的触敏表面的电容和/或其变化、和/或邻近接触的触敏表面的电阻和/或其变化任选地用作触敏表面上的接触的力或压力的替代物。在一些实施例中,接触力或压力的替代物测量直接用于确定是否已经超过强度阈值(例如,强度阈值是以对应于替代物测量的单位来描述的)。在一些实施例中,接触力或压力的替代物测量被转换成所估计的力或压力,并且所估计的力或压力用于确定是否已经超过强度阈值(例如,强度阈值是以压力的单位所测量的压力阈值)。As used in this specification and claims, the term "intensity" of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface refers to the force or pressure (force per unit area) of a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface, or to a surrogate (surrogate) for the force or pressure of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface. Contact intensity has a range of values that includes at least four different values and more typically includes hundreds of different values (e.g., at least 256). Contact intensity is optionally determined (or measured) using various methods and various sensors or combinations of sensors. For example, one or more force sensors below or adjacent to the touch-sensitive surface are optionally used to measure the force at different points on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the force measurements from multiple force sensors are combined (e.g., a weighted average) to determine the estimated force of the contact. Similarly, the pressure-sensitive tip of the stylus is optionally used to determine the pressure of the stylus on the touch-sensitive surface. Alternatively, the size of the contact area detected on the touch-sensitive surface and/or its change, the capacitance of the touch-sensitive surface adjacent to the contact and/or its change, and/or the resistance of the touch-sensitive surface adjacent to the contact and/or its change are optionally used as a surrogate for the force or pressure of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the surrogate measurement of the force or pressure of the contact is used directly to determine whether an intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is described in units corresponding to the surrogate measurement). In some embodiments, the surrogate measurement of the force or pressure of the contact is converted into an estimated force or pressure, and the estimated force or pressure is used to determine whether the intensity threshold has been exceeded (e.g., the intensity threshold is a pressure threshold measured in units of pressure).
如本说明书和权利要求书中所使用的,术语“触觉输出”是指将由用户利用用户的触摸感测所检测到的设备相对于设备的先前位置的物理位移、设备的部件(例如,触敏表面)相对于设备的另一个部件(例如,外壳)的物理位移、或部件相对于设备的质心的位移。例如,在设备或设备的部件与用户的对触摸敏感的表面(例如,手指、手掌或用户的手部的其他部分)进行接触的情况下,通过物理位移所生成的触觉输出将由用户解读为触感,该触感对应于所感知到的设备或设备部件的物理特性上的变化。例如,触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器或触摸板)的移动任选地由用户解读为对物理致动按钮的“向下点击”或“向上点击”。在一些情况下,用户将感觉到触感,诸如“向下点击”或“向上点击”,即使当通过用户的移动而物理地被按压(例如,被移位)的与触敏表面相关联的物理致动按钮没有移动时。又如,触敏表面的移动任选地由用户解读为或感测为触敏表面的“粗糙度”,即使当触敏表面的光滑度无变化时。虽然此类由用户对触摸的解读将受到用户的个体化感知限制,但是有许多触摸的感知是大多数用户所共有的。因此,当触觉输出被描述为对应于用户的特定感知(例如,“向下点击”、“向上点击”、“粗糙度”)时,除非另外陈述,否则所生成的触觉输出对应于设备或其部件的物理位移,该物理位移将会生成典型(或普通)用户的所描述的感知。As used in this specification and claims, the term "tactile output" refers to a physical displacement of a device relative to a previous position of the device, a physical displacement of a component of the device (e.g., a touch-sensitive surface) relative to another component of the device (e.g., a housing), or a displacement of a component relative to the center of mass of the device, as detected by a user using the user's touch sensing. For example, when a device or a component of the device comes into contact with a touch-sensitive surface of a user (e.g., a finger, palm, or other part of the user's hand), the tactile output generated by the physical displacement will be interpreted by the user as a tactile sensation corresponding to a perceived change in the physical properties of the device or component of the device. For example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touch-sensitive display or touchpad) is optionally interpreted by the user as a "down click" or "up click" on a physical actuation button. In some cases, the user will feel a tactile sensation, such as a "down click" or "up click," even when the physical actuation button associated with the touch-sensitive surface that is physically pressed (e.g., displaced) by the user's movement does not move. As another example, movement of a touch-sensitive surface may be interpreted or sensed by a user as "roughness" of the touch-sensitive surface, even when the smoothness of the touch-sensitive surface does not change. While such interpretation of touch by a user will be limited by the user's individualized perception, there are many perceptions of touch that are common to most users. Thus, when a tactile output is described as corresponding to a particular perception of a user (e.g., "down click," "up click," "roughness"), unless otherwise stated, the generated tactile output corresponds to a physical displacement of the device or a component thereof that would generate the described perception for a typical (or average) user.
应当理解,设备100只是一种便携式多功能设备的一个实例,并且设备100任选地具有比所示出的更多或更少的部件,任选地组合两个或更多个部件,或者任选地具有这些部件的不同配置或布置。图1A中所示的各种部件在硬件、软件或硬件和软件两者的组合中实施,该硬件或软件包括一个或多个信号处理电路和/或专用集成电路。It should be understood that device 100 is only one example of a portable multifunction device, and that device 100 optionally has more or fewer components than shown, optionally combines two or more components, or optionally has a different configuration or arrangement of the components. The various components shown in FIG1A are implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software, including one or more signal processing circuits and/or application specific integrated circuits.
存储器102任选地包括高速随机存取存储器,并且还任选地包括非易失性存储器,诸如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存存储器设备、或其他非易失性固态存储器设备。设备100的其他部件(诸如CPU 120和外围设备接口118)对存储器102的访问任选地由存储器控制器122来控制。Memory 102 optionally includes high-speed random access memory and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state memory devices. Access to memory 102 by other components of device 100 (such as CPU 120 and peripheral device interface 118) is optionally controlled by memory controller 122.
外围设备接口118可被用来将设备的输入和输出外围设备耦接到CPU 120和存储器102。该一个或多个处理器120运行或执行存储在存储器102中的各种软件程序和/或指令集以执行设备100的各种功能并处理数据。Peripherals interface 118 may be used to couple the device's input and output peripherals to CPU 120 and memory 102. The one or more processors 120 run or execute various software programs and/or instruction sets stored in memory 102 to perform various functions of device 100 and process data.
在一些实施例中,外围设备接口118、CPU 120和存储器控制器122任选地被实现在单个芯片诸如芯片104上。在一些其他实施例中,它们任选地被实现在独立的芯片上。In some embodiments, peripherals interface 118, CPU 120, and memory controller 122 are optionally implemented on a single chip, such as chip 104. In some other embodiments, they are optionally implemented on separate chips.
RF(射频)电路108接收和发送也被叫做电磁信号的RF信号。RF电路108将电信号转换为电磁信号/将电磁信号转换为电信号,并且经由电磁信号来与通信网络及其他通信设备进行通信。RF电路108任选地包括用于执行这些功能的所熟知的电路,包括但不限于天线系统、RF收发器、调谐器、数字信号处理器、编解码芯片组、用户身份模块(SIM)卡、存储器、一个或多个放大器、一个或多个振荡器等等。RF电路108任选地通过无线通信来与网络以及其他设备进行通信,该网络诸如是互联网(也被称为万维网(WWW))、内联网和/或无线网络(诸如蜂窝电话网络、无线局域网(LAN)和/或城域网(MAN))。无线通信任选地使用多种通信标准、协议和技术中的任何一种,包括但不限于全球移动通信系统(GSM)、增强数据GSM环境(EDGE)、高速下行链路分组接入(HSDPA)、高速上行链路分组接入(HSUPA)、演进、纯数据(EV-DO)、HSPA、HSPA+、双单元HSPA(DC-HSPDA)、长期演进(LTE)、近场通信(NFC)、宽带码分多址(W-CDMA)、码分多址(CDMA)、时分多址(TDMA)、蓝牙、无线保真(Wi-Fi)(例如,IEEE802.11a、IEEE 802.11b、IEEE 802.11g和/或IEEE 802.11n)、互联网协议语音技术(VoiP)、Wi-MAX、电子邮件的协议(例如,互联网消息访问协议(IMAP)和/或邮局协议(POP))、即时消息(例如,可扩展消息处理现场协议(XMPP)、用于即时消息和现场利用扩展的会话发起协议(SIMPLE)、即时消息和现场服务(IMPS))和/或短消息服务(SMS)、或者其他任何适当的通信协议,包括在本文档提交日期还未开发出的通信协议。RF (radio frequency) circuitry 108 receives and transmits RF signals, also known as electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 converts electrical signals into/from electromagnetic signals and communicates with a communication network and other communication devices via the electromagnetic signals. RF circuitry 108 optionally includes well-known circuitry for performing these functions, including but not limited to an antenna system, an RF transceiver, a tuner, a digital signal processor, a codec chipset, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card, memory, one or more amplifiers, one or more oscillators, and the like. RF circuitry 108 optionally communicates with a network and other devices via wireless communications, such as the Internet (also known as the World Wide Web (WWW)), an intranet, and/or a wireless network (such as a cellular telephone network, a wireless local area network (LAN), and/or a metropolitan area network (MAN)). Wireless communication optionally uses any of a variety of communication standards, protocols, and technologies, including, but not limited to, Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM), Enhanced Data GSM Environment (EDGE), High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA), High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA), Evolution, Data Only (EV-DO), HSPA, HSPA+, Dual Cell HSPA (DC-HSPDA), Long Term Evolution (LTE), Near Field Communication (NFC), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA), Bluetooth, Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) (e.g., IEEE 802.11a, IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, and/or IEEE 802.11d), 802.11n), Voice over Internet Protocol (VoiP), Wi-MAX, protocols for email (e.g., Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) and/or Post Office Protocol (POP)), instant messaging (e.g., Extensible Messaging and Presence Protocol (XMPP), Session Initiation Protocol for Instant Messaging and Presence Utilization Extensions (SIMPLE), Instant Messaging and Presence Services (IMPS)) and/or Short Message Service (SMS), or any other suitable communication protocol, including communication protocols that have not yet been developed on the date of filing this document.
音频电路110、扬声器111和麦克风113提供用户与设备100之间的音频接口。音频电路110从外围设备接口118接收音频数据,将音频数据转换为电信号,并将电信号传输到扬声器111。扬声器111将电信号转换为人类可听的声波。音频电路110还由麦克风113接收从声波转换来的电信号。音频电路110将电信号转换为音频数据,并将音频数据传输到外围设备接口118以用于处理。音频数据任选地由外围设备接口118检索自和/或传输至存储器102和/或RF电路108。在一些实施例中,音频电路110还包括耳麦插孔(例如,图2中的212)。耳麦插孔提供音频电路110与可移除的音频输入/输出外围设备之间的接口,该外围设备诸如仅输出的耳机或者具有输出(例如,单耳或双耳耳机)和输入(例如,麦克风)二者的耳麦。The audio circuit 110, speaker 111, and microphone 113 provide an audio interface between the user and the device 100. The audio circuit 110 receives audio data from the peripheral device interface 118, converts the audio data into electrical signals, and transmits the electrical signals to the speaker 111. The speaker 111 converts the electrical signals into sound waves audible to humans. The audio circuit 110 also receives electrical signals converted from sound waves from the microphone 113. The audio circuit 110 converts the electrical signals into audio data and transmits the audio data to the peripheral device interface 118 for processing. The audio data is optionally retrieved from and/or transmitted to the memory 102 and/or the RF circuit 108 by the peripheral device interface 118. In some embodiments, the audio circuit 110 also includes a headset jack (e.g., 212 in FIG. 2 ). The headset jack provides an interface between the audio circuit 110 and a removable audio input/output peripheral device, such as an output-only headset or a headset with both output (e.g., single-ear or dual-ear headphones) and input (e.g., a microphone).
I/O子系统106将设备100上的输入/输出外围设备诸如触摸屏112和其他输入控制设备116耦接到外围设备接口118。I/O子系统106任选地包括显示控制器156、光学传感器控制器158、强度传感器控制器159、触觉反馈控制器161和用于其他输入或控制设备的一个或多个输入控制器160。该一个或多个输入控制器160从其他输入控制设备116接收电信号/将电信号发送到其他输入控制设备116。其他输入控制设备116任选地包括物理按钮(例如,下压按钮、摇臂按钮等)、拨号盘、滑动开关、操纵杆、点击轮等等。在一些另选实施例中,一个或多个输入控制器160任选地耦接到(或不耦接到)以下设备中任一个设备:键盘、红外线端口、USB端口和指针设备诸如鼠标。一个或多个按钮(例如,图2中的208)任选地包括用于扬声器111和/或麦克风113的音量控制的增大/减小按钮。一个或多个按钮任选地包括下压按钮(例如,图2中的206)。The I/O subsystem 106 couples input/output peripherals on the device 100, such as the touch screen 112 and other input control devices 116, to a peripheral device interface 118. The I/O subsystem 106 optionally includes a display controller 156, an optical sensor controller 158, an intensity sensor controller 159, a haptic feedback controller 161, and one or more input controllers 160 for other input or control devices. The one or more input controllers 160 receive/send electrical signals from/to other input control devices 116. Other input control devices 116 optionally include physical buttons (e.g., push buttons, rocker buttons, etc.), dials, slide switches, joysticks, click wheels, and the like. In some alternative embodiments, the one or more input controllers 160 are optionally coupled to (or not coupled to) any of the following devices: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB port, and a pointer device such as a mouse. The one or more buttons (e.g., 208 in FIG. 2 ) optionally include an up/down button for volume control of the speaker 111 and/or microphone 113. The one or more buttons optionally include a push button (eg, 206 in FIG. 2 ).
触敏显示器112提供设备与用户之间的输入接口和输出接口。显示控制器156从触摸屏112接收电信号和/或向触摸屏112发送电信号。触摸屏112向用户显示视觉输出。视觉输出任选地包括图形、文本、图标、视频和它们的任何组合(统称为“图形”)。在一些实施例中,一些或全部视觉输出对应于用户界面对象。The touch-sensitive display 112 provides an input interface and an output interface between the device and the user. The display controller 156 receives and/or sends electrical signals to the touch screen 112. The touch screen 112 displays visual output to the user. The visual output optionally includes graphics, text, icons, video, and any combination thereof (collectively referred to as "graphics"). In some embodiments, some or all of the visual output corresponds to user interface objects.
触摸屏112具有基于触觉和/或触觉接触从用户接受输入的触敏表面、传感器或传感器组。触摸屏112和显示控制器156(与存储器102中的任何相关联模块和/或指令集一起)检测触摸屏112上的接触(和该接触的任何移动或中断),并且将所检测到的接触转换为与显示在触摸屏112上的用户界面对象(例如,一个或多个软键、图标、网页或图像)的交互。在示例性实施例中,触摸屏112与用户之间的接触点对应于用户的手指。The touch screen 112 has a touch-sensitive surface, sensor, or sensor group that accepts input from the user based on tactile and/or tactile contact. The touch screen 112 and display controller 156 (together with any associated modules and/or instruction sets in memory 102) detect contact on the touch screen 112 (and any movement or interruption of that contact) and convert the detected contact into interaction with a user interface object (e.g., one or more soft keys, icons, web pages, or images) displayed on the touch screen 112. In an exemplary embodiment, the point of contact between the touch screen 112 and the user corresponds to the user's finger.
触摸屏112任选地使用LCD(液晶显示器)技术、LPD(发光聚合物显示器)技术、或LED(发光二极管)技术,但是在其他实施例中使用其他显示技术。触摸屏112和显示控制器156任选地使用现在已知的或以后将开发出的多种触摸感测技术中的任何技术以及其他接近传感器阵列或用于确定与触摸屏112的一个或多个接触点的其他元件来检测接触及其任何移动或中断,该多种触摸感测技术包括但不限于电容性的、电阻性的、红外线的和表面声波技术。在一示例性实施例中,使用投射式互电容感测技术,诸如从Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的iPod和发现的技术。The touch screen 112 optionally uses LCD (liquid crystal display) technology, LPD (light emitting polymer display) technology, or LED (light emitting diode) technology, although other display technologies are used in other embodiments. The touch screen 112 and display controller 156 optionally use any of a variety of touch sensing technologies now known or later developed, including but not limited to capacitive, resistive, infrared, and surface acoustic wave technologies, as well as other proximity sensor arrays or other elements for determining one or more points of contact with the touch screen 112 to detect contact and any movement or interruption thereof. In an exemplary embodiment, projected mutual capacitance sensing technology is used, such as that found in the iPod and the iPhone from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California).
触摸屏112任选地具有超过100dpi的视频分辨率。在一些实施例中,触摸屏具有大约160dpi的视频分辨率。用户任选地使用任何合适的物体或附加物诸如触笔、手指等等来与触摸屏112接触。在一些实施例中,用户界面被设计为主要与基于手指的接触和手势一起工作,这与基于触笔的输入相比由于手指在触摸屏上接触面积更大而可能精确度更低。在一些实施例中,设备将基于手指的粗略输入翻译为精确的指针/光标位置或命令以用于执行用户所期望的动作。The touch screen 112 optionally has a video resolution exceeding 100 dpi. In some embodiments, the touch screen has a video resolution of approximately 160 dpi. The user optionally uses any suitable object or appendage, such as a stylus, finger, or the like, to contact the touch screen 112. In some embodiments, the user interface is designed to work primarily with finger-based contacts and gestures, which may be less precise than stylus-based input due to the larger contact area of a finger on the touch screen. In some embodiments, the device translates rough finger-based input into precise pointer/cursor positions or commands for performing the user's desired action.
在一些实施例中,除了触摸屏之外,设备100任选地包括用于激活或去激活特定功能的触摸板(未示出)。在一些实施例中,触摸板是设备的触敏区域,该触敏区域与触摸屏不同,其不显示视觉输出。触摸板任选地为与触摸屏112分开的触敏表面,或者是由触摸屏形成的触敏表面的延伸部分。In some embodiments, in addition to the touch screen, device 100 optionally includes a touchpad (not shown) for activating or deactivating specific functions. In some embodiments, the touchpad is a touch-sensitive area of the device that, unlike the touch screen, does not display visual output. The touchpad is optionally a touch-sensitive surface separate from touch screen 112 or an extension of the touch-sensitive surface formed by the touch screen.
设备100还包括用于为各种部件供电的电力系统162。电力系统162任选地包括电力管理系统、一个或多个电源(例如,电池、交流电(AC))、再充电系统、电力故障检测电路、功率转换器或逆变器、电力状态指示器(例如,发光二极管(LED))和与便携式设备中电力的生成、管理和分配相关联的任何其他部件。Device 100 also includes a power system 162 for powering the various components. Power system 162 optionally includes a power management system, one or more power sources (e.g., batteries, alternating current (AC)), a recharging system, power fault detection circuitry, a power converter or inverter, a power status indicator (e.g., a light emitting diode (LED)), and any other components associated with the generation, management, and distribution of power in a portable device.
设备100任选地还包括一个或多个光学传感器164。图1A示出了耦接到I/O子系统106中的光学传感器控制器158的光学传感器。光学传感器164任选地包括电荷耦合器件(CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(CMOS)光电晶体管。光学传感器164从环境接收通过一个或多个透镜所投射的光,并且将光转换为表示图像的数据。结合成像模块143(也叫做相机模块),光学传感器164任选地捕获静态图像或视频。在一些实施例中,光学传感器位于设备100的后部上,与设备前部上的触摸屏显示器112相对,使得触摸屏显示器能够用作用于静态图像和/或视频图像采集的取景器。在一些实施例中,另一个光学传感器位于设备的前部上,使得用户在触摸屏显示器上查看其他视频会议参与者的同时,任选地获得该用户的图像以用于视频会议。The device 100 optionally also includes one or more optical sensors 164. Figure 1A shows an optical sensor coupled to the optical sensor controller 158 in the I/O subsystem 106. The optical sensor 164 optionally includes a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The optical sensor 164 receives light projected from the environment through one or more lenses and converts the light into data representing an image. In conjunction with the imaging module 143 (also called a camera module), the optical sensor 164 optionally captures still images or video. In some embodiments, the optical sensor is located on the rear of the device 100, opposite the touch screen display 112 on the front of the device, so that the touch screen display can be used as a viewfinder for still images and/or video image acquisition. In some embodiments, another optical sensor is located on the front of the device so that the user can optionally obtain an image of the user for video conferencing while viewing other video conference participants on the touch screen display.
设备100任选地还包括一个或多个接触强度传感器165。图1A示出耦接到I/O子系统106中的强度传感器控制器159的接触强度传感器。接触强度传感器165任选地包括一个或多个压阻应变计、电容式力传感器、电力传感器、压电力传感器、光学力传感器、电容式触敏表面或其他强度传感器(例如,用于测量触敏表面上的接触的力(或压力)的传感器)。接触强度传感器165从环境接收接触强度信息(例如,压力信息或压力信息的代用物)。在一些实施例中,至少一个接触强度传感器与触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器系统112)并置排列或邻近。在一些实施例中,至少一个接触强度传感器位于设备100的后部上,与位于设备100的前部上的触摸屏显示器112相对。Device 100 optionally also includes one or more contact force sensors 165. FIG1A shows a contact force sensor coupled to force sensor controller 159 in I/O subsystem 106. Contact force sensor 165 optionally includes one or more piezoresistive strain gauges, capacitive force sensors, electrical force sensors, piezoelectric force sensors, optical force sensors, capacitive touch-sensitive surfaces, or other force sensors (e.g., sensors for measuring the force (or pressure) of a contact on a touch-sensitive surface). Contact force sensor 165 receives contact force information (e.g., pressure information or a surrogate for pressure information) from the environment. In some embodiments, at least one contact force sensor is juxtaposed with or adjacent to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112). In some embodiments, at least one contact force sensor is located on the back of device 100, opposite touch screen display 112 located on the front of device 100.
设备100任选地还包括一个或多个接近传感器166。图1A示出了耦接到外围设备接口118的接近传感器166。作为另外一种选择,接近传感器166耦接到I/O子系统106中的输入控制器160。在一些实施例中,当多功能设备被放置在用户耳朵附近时(例如,当用户进行电话呼叫时),所述接近传感器关闭并禁用触摸屏112。Device 100 optionally also includes one or more proximity sensors 166. FIG1A shows proximity sensor 166 coupled to peripherals interface 118. Alternatively, proximity sensor 166 is coupled to input controller 160 in I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, the proximity sensor turns off and disables touch screen 112 when the multifunction device is placed near a user's ear (e.g., when the user is making a phone call).
设备100任选地还包括一个或多个触觉输出发生器167。图1A示出耦接到I/O子系统106中的触觉反馈控制器161的触觉输出发生器。触觉输出发生器167任选地包括一个或多个电声设备诸如扬声器或其他音频部件;和/或将能量转换成线性运动的机电设备诸如电机、螺线管、电活性聚合物、压电致动器、静电致动器或其他触觉输出发生部件(例如,将电信号转换成设备上的触觉输出的部件)。接触强度传感器165从触觉反馈模块133接收触觉反馈生成指令并且在设备100上生成能够由设备100的用户感测到的触觉输出。在一些实施例中,至少一个触觉输出发生器与触敏表面(例如,触敏显示器系统112)并置排列或邻近,并且任选地通过竖直地(例如,向设备100的表面之内/之外)或侧向地(例如,在与设备100的表面相同的平面中的后和前)移动触敏表面来生成触觉输出。在一些实施例中,至少一个触觉输出发生器传感器位于设备100的后部上,与位于设备100的前部上的触摸屏显示器112相对。Device 100 optionally also includes one or more tactile output generators 167. FIG1A shows a tactile output generator coupled to tactile feedback controller 161 in I/O subsystem 106. Tactile output generator 167 optionally includes one or more electroacoustic devices such as speakers or other audio components; and/or electromechanical devices that convert energy into linear motion such as motors, solenoids, electroactive polymers, piezoelectric actuators, electrostatic actuators, or other tactile output generating components (e.g., components that convert electrical signals into tactile outputs on the device). Contact force sensor 165 receives tactile feedback generation instructions from tactile feedback module 133 and generates tactile outputs on device 100 that can be sensed by a user of device 100. In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator is juxtaposed or adjacent to a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112) and optionally generates tactile outputs by moving the touch-sensitive surface vertically (e.g., inward/outward of the surface of device 100) or laterally (e.g., back and front in the same plane as the surface of device 100). In some embodiments, at least one tactile output generator sensor is located on the back of device 100 , opposite touch screen display 112 located on the front of device 100 .
设备100任选地还包括一个或多个加速度计168。图1A示出了耦接到外围设备接口118的加速度计168。作为另外一种选择,加速度计168任选地耦接到I/O子系统106中的输入控制器160。在一些实施例中,信息基于对从该一个或多个加速度计所接收的数据的分析来在触摸屏显示器上以纵向视图或横向视图被显示。除了一个或多个加速度计168之外,设备100还任选地包括磁力仪(未示出)和GPS(或GLONASS或其他全球导航系统)接收器(未示出)以用于获得关于设备100的位置和取向(例如,纵向或横向)的信息。The device 100 optionally also includes one or more accelerometers 168. FIG1A shows an accelerometer 168 coupled to the peripherals interface 118. Alternatively, the accelerometer 168 is optionally coupled to the input controller 160 in the I/O subsystem 106. In some embodiments, information is displayed on the touch screen display in a portrait view or a landscape view based on an analysis of data received from the one or more accelerometers. In addition to the one or more accelerometers 168, the device 100 optionally includes a magnetometer (not shown) and a GPS (or GLONASS or other global navigation system) receiver (not shown) for obtaining information about the position and orientation (e.g., portrait or landscape) of the device 100.
在一些实施例中,存储在存储器102中的软件部件包括操作系统126、通信模块(或指令集)128、接触/运动模块(或指令集)130、图形模块(或指令集)132、文本输入模块(或指令集)134、全球定位系统(GPS)模块(或指令集)135以及应用程序(或指令集)136。此外,在一些实施例中,存储器102存储设备/全局内部状态157,如图1A和3中所示。设备/全局内部状态157包括以下状态中的一者或多者:活动应用程序状态,该活动应用程序状态用于指示哪些应用程序(如果有的话)当前是活动的;显示状态,该显示状态用于指示什么应用程序、视图或其他信息占据触摸屏显示器112的各个区域;传感器状态,该传感器状态包括从设备的各个传感器和输入控制设备116所获得的信息;以及关于设备的位置和/或姿态的位置信息。In some embodiments, the software components stored in memory 102 include an operating system 126, a communication module (or instruction set) 128, a contact/motion module (or instruction set) 130, a graphics module (or instruction set) 132, a text input module (or instruction set) 134, a global positioning system (GPS) module (or instruction set) 135, and applications (or instruction sets) 136. In addition, in some embodiments, memory 102 stores a device/global internal state 157, as shown in Figures 1A and 3. The device/global internal state 157 includes one or more of the following states: an active application state, which indicates which applications (if any) are currently active; a display state, which indicates what applications, views, or other information occupy various areas of the touch screen display 112; a sensor state, which includes information obtained from various sensors and input control devices 116 of the device; and position information regarding the position and/or posture of the device.
操作系统126(例如,Darwin、RTXC、LINUX、UNIX、OS X、WINDOWS、或嵌入式操作系统诸如VxWorks)包括用于控制和管理一般系统任务(例如,存储器管理、存储设备控制、电力管理等)的各种软件部件和/或驱动器,并且有利于各种硬件和软件部件之间的通信。The operating system 126 (e.g., Darwin, RTXC, LINUX, UNIX, OS X, WINDOWS, or an embedded operating system such as VxWorks) includes various software components and/or drivers for controlling and managing general system tasks (e.g., memory management, storage device control, power management, etc.) and facilitates communication between various hardware and software components.
通信模块128有利于通过一个或多个外部端口124来与其他设备进行通信,并且还包括用于处理由RF电路108和/或外部端口124所接收的数据的各种软件部件。外部端口124(例如,通用串行总线(USB)、火线等)适于直接耦接到其他设备或者间接地通过网络(例如,互联网、无线LAN等)进行耦接。在一些实施例中,外部端口是与iPod(Apple Inc.的商标)设备上所使用的30针连接器相同的或类似的和/或与其兼容的多针(例如,30针)连接器。The communication module 128 facilitates communication with other devices via one or more external ports 124 and also includes various software components for processing data received by the RF circuitry 108 and/or the external ports 124. The external ports 124 (e.g., Universal Serial Bus (USB), FireWire, etc.) are suitable for coupling directly to other devices or indirectly via a network (e.g., the Internet, a wireless LAN, etc.). In some embodiments, the external port is a multi-pin (e.g., 30-pin) connector that is the same as, similar to, and/or compatible with the 30-pin connector used on iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) devices.
接触/运动模块130任选地检测与触摸屏112(结合显示控制器156)和其他触敏设备(例如,触摸板或物理点击轮)的接触。接触/运动模块130包括各种软件部件以用于执行与接触检测相关的各种操作,诸如确定是否已经发生了接触(例如,检测手指按下事件)、确定接触强度(例如,接触的力或压力,或者接触的力或压力的替代物)、确定是否存在接触的移动并跟踪在触敏表面上的移动(例如,检测一个或多个手指拖动事件),以及确定接触是否已经停止(例如,检测手指抬起事件或者接触断开)。接触/运动模块130从触敏表面接收接触数据。确定接触点的移动任选地包括确定接触点的速率(量值)、速度(量值和方向)和/或加速度(量值和/或方向的改变),接触点的移动由一系列接触数据来表示。这些操作任选地被应用于单个接触(例如,一个手指接触)或多个同时接触(例如,“多触摸”/多个手指接触)。在一些实施例中,接触/运动模块130和显示控制器156检测触摸板上的接触。The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects contact with the touch screen 112 (in conjunction with the display controller 156) and other touch-sensitive devices (e.g., a touchpad or physical click wheel). The contact/motion module 130 includes various software components for performing various operations related to contact detection, such as determining whether contact has occurred (e.g., detecting a finger down event), determining the strength of the contact (e.g., the force or pressure of the contact, or a surrogate for the force or pressure of the contact), determining whether there has been movement of the contact and tracking the movement on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., detecting one or more finger drag events), and determining whether the contact has ceased (e.g., detecting a finger up event or a break in contact). The contact/motion module 130 receives contact data from the touch-sensitive surface. Determining the movement of a contact point optionally includes determining the rate (magnitude), velocity (magnitude and direction), and/or acceleration (change in magnitude and/or direction) of the contact point, with the movement of the contact point represented by a series of contact data. These operations are optionally applied to a single contact (e.g., a single finger contact) or multiple simultaneous contacts (e.g., "multi-touch"/multiple finger contacts). In some embodiments, contact/motion module 130 and display controller 156 detect contact on a touchpad.
在一些实施例中,接触/运动模块130使用一组一个或多个强度阈值来确定操作是否已由用户执行(例如,确定用户是否已“点击”图标)。在一些实施例中,根据软件参数来确定强度阈值的至少一个子集(例如,强度阈值不是由特定物理致动器的激活阈值来确定的,并且可在不改变设备100的物理硬件的情况下被调整)。例如,在不改变触摸板或触摸屏显示器硬件的情况下,触摸板或触摸屏的鼠标“点击”阈值可被设定成预定义的阈值的大范围中的任一个。另外,在一些具体实施中,向设备的用户提供用于调整强度阈值组中的一个或多个强度阈值(例如,通过调整各个强度阈值和/或通过利用对“强度”参数的系统级点击一次调整多个强度阈值)的软件设置。In some embodiments, the contact/motion module 130 uses a set of one or more intensity thresholds to determine whether an action has been performed by a user (e.g., to determine whether a user has "clicked" an icon). In some embodiments, at least a subset of the intensity thresholds are determined based on software parameters (e.g., the intensity thresholds are not determined by the activation thresholds of specific physical actuators and can be adjusted without changing the physical hardware of the device 100). For example, a mouse "click" threshold for a touchpad or touchscreen can be set to any one of a large range of predefined thresholds without changing the touchpad or touchscreen display hardware. Additionally, in some implementations, a software setting is provided to the user of the device for adjusting one or more intensity thresholds in the set of intensity thresholds (e.g., by adjusting individual intensity thresholds and/or by adjusting multiple intensity thresholds at once using a system-level click on an "intensity" parameter).
接触/运动模块130任选地检测用户的手势输入。触敏表面上的不同手势具有不同的接触图案和强度。因此,任选地通过检测具体接触图案来检测手势。例如,检测单指轻击手势包括检测手指按下事件,然后在与手指按下事件相同的位置(或基本上相同的位置)处(例如,在图标位置处)检测手指抬起(抬离)事件。又如,在触敏表面上检测手指轻扫手势包括检测手指按下事件,然后检测一个或多个手指拖动事件,并且随后检测手指抬起(抬离)事件。The contact/motion module 130 optionally detects gesture input from the user. Different gestures on the touch-sensitive surface have different contact patterns and intensities. Therefore, gestures are optionally detected by detecting specific contact patterns. For example, detecting a single-finger tap gesture includes detecting a finger press event and then detecting a finger lift (lift-off) event at the same location (or substantially the same location) as the finger press event (e.g., at an icon location). For another example, detecting a finger swipe gesture on the touch-sensitive surface includes detecting a finger press event, then detecting one or more finger drag events, and then detecting a finger lift (lift-off) event.
图形模块132包括用于在触摸屏112或其他显示器上呈现和显示图形的各种已知软件部件,包括用于改变所显示的图形的视觉冲击(例如,亮度、透明度、饱和度、对比度或其他视觉特性)的部件。如本文所用,术语“图形”包括可被显示给用户的任何对象,非限制性地包括文本、网页、图标(诸如包括软键的用户界面对象)、数字图像、视频、动画等等。The graphics module 132 includes various known software components for rendering and displaying graphics on the touch screen 112 or other display, including components for changing the visual impact (e.g., brightness, transparency, saturation, contrast, or other visual characteristics) of the displayed graphics. As used herein, the term "graphics" includes any object that can be displayed to a user, including, but not limited to, text, web pages, icons (such as user interface objects including soft keys), digital images, videos, animations, and the like.
在一些实施例中,图形模块132存储要使用的数据表示图形。每个图形任选地被分配有对应的代码。图形模块132从应用程序等接收指定要显示的图形的一个或多个代码,在必要的情况下还一起接收坐标数据和其他图形属性数据,并且然后生成屏幕图像数据来输出至显示控制器156。In some embodiments, the graphics module 132 stores data representing graphics to be used. Each graphic is optionally assigned a corresponding code. The graphics module 132 receives one or more codes specifying the graphics to be displayed from an application program, etc., along with coordinate data and other graphic attribute data, if necessary, and then generates screen image data for output to the display controller 156.
触觉反馈模块133包括用于生成指令的各种软件部件,这些指令由一个或多个触觉输出发生器167使用以便响应于用户与设备100的交互而在设备100上的一个或多个位置处产生触觉输出。Haptic feedback module 133 includes various software components for generating instructions used by one or more tactile output generators 167 to produce tactile output at one or more locations on device 100 in response to user interaction with device 100 .
任选地为图形模块132的部件的文本输入模块134提供用于在各种应用程序(例如,联系人137、电子邮件140、IM 141、浏览器147和需要文本输入的任何其他应用程序)中输入文本的软键盘。Text input module 134, which is optionally a component of graphics module 132, provides a soft keyboard for entering text in various applications (e.g., contacts 137, email 140, IM 141, browser 147, and any other application requiring text input).
GPS模块135确定了设备的位置并提供了在各种应用程序中使用的这些信息(例如,提供至用于基于位置的拨号的电话138,提供至相机143作为图片/视频元数据),以及提供至提供基于位置的服务诸如天气桌面小程序、当地黄页桌面小程序和地图/导航桌面小程序的应用程序)。The GPS module 135 determines the location of the device and provides this information for use in various applications (e.g., to the phone 138 for location-based dialing, to the camera 143 as picture/video metadata, and to applications that provide location-based services such as the weather widget, local pages widget, and map/navigation widget).
应用程序136任选地包括以下模块(或指令集)或者其子集或超集:Application 136 optionally includes the following modules (or instruction sets), or a subset or superset thereof:
·联系人模块137(有时叫做通讯录或联系人列表);Contacts module 137 (sometimes called address book or contact list);
·电话模块138;Telephone module 138;
·视频会议模块139;Video conferencing module 139;
·电子邮件客户端模块140;Email client module 140;
·即时消息(IM)模块141;Instant messaging (IM) module 141;
·健身支持模块142;Fitness support module 142;
·用于静止图像和/或视频图像的相机模块143;A camera module 143 for still and/or video images;
·图像管理模块144;Image management module 144;
·浏览器模块147;Browser module 147;
·日历模块148;Calendar module 148;
·桌面小程序模块149,该桌面小程序模块任选地包括以下中一者或多者:天气桌面小程序149-1、股市桌面小程序149-2、计算器桌面小程序149-3、闹钟桌面小程序149-4、词典桌面小程序149-5和由用户获取的其他桌面小程序以及用户创建的桌面小程序149-6;A widget module 149, which optionally includes one or more of the following: a weather widget 149-1, a stock widget 149-2, a calculator widget 149-3, an alarm clock widget 149-4, a dictionary widget 149-5, and other widgets acquired by the user and a widget 149-6 created by the user;
·用于形成用户创建的桌面小程序149-6的桌面小程序创建者模块150;A widget creator module 150 for forming user-created widgets 149-6;
·搜索模块151;Search module 151;
·视频和音乐播放器模块152,该视频和音乐播放器模块任选地由视频播放器模块和音乐播放器模块构成;Video and music player module 152, which is optionally composed of a video player module and a music player module;
·记事本模块153;Notepad module 153;
·地图模块154;和/或Map module 154; and/or
·在线视频模块155。Online video module 155.
任选地存储在存储器102中的其他应用程序136的实例包括其他文字处理应用程序、其他图像编辑应用程序、绘图应用程序、呈现应用程序、支持JAVA的应用程序、加密、数字权益管理、语音识别和语音复制。Examples of other applications 136 optionally stored in memory 102 include other word processing applications, other image editing applications, drawing applications, rendering applications, JAVA-enabled applications, encryption, digital rights management, voice recognition, and voice replication.
结合触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,联系人模块137任选地用于管理通讯录或联系人列表(例如,存储在存储器102或存储器370中的联系人模块137的应用程序内部状态192中),包括:将一个或多个姓名添加到通讯录;从通讯录删除一个或多个姓名;将一个或多个电话号码、一个或多个电子邮件地址、一个或多个物理地址或其他信息与姓名相关联;将图像与姓名相关联;对姓名进行分类和归类;提供电话号码或电子邮件地址来发起和/或促进通过电话138、视频会议139、电子邮件140或IM 141的通信;等等。In conjunction with the touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, the contacts module 137 is optionally used to manage an address book or contact list (e.g., stored in the application internal state 192 of the contacts module 137 in memory 102 or memory 370), including: adding one or more names to the address book; deleting one or more names from the address book; associating one or more phone numbers, one or more email addresses, one or more physical addresses, or other information with a name; associating images with a name; categorizing and classifying names; providing phone numbers or email addresses to initiate and/or facilitate communications via telephone 138, video conferencing 139, email 140, or IM 141; and so on.
结合RF电路108、音频电路110、扬声器111、麦克风113、触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,电话模块138任选地被用于输入对应于电话号码的字符序列、访问通讯录137中的一个或多个电话号码、修改已经输入的电话号码、拨打相应的电话号码、进行会话以及当会话完成时断开或挂断。如上所述,无线通信任选地使用多种通信标准、协议和技术中的任一种。In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, phone module 138 is optionally used to enter a character sequence corresponding to a telephone number, access one or more telephone numbers in address book 137, modify an already entered telephone number, dial the corresponding telephone number, conduct a conversation, and disconnect or hang up when the conversation is complete. As described above, wireless communication optionally uses any of a variety of communication standards, protocols, and technologies.
结合RF电路108、音频电路110、扬声器111、麦克风113、触摸屏112、显示控制器156、光学传感器164、光学传感器控制器158、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、联系人列表137和电话模块138,视频会议模块139包括根据用户指令发起、进行和终止用户与一个或多个其他参与方之间的视频会议的可执行指令。In combination with RF circuitry 108, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, microphone 113, touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor 164, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, contact list 137, and phone module 138, video conferencing module 139 includes executable instructions for initiating, conducting, and terminating a video conference between a user and one or more other participants in accordance with user instructions.
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,电子邮件客户端模块140包括响应于用户指令来创建、发送、接收和管理电子邮件的可执行指令。结合图像管理模块144,电子邮件客户端模块140使得非常容易创建和发送具有由相机模块143拍摄的静态图像或视频图像的电子邮件。In conjunction with RF circuitry 108, touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, and text input module 134, email client module 140 includes executable instructions for creating, sending, receiving, and managing emails in response to user instructions. In conjunction with image management module 144, email client module 140 makes it very easy to create and send emails with still images or video images captured by camera module 143.
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,即时消息模块141包括用于输入对应于即时消息的字符序列、修改先前输入的字符、传输相应即时消息(例如,使用短消息服务(SMS)或多媒体消息服务(MMS)协议以用于基于电话的即时消息或者使用XMPP、SIMPLE、或IMPS以用于基于互联网的即时消息)、接收即时消息以及查看所接收的即时消息的可执行指令。在一些实施例中,所传输和/或接收的即时消息任选地包括图形、相片、音频文件、视频文件和/或MMS和/或增强消息服务(EMS)中所支持的其他附接件。如本文所用,“即时消息”是指基于电话的消息(例如,使用SMS或MMS发送的消息)和基于互联网的消息(例如,使用XMPP、SIMPLE、或IMPS发送的消息)两者。In conjunction with the RF circuitry 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, and the text input module 134, the instant messaging module 141 includes executable instructions for entering a character sequence corresponding to an instant message, modifying previously entered characters, transmitting the corresponding instant message (e.g., using the Short Message Service (SMS) or Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) protocol for phone-based instant messaging or using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS for Internet-based instant messaging), receiving instant messages, and viewing received instant messages. In some embodiments, the transmitted and/or received instant messages optionally include graphics, photos, audio files, video files, and/or other attachments supported in MMS and/or Enhanced Messaging Service (EMS). As used herein, "instant messaging" refers to both phone-based messages (e.g., messages sent using SMS or MMS) and Internet-based messages (e.g., messages sent using XMPP, SIMPLE, or IMPS).
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、GPS模块135、地图模块154和音乐播放器模块146,健身支持模块142包括创建健身(例如,具有时间、距离和/或卡路里燃烧目标)的可执行指令;与健身传感器(运动设备)进行通信;接收健身传感器数据;校准用于监视健身的传感器;选择和播放用于健身的音乐;以及显示、存储和传输健身数据。In combination with the RF circuitry 108, the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the GPS module 135, the map module 154, and the music player module 146, the fitness support module 142 includes executable instructions for creating a fitness (e.g., with time, distance, and/or calorie burn goals); communicating with fitness sensors (sports equipment); receiving fitness sensor data; calibrating sensors for monitoring fitness; selecting and playing music for fitness; and displaying, storing, and transmitting fitness data.
结合触摸屏112、显示控制器156、光学传感器控制器158、接触模块130、图形模块132、图像管理模块144和一个或多个光学传感器164,相机模块143包括捕获静态图像或视频(包括视频流)并且将它们存储到存储器102中、修改静态图像或视频的特性、或从存储器102删除静态图像或视频的可执行指令。In conjunction with the touch screen 112, display controller 156, optical sensor controller 158, contact module 130, graphics module 132, image management module 144, and one or more optical sensors 164, the camera module 143 includes executable instructions for capturing still images or videos (including video streams) and storing them in the memory 102, modifying the characteristics of the still images or videos, or deleting the still images or videos from the memory 102.
结合触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134和相机模块143,图像管理模块144包括排列、修改(例如,编辑)、或以其他方式操控、加标签、删除、呈现(例如,在数字幻灯片或相册中)以及存储静态图像和/或视频图像的可执行指令。In conjunction with touch screen 112, display controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, text input module 134, and camera module 143, image management module 144 includes executable instructions for arranging, modifying (e.g., editing), or otherwise manipulating, labeling, deleting, presenting (e.g., in a digital slideshow or album), and storing still images and/or video images.
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,浏览器模块147包括根据用户指令浏览互联网(包括搜索、链接到、接收和显示网页或其部分以及链接到网页的附件和其他文件)的可执行指令。In combination with the RF circuit 108, the touch screen 112, the display system controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132 and the text input module 134, the browser module 147 includes executable instructions for browsing the Internet (including searching, linking to, receiving and displaying web pages or portions thereof and attachments and other files linked to web pages) in accordance with user instructions.
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、电子邮件客户端模块140和浏览器模块147,日历模块148包括根据用户指令来创建、显示、修改和存储日历以及与日历相关联的数据(例如,日历条目、待办事项等)的可执行指令。In combination with the RF circuit 108, the touch screen 112, the display system controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the email client module 140 and the browser module 147, the calendar module 148 includes executable instructions for creating, displaying, modifying and storing calendars and data associated with the calendar (e.g., calendar entries, to-do items, etc.) in accordance with user instructions.
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134和浏览器模块147,桌面小程序模块149是任选地由用户下载和使用的微型应用程序(例如,天气桌面小程序149-1、股市桌面小程序149-2、计算器桌面小程序149-3、闹钟桌面小程序149-4和字典桌面小程序149-5)或由用户创建的微型应用程序(例如,用户创建的桌面小程序149-6)。在一些实施例中,桌面小程序包括HTML(超文本标记语言)文件、CSS(层叠样式表)文件和JavaScript文件。在一些实施例中,桌面小程序包括XML(可扩展标记语言)文件和JavaScript文件(例如,Yahoo!桌面小程序)。In conjunction with the RF circuit 108, the touch screen 112, the display system controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, and the browser module 147, the desktop widget module 149 is a mini-application that is optionally downloaded and used by the user (e.g., the weather desktop widget 149-1, the stock desktop widget 149-2, the calculator desktop widget 149-3, the alarm desktop widget 149-4, and the dictionary desktop widget 149-5) or a mini-application created by the user (e.g., the user-created desktop widget 149-6). In some embodiments, the desktop widget includes an HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) file, a CSS (Cascading Style Sheets) file, and a JavaScript file. In some embodiments, the desktop widget includes an XML (Extensible Markup Language) file and a JavaScript file (e.g., the Yahoo! desktop widget).
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134和浏览器模块147,桌面小程序创建者模块150任选地被用户用来创建桌面小程序(例如,将网页的用户指定部分转到桌面小程序中)。In combination with the RF circuit 108, the touch screen 112, the display system controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134 and the browser module 147, the desktop widget creator module 150 is optionally used by a user to create a desktop widget (for example, to transfer a user-specified portion of a web page to a desktop widget).
结合触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,搜索模块151包括根据用户指令来搜索匹配一个或多个搜索条件(例如,一个或多个用户指定的搜索词)的存储器102中的文本、音乐、声音、图像、视频和/或其他文件的可执行指令。In combination with the touch screen 112, the display system controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132 and the text input module 134, the search module 151 includes executable instructions for searching the memory 102 for text, music, sound, images, videos and/or other files that match one or more search criteria (e.g., one or more user-specified search terms) in accordance with user instructions.
结合触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、音频电路110、扬声器111、RF电路108和浏览器模块147,视频和音乐播放器模块152包括允许用户下载和回放以一种或多种文件格式(诸如MP3或AAC文件)存储的所记录的音乐和其他声音文件的可执行指令,以及显示、呈现或以其他方式回放视频(例如,在触摸屏112上或在经由外部端口124连接的外部显示器上)的可执行指令。在一些实施例中,设备100任选地包括MP3播放器诸如iPod(Apple Inc.的商标)的功能。In conjunction with touch screen 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuitry 110, speaker 111, RF circuitry 108, and browser module 147, video and music player module 152 includes executable instructions that allow a user to download and play back recorded music and other sound files stored in one or more file formats (such as MP3 or AAC files), as well as to display, present, or otherwise play back video (e.g., on touch screen 112 or on an external display connected via external port 124). In some embodiments, device 100 optionally includes the functionality of an MP3 player such as an iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.).
结合触摸屏112、显示控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132和文本输入模块134,记事本模块153包括根据用户指令来创建和管理记事本、待办事项等的可执行指令。In conjunction with the touch screen 112, the display controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, and the text input module 134, the notepad module 153 includes executable instructions for creating and managing notes, to-do lists, etc. according to user instructions.
结合RF电路108、触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、文本输入模块134、GPS模块135和浏览器模块147,地图模块154任选地用于根据用户指令来接收、显示、修改和存储地图以及与地图相关联的数据(例如,驾驶方向;特定位置处或附近的商店和其他兴趣点的数据;以及其他基于位置的数据)。In combination with the RF circuitry 108, the touch screen 112, the display system controller 156, the contact module 130, the graphics module 132, the text input module 134, the GPS module 135, and the browser module 147, the map module 154 is optionally used to receive, display, modify, and store maps and data associated with the maps (e.g., driving directions; data about stores and other points of interest at or near a particular location; and other location-based data) in accordance with user instructions.
结合触摸屏112、显示系统控制器156、接触模块130、图形模块132、音频电路110、扬声器111、RF电路108、文本输入模块134、电子邮件客户端模块140和浏览器模块147,在线视频模块155包括指令,该指令允许用户访问、浏览、接收(例如,通过流媒体和/或下载)、回放(例如在经由外部端口124所连接的触摸屏上或外部显示器上)、发送具有至特定的在线视频的链接的电子邮件,以及以其他方式管理一种或多种文件格式诸如H.264的在线视频。在一些实施例中,即时消息模块141而不是电子邮件客户端模块140用于发送至特定的在线视频的链接。In conjunction with touch screen 112, display system controller 156, contact module 130, graphics module 132, audio circuit 110, speaker 111, RF circuit 108, text input module 134, email client module 140, and browser module 147, online video module 155 includes instructions that allow a user to access, browse, receive (e.g., by streaming and/or downloading), play back (e.g., on a touch screen connected via external port 124 or on an external display), send an email with a link to a particular online video, and otherwise manage online videos in one or more file formats, such as H.264. In some embodiments, instant messaging module 141, rather than email client module 140, is used to send a link to a particular online video.
上述所识别的每个模块和应用程序对应于用于执行上述一种或多种功能以及在本申请中所描述的方法(例如,本文中所描述的计算机实现的方法和其他信息处理方法)的一组可执行指令。这些模块(即指令集)不必被实现为分开的软件程序、过程或模块,因此这些模块的各种子集任选地在各种实施例中被组合或以其他方式重新布置。在一些实施例中,存储器102任选地存储上述模块和数据结构的子集。此外,存储器102任选地存储上面没有描述的另外的模块和数据结构。Each module and application program identified above corresponds to a set of executable instructions for performing one or more functions and methods described in the present application (e.g., computer-implemented methods and other information processing methods described herein). These modules (i.e., instruction sets) do not have to be implemented as separate software programs, processes, or modules, so various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 optionally stores a subset of the above modules and data structures. In addition, memory 102 optionally stores other modules and data structures not described above.
在一些实施例中,设备100是该设备上的预定义的一组功能的操作唯一地通过触摸屏和/或触摸板来执行的设备。通过使用触摸屏和/或触摸板作为用于设备100的操作的主要输入控制设备,任选地减少设备100上的物理输入控制设备(诸如下压按钮、拨号盘等等)的数量。In some embodiments, device 100 is a device in which operation of a predefined set of functions on the device is performed exclusively through a touch screen and/or a touchpad. By using the touch screen and/or the touchpad as the primary input control device for operation of device 100, the number of physical input control devices (such as push buttons, dials, etc.) on device 100 is optionally reduced.
唯一地通过触摸屏和/或触摸板来执行的该预定义的一组功能任选地包括用户界面之间的导航。在一些实施例中,触摸板当被用户触摸时将设备100从显示在设备100上的任何用户界面导航到主菜单、主页菜单或根菜单。在此类实施例中,使用触摸板来实现“菜单按钮”。在一些其他实施例中,菜单按钮是物理下压按钮或者其他物理输入控制设备,而不是触摸板。The predefined set of functions that are performed exclusively through the touch screen and/or touchpad optionally includes navigation between user interfaces. In some embodiments, the touchpad, when touched by the user, navigates the device 100 from any user interface displayed on the device 100 to a main menu, a home menu, or a root menu. In such embodiments, the touchpad is used to implement a "menu button." In some other embodiments, the menu button is a physical push button or other physical input control device, rather than a touchpad.
图1B是根据一些实施例示出用于事件处理的示例性部件的框图。在一些实施例中,存储器102(图1A中)或存储器370(图3)包括事件分类器170(例如,在操作系统126中)以及相应的应用程序136-1(例如,前述应用程序137-151、155、380-390中的任一项)。FIG1B is a block diagram illustrating exemplary components for event processing according to some embodiments. In some embodiments, memory 102 (in FIG1A ) or memory 370 ( FIG3 ) includes an event classifier 170 (e.g., in operating system 126 ) and a corresponding application 136 - 1 (e.g., any of the aforementioned applications 137 - 151 , 155 , 380 - 390 ).
事件分类器170接收事件信息并确定要将事件信息递送到的应用程序136-1和应用程序136-1的应用程序视图191。事件分类器170包括事件监视器171和事件分配器模块174。在一些实施例中,应用程序136-1包括应用程序内部状态192,该应用程序内部状态指示当应用程序是活动的或正在执行时显示在触敏显示器112上的一个或多个当前应用程序视图。在一些实施例中,设备/全局内部状态157被事件分类器170用来确定哪个(哪些)一个或多个应用程序当前是活动的,并且应用程序内部状态192被事件分类器170用来确定要将事件信息递送到的应用程序视图191。Event classifier 170 receives event information and determines an application 136-1 and an application view 191 of application 136-1 to which the event information is to be delivered. Event classifier 170 includes an event monitor 171 and an event dispatcher module 174. In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes an application internal state 192 that indicates one or more current application views displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 when the application is active or executing. In some embodiments, device/global internal state 157 is used by event classifier 170 to determine which application(s) are currently active, and application internal state 192 is used by event classifier 170 to determine an application view 191 to which the event information is to be delivered.
在一些实施例中,应用程序内部状态192包括附加信息,诸如以下各项中的一者或多者:当应用程序136-1恢复执行时将被使用的恢复信息、指示正通过应用程序136-1显示的信息或准备好用于通过应用程序136-1显示的信息的用户界面状态信息、用于使得用户能够返回到应用程序136-1的先前状态或视图的状态队列以及用户采取的先前动作的重复/撤销队列。In some embodiments, the application internal state 192 includes additional information, such as one or more of the following: resumption information to be used when the application 136-1 resumes execution, user interface state information indicating information being displayed by the application 136-1 or information ready for display by the application 136-1, a state queue for enabling a user to return to a previous state or view of the application 136-1, and a redo/undo queue of previous actions taken by the user.
事件监视器171从外围设备接口118接收事件信息。事件信息包括关于子事件(例如,用户接触该触敏显示器112作为多点接触手势的一部分)的信息。外围设备接口118传输其从I/O子系统106或传感器(诸如接近传感器166)、麦克风113和/或一个或多个加速度计168(通过音频电路110)所接收的信息。外围设备接口118从I/O子系统106接收的信息包括来自触敏显示器112或触敏表面的信息。Event monitor 171 receives event information from peripherals interface 118. The event information includes information about sub-events (e.g., a user contacting the touch-sensitive display 112 as part of a multi-touch gesture). Peripherals interface 118 transmits information it receives from I/O subsystem 106 or sensors (such as proximity sensor 166), microphone 113, and/or one or more accelerometers 168 (via audio circuit 110). The information received by peripherals interface 118 from I/O subsystem 106 includes information from touch-sensitive display 112 or a touch-sensitive surface.
在一些实施例中,事件监视器171以预先确定的间隔将请求发送至外围设备接口118。作为响应,外围设备接口118传输事件信息。在其他实施例中,外围设备接口118仅当存在显著事件(例如,接收到高于预先确定的噪声阈值的输入和/或接收到超过预先确定的持续时间的输入)时才传输事件信息。In some embodiments, event monitor 171 sends requests to peripherals interface 118 at predetermined intervals. In response, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information. In other embodiments, peripherals interface 118 transmits event information only when there is a significant event (e.g., receiving an input above a predetermined noise threshold and/or receiving an input for more than a predetermined duration).
在一些实施例中,事件分类器170还包括命中视图确定模块172和/或活动事件识别器确定模块173。In some embodiments, event classifier 170 also includes a hit view determination module 172 and/or an active event recognizer determination module 173 .
当触敏显示器112显示多于一个视图时,命中视图确定模块172提供用于确定子事件已经在一个或多个视图内的什么地方发生的软件过程。视图由用户在显示器上可以看到的控件和其他元件构成。When the touch-sensitive display 112 displays more than one view, the hit view determination module 172 provides software procedures for determining where within one or more views a sub-event has occurred. A view consists of controls and other elements that a user can see on the display.
与应用程序相关联的用户界面的另一方面是一组视图,本文中有时也称为应用程序视图或用户界面窗口,在其中显示信息并且发生基于触摸的手势。在其中检测到触摸的(相应应用程序的)应用程序视图任选地对应于在应用程序的程序化或视图分级结构内的程序化水平。例如,在其中检测到触摸的最低水平视图任选地被叫做命中视图,并且被识别为正确输入的事件集任选地至少部分地基于始于基于触摸的手势的初始触摸的命中视图来确定。Another aspect of the user interface associated with an application is a set of views, sometimes also referred to herein as application views or user interface windows, in which information is displayed and touch-based gestures occur. The application views (of the respective application) in which a touch is detected optionally correspond to programmatic levels within the application's programmatic or view hierarchy. For example, the lowest-level view in which a touch is detected is optionally called a hit view, and the set of events recognized as correct input is optionally determined based at least in part on the hit view that begins with the initial touch of a touch-based gesture.
命中视图确定模块172接收与基于触摸的手势的子事件相关的信息。当应用程序具有在分级结构中组织的多个视图时,命中视图确定模块172将命中视图识别为分级结构中的最低视图,该分级结构应对子事件进行处理。在大多数情形中,命中视图是发起子事件(即形成事件或潜在事件的子事件序列中的第一子事件)在其中发生的最低水平视图。一旦命中视图被命中视图确定模块所识别,命中视图通常接收与其被识别为命中视图所针对的同一触摸或输入源相关的所有子事件。Hit view determination module 172 receives information related to sub-events of touch-based gestures. When an application has multiple views organized in a hierarchy, hit view determination module 172 identifies a hit view as the lowest view in the hierarchy that should handle the sub-event. In most cases, the hit view is the lowest-level view in which the initiating sub-event (i.e., the first sub-event in a sequence of sub-events that form an event or potential event) occurs. Once a hit view is identified by the hit view determination module, the hit view typically receives all sub-events related to the same touch or input source for which it was identified as the hit view.
活动事件识别器确定模块173确定视图分级结构内的哪个或哪些视图应该接收特定的子事件序列。在一些实施例中,活动事件识别器确定模块173确定仅命中视图应该接收特定的子事件序列。在其他实施例中,活动事件识别器确定模块173确定包括子事件的物理位置的所有视图是活跃参与的视图,并且因此确定所有活跃参与的视图应接收特定子事件序列。在其他实施例中,即使触摸子事件完全被局限到与一特定视图相关联的区域,但分级结构中更高的视图将仍然保持为活跃参与的视图。Active event recognizer determination module 173 determines which view or views within the view hierarchy should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In some embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that only the hit view should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, active event recognizer determination module 173 determines that all views that include the physical location of the sub-event are actively participating views, and therefore determines that all actively participating views should receive a particular sequence of sub-events. In other embodiments, even if a touch sub-event is completely confined to the area associated with a particular view, views higher in the hierarchy will still remain actively participating views.
事件分配器模块174将事件信息调度到事件识别器(例如,事件识别器180)。在包括活动事件识别器确定模块173的实施例中,事件分配器模块174将事件信息递送到由活动事件识别器确定模块173所确定的事件识别器。在一些实施例中,事件分配器模块174在事件队列中存储事件信息,该事件信息由相应事件接收器模块182检索。Event dispatcher module 174 dispatches event information to an event recognizer (e.g., event recognizer 180). In embodiments that include active event recognizer determination module 173, event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to the event recognizer determined by active event recognizer determination module 173. In some embodiments, event dispatcher module 174 stores the event information in an event queue, which is retrieved by corresponding event receiver module 182.
在一些实施例中,操作系统126包括事件分类器170。或者,应用程序136-1包括事件分类器170。在另一实施例中,事件分类器170是独立的模块,或者是存储在存储器102中的另一模块(诸如接触/运动模块130)的一部分。In some embodiments, operating system 126 includes event classifier 170. Alternatively, application 136-1 includes event classifier 170. In another embodiment, event classifier 170 is a standalone module or part of another module stored in memory 102, such as contact/motion module 130.
在一些实施例中,应用程序136-1包括多个事件处理程序190和一个或多个应用程序视图191,其中每一个都包括用于处理发生在应用程序的用户界面的相应视图内的触摸事件的指令。应用程序136-1的每个应用程序视图191包括一个或多个事件识别器180。通常,相应应用程序视图191包括多个事件识别器180。在其他实施例中,事件识别器180中的一个或多个是独立模块的一部分,该独立模块诸如用户界面工具包(未示出)或应用程序136-1从中继承方法和其他特性的更高水平的对象。在一些实施例中,相应事件处理程序190包括以下中的一者或多者:数据更新器176、对象更新器177、GUI更新器178和/或从事件分类器170所接收的事件数据179。事件处理程序190任选地利用或调用数据更新器176、对象更新器177或GUI更新器178来更新应用程序内部状态192。或者,应用程序视图191中的一个或多个包括一个或多个相应事件处理程序190。另外,在一些实施例中,数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178中的一者或多者被包括在相应应用程序视图191中。In some embodiments, application 136-1 includes multiple event handlers 190 and one or more application views 191, each of which includes instructions for handling touch events occurring within a corresponding view of the application's user interface. Each application view 191 of application 136-1 includes one or more event recognizers 180. Typically, a corresponding application view 191 includes multiple event recognizers 180. In other embodiments, one or more of event recognizers 180 is part of a separate module, such as a user interface toolkit (not shown) or a higher-level object from which application 136-1 inherits methods and other characteristics. In some embodiments, a corresponding event handler 190 includes one or more of the following: data updater 176, object updater 177, GUI updater 178, and/or event data 179 received from event classifier 170. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176, object updater 177, or GUI updater 178 to update application internal state 192. Alternatively, one or more of application views 191 includes one or more corresponding event handlers 190. Additionally, in some embodiments, one or more of data updater 176 , object updater 177 , and GUI updater 178 are included in a corresponding application view 191 .
相应的事件识别器180从事件分类器170接收事件信息(例如,事件数据179),并且从事件信息识别事件。事件识别器180包括事件接收器182和事件比较器184。在一些实施例中,事件识别器180还包括至少以下各项中的子集:元数据183和事件递送指令188(任选地包括子事件递送指令)。A corresponding event identifier 180 receives event information (e.g., event data 179) from event classifier 170 and identifies an event from the event information. Event identifier 180 includes an event receiver 182 and an event comparator 184. In some embodiments, event identifier 180 also includes at least a subset of the following: metadata 183 and event delivery instructions 188 (optionally including sub-event delivery instructions).
事件接收器182从事件分类器170接收事件信息。事件信息包括关于子事件的信息,例如触摸或触摸移动。根据子事件,事件信息还包括另外的信息,诸如子事件的位置。当子事件涉及触摸的运动时,事件信息任选地还包括子事件的速率和方向。在一些实施例中,事件包括设备从一个取向旋转到另一个取向(例如,从纵向取向旋转到横向取向,反之亦然),并且事件信息包括关于设备的当前取向(也被叫做设备姿态)的对应信息。Event receiver 182 receives event information from event classifier 170. Event information includes information about sub-events, such as touches or touch movements. Depending on the sub-event, the event information also includes additional information, such as the location of the sub-event. When the sub-event involves the movement of a touch, the event information optionally also includes the speed and direction of the sub-event. In some embodiments, the event includes the device rotating from one orientation to another (e.g., from a portrait orientation to a landscape orientation, or vice versa), and the event information includes corresponding information about the current orientation of the device (also called the device posture).
事件比较器184将事件信息与预定义的事件或子事件定义进行比较,并且基于该比较来确定事件或子事件、或者确定或更新事件或子事件的状态。在一些实施例中,事件比较器184包括事件定义186。事件定义186包含事件的定义(例如,预定义的子事件序列),例如事件1(187-1)、事件2(187-2)以及其他事件。在一些实施例中,事件187中的子事件包括例如触摸开始、触摸结束、触摸移动、触摸取消和多个触摸。在一个实例中,事件1(187-1)的定义是被显示对象上的双击。例如,该双击包括在被显示对象上预定时长的第一次触摸(触摸开始)、预定时长的第一次抬起(触摸结束)、在被显示对象上预定时长的第二次触摸(触摸开始)以及预定时长的第二次抬起(触摸结束)。在另一个实例中,事件2(187-2)的定义是被显示对象上的拖动。例如,拖动包括在被显示对象上预定时长的触摸(或接触),横跨触敏显示器112的触摸的运动,以及触摸的抬起(触摸结束)。在一些实施例中,事件还包括用于一个或多个相关联的事件处理程序190的信息。Event comparator 184 compares the event information with predefined event or sub-event definitions and determines the event or sub-event, or determines or updates the state of the event or sub-event based on the comparison. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 includes event definition 186. Event definition 186 includes the definition of the event (e.g., a predefined sequence of sub-events), such as event 1 (187-1), event 2 (187-2), and other events. In some embodiments, the sub-events in event 187 include, for example, touch start, touch end, touch move, touch cancel, and multiple touches. In one instance, the definition of event 1 (187-1) is a double-click on a displayed object. For example, the double-click includes a first touch (touch start) of a predetermined duration on the displayed object, a first lift (touch end) of a predetermined duration, a second touch (touch start) of a predetermined duration on the displayed object, and a second lift (touch end) of a predetermined duration. In another instance, the definition of event 2 (187-2) is a drag on a displayed object. For example, dragging includes a touch (or contact) of a predetermined duration on a displayed object, movement of the touch across the touch-sensitive display 112, and lifting of the touch (touch end). In some embodiments, the event also includes information for one or more associated event handlers 190.
在一些实施例中,事件定义187包括用于相应用户界面对象的事件的定义。在一些实施例中,事件比较器184执行命中测试以确定哪个用户界面对象与子事件相关联。例如,在其中在触摸显示器112上显示三个用户界面对象的应用程序视图中,当在触敏显示器112上检测到触摸时,事件比较器184执行命中测试以确定这三个用户界面对象中的哪一个与该触摸(子事件)相关联。如果每个被显示对象与相应的事件处理程序190相关联,则事件比较器使用该命中测试的结果来确定哪个事件处理程序190应该被激活。例如,事件比较器184选择与子事件和触发该命中测试的对象相关联的事件处理程序。In some embodiments, event definitions 187 include definitions of events for corresponding user interface objects. In some embodiments, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which user interface object is associated with a sub-event. For example, in an application view in which three user interface objects are displayed on touch-sensitive display 112, when a touch is detected on touch-sensitive display 112, event comparator 184 performs a hit test to determine which of the three user interface objects is associated with the touch (sub-event). If each displayed object is associated with a corresponding event handler 190, the event comparator uses the result of the hit test to determine which event handler 190 should be activated. For example, event comparator 184 selects the event handler associated with the sub-event and the object that triggered the hit test.
在一些实施例中,相应事件187的定义还包括延迟动作,该延迟动作延迟事件信息的递送,直到已经确定子事件序列是否对应于事件识别器的事件类型之后。In some embodiments, the definition of the corresponding event 187 also includes a delay action that delays delivery of the event information until after it has been determined whether the sequence of sub-events corresponds to the event type of the event identifier.
在其不理会基于触摸的手势的后续子事件之后,当相应事件识别器180确定子事件串不与事件定义186中的任何事件匹配,则该相应事件识别器180进入事件不可能、事件失败或事件结束状态。在这种情况下,保持活动以用于点击视图的其他事件识别器(如果有的话)继续跟踪和处理持续的基于接触的手势的子事件。After it disregards subsequent sub-events of the touch-based gesture, the corresponding event recognizer 180 enters the event not possible, event failed, or event ended state when it determines that the sub-event string does not match any event in event definitions 186. In this case, other event recognizers (if any) that remain active for tapping the view continue to track and process the sub-events of the ongoing contact-based gesture.
在一些实施例中,相应事件识别器180包括具有指示事件递送系统应该如何执行对活跃参与的事件识别器的子事件递送的能配置的属性、标记和/或列表的元数据183。在一些实施例中,元数据183包括指示事件识别器彼此如何交互或如何能够交互的能配置的属性、标记和/或列表。在一些实施例中,元数据183包括指示子事件是否被递送到视图或程序化分级结构中的变化的水平的能配置的属性、标记和/或列表。In some embodiments, corresponding event recognizers 180 include metadata 183 with configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how the event delivery system should perform sub-event delivery for actively participating event recognizers. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate how event recognizers interact or can interact with each other. In some embodiments, metadata 183 includes configurable properties, flags, and/or lists that indicate whether sub-events are delivered to varying levels in a view or programmatic hierarchy.
在一些实施例中,当事件的一个或多个特定子事件被识别时,相应事件识别器180激活与事件相关联的事件处理程序190。在一些实施例中,相应事件识别器180将与该事件相关联的事件信息递送到事件处理程序190。激活事件处理程序190不同于向相应的命中视图发送(和延期发送)子事件。在一些实施例中,事件识别器180抛出与所识别的事件相关联的标记,并且与该标记相关联的事件处理程序190接到该标记并执行预定义的过程。In some embodiments, when one or more specific sub-events of an event are recognized, the corresponding event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the event. In some embodiments, the corresponding event recognizer 180 delivers event information associated with the event to the event handler 190. Activating an event handler 190 is different from sending (and deferred sending) the sub-events to the corresponding hit view. In some embodiments, event recognizer 180 throws a flag associated with the recognized event, and the event handler 190 associated with the flag receives the flag and performs a predefined process.
在一些实施例中,事件递送指令188包括递送关于子事件的事件信息而不激活事件处理程序的子事件递送指令。相反,子事件递送指令将事件信息递送到与子事件串相关联的事件处理程序或者递送到活跃参与的视图。与子事件串或与活跃涉及的视图相关联的事件处理程序接收事件信息并执行预先确定的过程。In some embodiments, event delivery instructions 188 include sub-event delivery instructions that deliver event information about a sub-event without activating an event handler. Instead, the sub-event delivery instructions deliver the event information to an event handler associated with the sub-event string or to an actively participating view. The event handler associated with the sub-event string or the actively participating view receives the event information and performs a predetermined process.
在一些实施例中,数据更新器176创建并更新在应用程序136-1中使用的数据。例如,数据更新器176更新在联系人模块137中使用的电话号码,或者存储在视频播放器模块145中使用的视频文件。在一些实施例中,对象更新器177创建并更新在应用程序136-1中使用的对象。例如,对象更新器176创建新的用户界面对象,或者更新用户界面对象的位置。GUI更新器178更新GUI。例如,GUI更新器178准备显示信息并将其发送至图形模块132以用于显示在触敏显示器上。In some embodiments, data updater 176 creates and updates data used in application 136-1. For example, data updater 176 updates phone numbers used in contact module 137 or video files stored in video player module 145. In some embodiments, object updater 177 creates and updates objects used in application 136-1. For example, object updater 176 creates new user interface objects or updates the positions of user interface objects. GUI updater 178 updates the GUI. For example, GUI updater 178 prepares display information and sends it to graphics module 132 for display on a touch-sensitive display.
在一些实施例中,一个或多个事件处理程序190包括数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178或者具有对数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178的访问权限。在一些实施例中,数据更新器176、对象更新器177和GUI更新器178被包括在相应应用程序136-1或应用程序视图191的单个模块中。在其他实施例中,它们被包括在两个或更多个软件模块中。In some embodiments, one or more event handlers 190 include or have access to data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178. In some embodiments, data updater 176, object updater 177, and GUI updater 178 are included in a single module of a corresponding application 136-1 or application view 191. In other embodiments, they are included in two or more software modules.
应当理解,上述关于触敏显示器上的用户触摸的事件处理的讨论还适用于利用输入设备操作多功能设备100的其他形式的用户输入,并不是所有的用户输入都是在触摸屏上发起的。例如,任选地与单次或多次键盘按下或按住协作的鼠标移动和鼠标按钮按下;触摸板上的接触移动,诸如轻击、拖动、滚动等;触笔输入;设备的移动;口头指令;检测到的眼睛移动;生物特征输入;和/或它们的任何组合任选地被用作对应于限定要识别的事件的子事件的输入。It should be understood that the above discussion of event handling for user touches on a touch-sensitive display also applies to other forms of user input for operating the multifunction device 100 using an input device, and not all user input is initiated on a touch screen. For example, mouse movement and mouse button presses, optionally in conjunction with single or multiple keyboard presses or holddowns; contact movement on a touchpad, such as taps, drags, scrolls, etc.; stylus input; movement of the device; spoken commands; detected eye movement; biometric input; and/or any combination thereof, are optionally used as input corresponding to sub-events defining the event to be recognized.
图2根据一些实施例示出了具有触摸屏112的一种便携式多功能设备100。触摸屏任选地在用户界面(UI)200内显示一个或多个图形。在该实施例中,以及在下文中描述的其他实施例中,用户能够通过例如利用一根或多根手指202(在附图中没有按比例绘制)或者利用一个或多个触笔203(在附图中没有按比例绘制)在图形上作出手势来选择这些图形中的一个或多个图形。在一些实施例中,当用户中断与该一个或多个图形的接触时,发生对一个或多个图形的选择。在一些实施例中,手势任选地包括一次或多次轻击、一次或多次轻扫(从左向右、从右向左、向上和/或向下)和/或已经与设备100接触的手指的拨动(从右向左、从左向右、向上和/或向下)。在一些具体实施中或在一些情况下,不经意地与图形接触不会选择图形。例如,当对应于选择的手势是轻击时,在应用程序图标之上扫动的轻扫手势任选地不会选择对应的应用程序。FIG2 illustrates a portable multifunction device 100 with a touch screen 112, according to some embodiments. The touch screen optionally displays one or more graphics within a user interface (UI) 200. In this embodiment, as well as other embodiments described below, a user can select one or more of the graphics by, for example, gesturing on the graphics with one or more fingers 202 (not drawn to scale in the figures) or with one or more styluses 203 (not drawn to scale in the figures). In some embodiments, selection of the one or more graphics occurs when the user breaks contact with the one or more graphics. In some embodiments, the gesture optionally includes one or more taps, one or more swipes (from left to right, from right to left, up, and/or down), and/or a flick (from right to left, from left to right, up, and/or down) of a finger already in contact with the device 100. In some implementations or in some circumstances, inadvertent contact with a graphic does not select the graphic. For example, a swipe gesture sweeping over an application icon may not select the corresponding application when the gesture corresponding to selection is a tap.
设备100任选地还包括一个或多个物理按钮,诸如“主屏幕”按钮或菜单按钮204。如前所述,菜单按钮204任选地用于导航到任选地在设备100上被执行的一组应用程序中的任何应用程序136。或者,在一些实施例中,菜单按钮被实现为显示在触摸屏112上的GUI中的软键。The device 100 optionally also includes one or more physical buttons, such as a “home” button or menu button 204. As previously described, the menu button 204 is optionally used to navigate to any application 136 in a set of applications that are optionally executed on the device 100. Alternatively, in some embodiments, the menu button is implemented as a soft key in a GUI displayed on the touch screen 112.
在一个实施例中,设备100包括触摸屏112、菜单按钮204、用于对设备开关机和锁定设备进行供电的下压按钮206、用户身份模块(SIM)卡槽210、耳麦插孔212、对接/充电外部端口124和一个或多个音量调节按钮208。下压按钮206任选地用于通过压下该按钮并且将该按钮保持在压下状态预定义的时间间隔来对设备进行开关机;通过压下该按钮并在已经流逝该预定义的时间间隔之前释放该按钮来锁定设备;和/或解锁设备或发起解锁过程。在另选的实施例中,设备100还通过麦克风113接受用于激活或去激活某些功能的言语输入。设备100还任选地包括用于检测触摸屏112上的接触强度的一个或多个接触强度传感器165,和/或用于为设备100的用户生成触觉输出的一个或多个触觉输出发生器167。In one embodiment, device 100 includes a touch screen 112, a menu button 204, a push button 206 for turning the device on and off and locking the device, a subscriber identity module (SIM) card slot 210, a headset jack 212, a docking/charging external port 124, and one or more volume adjustment buttons 208. Push button 206 is optionally used to turn the device on and off by pressing and holding the button for a predefined time interval; to lock the device by pressing and releasing the button before the predefined time interval has elapsed; and/or to unlock the device or initiate an unlocking process. In an alternative embodiment, device 100 also accepts voice input for activating or deactivating certain functions via microphone 113. Device 100 also optionally includes one or more contact force sensors 165 for detecting contact force on touch screen 112 and/or one or more tactile output generators 167 for generating tactile output for a user of device 100.
图3是根据一些实施例的具有显示器和触敏表面的示例性多功能设备的框图。设备300不必是便携式的。在一些实施例中,设备300是膝上型计算机、台式计算机、平板电脑、多媒体播放器设备、导航设备、教育设备(诸如儿童学习玩具)、游戏系统或控制设备(例如,家用或工业用控制器)。设备300通常包括一个或多个处理单元(CPU)310、一个或多个网络或其他通信接口360、存储器370和用于使这些部件互连的一根或多根通信总线320。通信总线320任选地包括使系统部件互连并且控制系统部件之间的通信的电路(有时叫做芯片组)。设备300包括具有显示器340的输入/输出(I/O)接口330,该显示器340通常是触摸屏显示器。I/O接口330还任选地包括键盘和/或鼠标(或其他指向设备)350和触摸板355、用于在设备300上生成触觉输出的触觉输出发生器357(例如,类似于以上参考图1A所述的一个或多个触觉输出发生器167)、传感器359(例如,光学传感器、加速度传感器、接近传感器、触敏传感器和/或类似于以上参考图1A所述的一个或多个接触强度传感器165的接触强度传感器)。存储器370包括高速随机存取存储器,诸如DRAM、SRAM、DDR RAM或其他随机存取固态存储器设备;并且任选地包括非易失性存储器,诸如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、光盘存储设备、闪存存储器设备、或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器370任选地包括远离一个或多个CPU 310定位的一个或多个存储设备。在一些实施例中,存储器370存储与存储在便携式多功能设备100(图1A)的存储器102中的程序、模块和数据结构类似的程序、模块和数据结构,或它们的子集。此外,存储器370任选地存储在便携式多功能设备100的存储器102中不存在的另外的程序、模块和数据结构。例如,设备300的存储器370任选地存储绘图模块380、呈现模块382、文字处理模块384、网站创建模块386、盘编辑模块388和/或电子表格模块390,而便携式多功能设备100(图1A)的存储器102任选地不存储这些模块。3 is a block diagram of an exemplary multifunctional device with a display and a touch-sensitive surface according to some embodiments. Device 300 need not be portable. In some embodiments, device 300 is a laptop computer, a desktop computer, a tablet computer, a multimedia player device, a navigation device, an educational device (such as a children's learning toy), a game system, or a control device (e.g., a home or industrial controller). Device 300 typically includes one or more processing units (CPUs) 310, one or more networks or other communication interfaces 360, a memory 370, and one or more communication buses 320 for interconnecting these components. Communication bus 320 optionally includes a circuit (sometimes called a chipset) that interconnects system components and controls the communication between system components. Device 300 includes an input/output (I/O) interface 330 with a display 340, which is typically a touch screen display. I/O interface 330 also optionally includes a keyboard and/or mouse (or other pointing device) 350 and a touchpad 355, a tactile output generator 357 for generating tactile output on device 300 (e.g., similar to one or more tactile output generators 167 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ), and sensors 359 (e.g., optical sensors, acceleration sensors, proximity sensors, touch-sensitive sensors, and/or contact force sensors similar to one or more contact force sensors 165 described above with reference to FIG. 1A ). Memory 370 includes high-speed random access memory, such as DRAM, SRAM, DDR RAM, or other random access solid-state memory devices; and optionally includes non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, optical disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid-state storage devices. Memory 370 optionally includes one or more storage devices located remotely from one or more CPUs 310. In some embodiments, memory 370 stores programs, modules, and data structures similar to those stored in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ), or a subset thereof. In addition, memory 370 optionally stores additional programs, modules, and data structures not present in memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100. For example, memory 370 of device 300 optionally stores a drawing module 380, a presentation module 382, a word processing module 384, a website creation module 386, a disk editing module 388, and/or a spreadsheet module 390, while memory 102 of portable multifunction device 100 ( FIG. 1A ) optionally does not store these modules.
图3中上述所识别的元件中的每一个元件任选地存储在一个或多个先前提到的存储器设备中。上述所识别的模块中的每一个模块对应于用于执行上述功能的指令集。上述所识别的模块或程序(即,指令集)不必被实现为单独的软件程序、过程或模块,并且因此这些模块的各种子集任选地在各种实施例中被组合或以其他方式重新布置。在一些实施例中,存储器370任选地存储上述模块和数据结构的子集。此外,存储器370任选地存储上面未描述的另外的模块和数据结构。Each element in the above-mentioned identified element among Fig. 3 is optionally stored in one or more previously mentioned memory devices.Each module in the above-mentioned identified module corresponds to the instruction set for performing the functions described above.The above-mentioned identified module or program (that is, instruction set) need not be implemented as independent software program, process or module, and therefore the various subsets of these modules are optionally combined or otherwise rearranged in various embodiments.In certain embodiments, memory 370 optionally stores the subset of above-mentioned modules and data structure.In addition, memory 370 optionally stores other modules and data structure not described above.
现在将注意力转到任选地在便携式多功能设备100上实现的用户界面(“UI”)的实施例。Attention is now turned to an embodiment of a user interface (“UI”) that is optionally implemented on portable multifunction device 100 .
图4A根据一些实施例示出了便携式多功能设备100上的用于应用程序菜单的一种示例性用户界面。类似的用户界面任选地在设备300上实现。在一些实施例中,用户界面400包括以下元件或者其子集或超集:Figure 4A shows an exemplary user interface for an application menu on portable multifunction device 100 according to some embodiments. A similar user interface is optionally implemented on device 300. In some embodiments, user interface 400 includes the following elements, or a subset or superset thereof:
·一个或多个无线通信诸如蜂窝信号和Wi-Fi信号的一个或多个信号强度指示器402;One or more signal strength indicators 402 of one or more wireless communications, such as cellular signals and Wi-Fi signals;
·时间404;Time 404;
·蓝牙指示器405;Bluetooth indicator 405;
·电池状态指示器406;Battery status indicator 406;
·具有频繁使用的应用程序的图标的托盘408,所述图标诸如:A tray 408 with icons for frequently used applications, such as:
○标记“电话”的电话模块138的图标416,该图标416任选地包括未接来电或语音留言消息的数量的指示器414;o An icon 416 of the phone module 138 labeled "Phone," optionally including an indicator 414 of the number of missed calls or voicemail messages;
○标记“邮件”的电子邮件客户端模块140的图标418,该图标418任选地包括未读电子邮件的数量的指示器410;o An icon 418 of the email client module 140 labeled "Mail," optionally including an indicator 410 of the number of unread emails;
○标记“浏览器”的浏览器模块147的图标420;和o An icon 420 of the browser module 147 labeled "Browser"; and
○标记“iPod”的视频和音乐播放器模块152(也叫做iPod(Apple Inc.的商标)模块152)的图标422;以及o An icon 422 of the video and music player module 152 labeled “iPod” (also called the iPod (trademark of Apple Inc.) module 152); and
·其他应用程序的图标,诸如:Icons for other applications, such as:
○标记“文本”的IM模块141的图标424;o Icon 424 of the IM module 141 labeled "Text";
○标记“日历”的日历模块148的图标426;o An icon 426 of the calendar module 148 labeled "Calendar";
○标记“相片”的图像管理模块144的图标428;o Icon 428 of the image management module 144 labeled "Photos";
○标记“相机”的相机模块143的图标430;o An icon 430 of the camera module 143 labeled “Camera”;
○标记“在线视频”的在线视频模块155的图标432;o Icon 432 of the online video module 155 labeled "Online Video";
○标记“股市”的股市桌面小程序149-2的图标434;○ Icon 434 of the stock market widget 149-2 labeled "Stock Market";
○标记“地图”的地图模块154的图标436;o An icon 436 of the map module 154 labeled "Map";
○标记“天气”的天气桌面小程序149-1的图标438;○ Icon 438 of the weather widget 149-1 labeled "Weather";
○标记“时钟”的闹钟桌面小程序149-4的图标440;○ Icon 440 of the alarm clock widget 149-4 labeled "Clock";
○标记“健身支持”的健身支持模块142的图标442;o An icon 442 of the fitness support module 142 labeled “Fitness Support”;
○标记“记事本”的记事本模块153的图标444;和o An icon 444 of the Notes module 153 labeled "Notes"; and
○设置应用程序或模块的图标446,该图标446提供对设备100及其各种应用程序136的设置的访问;o A settings application or module icon 446 that provides access to settings for the device 100 and its various applications 136;
应当指出的是,图4A中示出的图标标签仅仅是示例性的。例如,视频和音乐播放器模块152的图标422被标记“音乐”或“音乐播放器”。其他标签任选地用于各种应用程序图标。在一些实施例中,相应应用程序图标的标签包括对应于该相应应用程序图标的应用程序的名称。在一些实施例中,特定应用程序图标的标签不同于对应于该特定应用程序图标的应用程序的名称。It should be noted that the icon labels shown in FIG4A are merely exemplary. For example, icon 422 of video and music player module 152 is labeled "Music" or "Music Player." Other labels are optionally used for various application icons. In some embodiments, the label of a corresponding application icon includes the name of the application corresponding to the corresponding application icon. In some embodiments, the label of a particular application icon is different from the name of the application corresponding to the particular application icon.
图4B示出了具有与显示器450(例如,触摸屏显示器112)分开的触敏表面451(例如,图3中的平板电脑或触摸板355)的设备(例如,图3中的设备300)上的示例性用户界面。设备300还任选地包括用于检测触敏表面451上的接触强度的一个或多个接触强度传感器(例如,传感器357中的一个或多个传感器),和/或用于为设备300的用户生成触觉输出的一个或多个触觉输出发生器359。4B shows an exemplary user interface on a device (e.g., device 300 in FIG. 3 ) having a touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., tablet computer or touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 ) that is separate from a display 450 (e.g., touch screen display 112 ). Device 300 also optionally includes one or more contact intensity sensors (e.g., one or more of sensors 357 ) for detecting intensity of contacts on touch-sensitive surface 451 and/or one or more tactile output generators 359 for generating tactile output for a user of device 300.
尽管将参考触摸屏显示器112(其中组合了触敏表面和显示器)上的输入给出随后的实例中的一些实例,但是在一些实施例中,设备检测与显示器分开的触敏表面上的输入,如图4B中所示。在一些实施例中,触敏表面(例如,图4B中的451)具有对应于显示器(例如,450)上的主轴(例如,图4B中的453)的主轴(例如,图4B中的452)。根据这些实施例,设备检测在对应于显示器上的相应位置的位置(例如,在图4B中,460对应于468并且462对应于470)处与触敏表面451的接触(例如,图4B中的460和462)。这样,当触敏表面(例如,图4B中的451)与多功能设备的显示器(图4B中的450)分开时,由设备在触敏表面上检测到的用户输入(例如,接触460和462以及它们的移动)被该设备用于操纵显示器上的用户界面。应当理解,类似的方法任选地用于本文所述的其他用户界面。Although some of the examples that follow will be given with reference to input on a touchscreen display 112 (where a touch-sensitive surface and display are combined), in some embodiments, the device detects input on a touch-sensitive surface that is separate from the display, as shown in FIG4B . In some embodiments, the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG4B ) has a primary axis (e.g., 452 in FIG4B ) that corresponds to a primary axis (e.g., 453 in FIG4B ) on the display (e.g., 450 ). According to these embodiments, the device detects contacts (e.g., 460 and 462 in FIG4B ) with the touch-sensitive surface 451 at locations corresponding to corresponding locations on the display (e.g., 460 corresponds to 468 and 462 corresponds to 470 in FIG4B ). Thus, when the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., 451 in FIG4B ) is separated from the display (450 in FIG4B ) of the multifunction device, user input detected by the device on the touch-sensitive surface (e.g., contacts 460 and 462 and their movement) is used by the device to manipulate a user interface on the display. It should be understood that similar methods are optionally used for other user interfaces described herein.
另外,虽然主要是参考手指输入(例如,手指接触、单指轻击手势、手指轻扫手势)来给出下面的实例,但是应当理解的是,在一些实施例中,这些手指输入中的一个或多个手指输入由来自另一输入设备的输入(例如,基于鼠标的输入或触笔输入)替代。例如,轻扫手势任选地由鼠标点击(例如,而不是接触),之后是光标沿着轻扫的路径的移动(例如,而不是接触的移动)替代。又如,轻击手势任选地由光标位于轻击手势的位置之上时的鼠标点击(例如,而不是对接触的检测,之后是终止检测接触)替代。类似地,当同时检测到多个用户输入时,应当理解的是,多个电脑鼠标任选地被同时使用或一个鼠标和多个手指接触任选地被同时使用。Additionally, while the examples below are primarily given with reference to finger inputs (e.g., finger contacts, single-finger tap gestures, finger swipe gestures), it should be understood that in some embodiments, one or more of these finger inputs are replaced by input from another input device (e.g., mouse-based input or stylus input). For example, a swipe gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click (e.g., instead of contact) followed by movement of a cursor along the path of the swipe (e.g., instead of movement of the contact). For another example, a tap gesture is optionally replaced by a mouse click (e.g., instead of detection of contact followed by cessation of detecting contact) when the cursor is over the location of the tap gesture. Similarly, when multiple user inputs are detected simultaneously, it should be understood that multiple computer mice are optionally used simultaneously or one mouse and multiple finger contacts are optionally used simultaneously.
如本文所用,术语“焦点选择器”是指指示用户正与之交互的用户界面的当前部分的输入元件。在包括光标或其他位置标记的一些具体实施中,光标充当“焦点选择器”,使得当在光标位于特定用户界面元件(例如,按钮、窗口、滑块或其他用户界面元件)上方的情况下在触敏表面(例如,图3中的触摸板355或图4B中的触敏表面451)上检测到输入(例如,按压输入)时,根据所检测到的输入来调整该特定用户界面元件。在包括实现与触摸屏显示器上的用户界面元件的直接交互的触摸屏显示器(例如,图1A中的触敏显示器系统112或图4A中的触摸屏112)的一些具体实施中,在触摸屏上所检测到的接触充当“焦点选择器”,使得当在触摸屏显示器上在特定用户界面元件(例如,按钮、窗口、滑块或其他用户界面元件)的位置处检测到输入(例如,通过接触的按压输入)时,根据所检测到的输入来调整该特定用户界面元件。在一些具体实施中,将焦点从用户界面的一个区域移动到用户界面的另一个区域而无需光标的对应移动或接触在触摸屏显示器上的移动(例如,通过使用制表键或箭头键来将焦点从一个按钮移动到另一个按钮);在这些具体实施中,焦点选择器根据焦点在用户界面的不同区域之间的移动而移动。不考虑焦点选择器所采取的特定形式,焦点选择器通常是用户界面元件(或触摸屏显示器上的接触),其由用户控制以便传送用户与用户界面的预期交互(例如,通过向设备指示用户正打算与之交互的用户界面的元件)。例如,当在触敏表面(例如,触摸板或触摸屏)上检测到按压输入时焦点选择器(例如,光标、接触或选择框)在相应按钮之上的位置将指示用户正打算激活该相应按钮(与设备的显示器上所示的其他用户界面元件相反)。As used herein, the term "focus selector" refers to an input element that indicates the current portion of a user interface with which a user is interacting. In some embodiments that include a cursor or other position marker, the cursor acts as a "focus selector" such that when input (e.g., a press input) is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touchpad 355 in FIG. 3 or touch-sensitive surface 451 in FIG. 4B ) while the cursor is over a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element), the particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. In some embodiments that include a touch screen display (e.g., touch-sensitive display system 112 in FIG. 1A or touch screen 112 in FIG. 4A ) that enables direct interaction with user interface elements on the touch screen display, a contact detected on the touch screen acts as a "focus selector" such that when input (e.g., a press input by a contact) is detected at the location of a particular user interface element (e.g., a button, window, slider, or other user interface element) on the touch screen display, the particular user interface element is adjusted according to the detected input. In some implementations, focus is moved from one area of a user interface to another area of the user interface without corresponding movement of a cursor or movement of a contact on a touch screen display (e.g., by using a tab key or arrow keys to move focus from one button to another); in these implementations, a focus selector moves in accordance with the movement of focus between different areas of the user interface. Regardless of the specific form the focus selector takes, the focus selector is typically a user interface element (or contact on a touch screen display) that is controlled by the user to convey the user's intended interaction with the user interface (e.g., by indicating to the device the element of the user interface with which the user intends to interact). For example, the position of a focus selector (e.g., a cursor, contact, or selection box) over a corresponding button when a press input is detected on a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., a touchpad or touch screen) will indicate that the user intends to activate the corresponding button (as opposed to other user interface elements shown on the device's display).
下文描述的用户界面图包括各种强度图,这些强度图示出触敏表面上的接触相对于一个或多个强度阈值(例如,接触检测强度阈值IT0、轻按压强度阈值ITL、深按压强度阈值ITD和/或一个或多个其他强度阈值)的当前强度。该强度图通常不是所显示的用户界面的一部分,但是被提供以帮助解释所述图。在一些实施例中,轻按压强度阈值对应于这样的强度:在该强度下设备将执行通常与点击物理鼠标或触控板的按钮相关联的操作。在一些实施例中,深按压强度阈值对应于这样的强度:在该强度下设备将执行跟通常与点击物理鼠标或触控板的按钮相关联的操作不同的操作。在一些实施例中,当检测到强度低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,并且高于标称接触检测强度阈值IT0,比该阈值低的接触不再被检测到)的接触时,设备将根据接触在触敏表面上的移动来移动焦点选择器而不执行与轻按压强度阈值或深按压强度阈值相关联的操作。一般来讲,除非另有陈述,否则这些强度阈值在不同组用户界面图之间是一致的。The user interface diagrams described below include various intensity diagrams that illustrate the current intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to one or more intensity thresholds (e.g., a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , a light press intensity threshold IT L , a deep press intensity threshold IT D , and/or one or more other intensity thresholds). This intensity diagram is not typically part of the displayed user interface, but is provided to aid in explaining the diagrams. In some embodiments, the light press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device performs an action typically associated with clicking a button on a physical mouse or trackpad. In some embodiments, the deep press intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity at which the device performs an action different from the action typically associated with clicking a button on a physical mouse or trackpad. In some embodiments, when a contact is detected with an intensity below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., and above a nominal contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 , below which contacts are no longer detected), the device moves the focus selector in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface without performing the action associated with the light press intensity threshold or the deep press intensity threshold. Generally, unless otherwise noted, these intensity thresholds are consistent across different sets of user interface diagrams.
接触强度从低于轻按压强度阈值ITL的强度增大到介于轻按压强度阈值ITL与深按压强度阈值ITD之间的强度有时称为“轻按压”输入。接触强度从低于深按压强度阈值ITD的强度增大到高于深按压强度阈值ITD的强度有时称为“深按压”输入。接触强度从低于接触检测强度阈值IT0的强度增大到介于接触检测强度阈值IT0与轻按压强度阈值ITL之间的强度有时称为检测到触摸表面上的接触。接触强度从高于接触检测强度阈值IT0的强度减小到低于接触强度阈值IT0的强度有时称为检测到接触从触摸表面的抬离。在一些实施例中,IT0为零。在一些实施例中,IT0大于零。在一些图示中,阴影圆或椭圆用于表示触敏表面上的接触强度。在一些图示中,没有阴影的圆或椭圆用于表示触敏表面上的相应接触而不指定相应接触强度。An increase in contact intensity from an intensity below a light press intensity threshold IT L to an intensity between the light press intensity threshold IT L and the deep press intensity threshold IT D is sometimes referred to as a "light press" input. An increase in contact intensity from an intensity below a deep press intensity threshold IT D to an intensity above the deep press intensity threshold IT D is sometimes referred to as a "deep press" input. An increase in contact intensity from an intensity below a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 to an intensity between the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 and the light press intensity threshold IT L is sometimes referred to as detecting a contact on the touch surface. A decrease in contact intensity from an intensity above the contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 to an intensity below the contact intensity threshold IT 0 is sometimes referred to as detecting liftoff of the contact from the touch surface. In some embodiments, IT 0 is zero. In some embodiments, IT 0 is greater than zero. In some illustrations, shaded circles or ellipses are used to represent contact intensities on the touch-sensitive surface. In some illustrations, unshaded circles or ellipses are used to represent corresponding contacts on the touch-sensitive surface without specifying corresponding contact intensities.
在本文中所描述的一些实施例中,响应于检测到包括相应按压输入的手势或响应于检测到利用相应接触(或多个接触)执行的相应按压输入来执行一个或多个操作,其中至少部分地基于检测到该接触(或多个接触)的强度增大到高于按压输入强度阈值而检测到相应按压输入。在一些实施例中,响应于检测到相应接触的强度增大到高于按压输入强度阈值(例如,相应按压输入的“向下冲程”)来执行相应操作。在一些实施例中,按压输入包括相应接触的强度增大到高于按压输入强度阈值以及该接触强度随后减小到低于按压输入强度阈值,并且响应于检测到相应接触强度随后减小到低于按压输入阈值(例如,相应按压输入的“向上冲程”)来执行相应操作。In some embodiments described herein, one or more operations are performed in response to detecting a gesture that includes a corresponding press input, or in response to detecting a corresponding press input performed with a corresponding contact (or contacts), where the corresponding press input is detected based at least in part on detecting an increase in intensity of the contact (or contacts) above a press input intensity threshold. In some embodiments, the corresponding operation is performed in response to detecting an increase in intensity of the corresponding contact above the press input intensity threshold (e.g., a "down stroke" of the corresponding press input). In some embodiments, the press input includes an increase in intensity of the corresponding contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, and the corresponding operation is performed in response to detecting a subsequent decrease in intensity of the corresponding contact below the press input threshold (e.g., an "up stroke" of the corresponding press input).
在一些实施例中,设备采用强度滞后以避免有时称为“抖动”的意外输入,其中设备限定或选择与按压输入强度阈值具有预定义关系的滞后强度阈值(例如,滞后强度阈值比按压输入强度阈值低X个强度单位,或滞后强度阈值是按压输入强度阈值的75%、90%或某些合理比例)。因此,在一些实施例中,按压输入包括相应接触的强度增大到高于按压输入强度阈值以及该接触强度随后减小到低于对应于按压输入强度阈值的滞后强度阈值,并且响应于检测到相应接触强度随后减小到低于滞后强度阈值(例如,相应按压输入的“向上冲程”)来执行相应操作。类似地,在一些实施例中,仅在设备检测到接触强度从处于或低于滞后强度阈值的强度增大到处于或高于按压输入强度阈值的强度,以及任选地接触强度随后减小到处于或低于滞后强度的强度时才检测到按压输入,并且响应于检测到按压输入(例如,接触强度增大或接触强度减小,这取决于环境)来执行相应操作。In some embodiments, the device employs intensity hysteresis to avoid unexpected inputs, sometimes referred to as "jitter," where the device defines or selects a hysteresis intensity threshold that has a predefined relationship to a press input intensity threshold (e.g., the hysteresis intensity threshold is X intensity units lower than the press input intensity threshold, or the hysteresis intensity threshold is 75%, 90%, or some reasonable fraction of the press input intensity threshold). Thus, in some embodiments, a press input includes an increase in intensity of the corresponding contact above the press input intensity threshold and a subsequent decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold corresponding to the press input intensity threshold, and a corresponding operation is performed in response to detecting the subsequent decrease in intensity of the corresponding contact below the hysteresis intensity threshold (e.g., an "upstroke" of the corresponding press input). Similarly, in some embodiments, a press input is detected only when the device detects an increase in contact intensity from an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity at or above the press input intensity threshold, and optionally a subsequent decrease in contact intensity to an intensity at or below the hysteresis intensity, and a corresponding operation is performed in response to detecting the press input (e.g., an increase in contact intensity or a decrease in contact intensity, depending on the circumstances).
为了便于解释,响应于与按压输入强度阈值相关联的按压输入或响应于包括按压输入的手势而执行的操作的描述是任选地响应于检测到以下任一者而触发的:接触的强度增大到高于按压输入强度阈值、接触强度从低于滞后强度阈值的强度增大到高于按压输入强度阈值的强度、接触的强度减小到低于按压输入强度阈值、和/或接触的强度减小到低于对应于按压输入强度阈值的滞后强度阈值。另外,在其中操作被描述为响应于检测到接触的强度减小到低于按压输入强度阈值而执行的实例中,任选地响应于检测到接触的强度减小到低于对应于并且小于按压输入强度阈值的滞后强度阈值来执行操作。For ease of explanation, descriptions of operations performed in response to a press input associated with a press input intensity threshold, or in response to a gesture including a press input, are optionally triggered in response to detecting any of: an increase in the intensity of the contact above the press input intensity threshold, an increase in the intensity of the contact from an intensity below a hysteresis intensity threshold to an intensity above the press input intensity threshold, a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, and/or a decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to the press input intensity threshold. Additionally, in instances where an operation is described as being performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below the press input intensity threshold, the operation is optionally performed in response to detecting a decrease in the intensity of the contact below a hysteresis intensity threshold that corresponds to and is less than the press input intensity threshold.
用户界面和相关联的过程User interface and associated processes
执行用户界面操作Performing UI actions
许多电子设备具有用于执行操作诸如查看用户界面对象(照片、电子邮件消息等)和删除用户界面对象的用户界面。一些用户界面操作诸如从设备或独立服务器删除用户界面对象是破坏性的,这意味着该操作难以逆转或不可能逆转。例如,在一些情况下,已经无意地删除电子邮件消息的用户将具有有限量的时间来在电子邮件消息被永久删除之前从废件夹恢复该电子邮件消息。为了防止此类无意操作发生,一些现有方法使得电子设备向已经输入请求此类破坏性操作的输入(例如,输入到电子设备中)的用户请求确认。这些现有方法的一个缺点在于它们是耗时的并且需要用户输入额外输入来确认该操作应被执行。Many electronic devices have user interfaces for performing operations such as viewing user interface objects (photos, email messages, etc.) and deleting user interface objects. Some user interface operations, such as deleting a user interface object from a device or a separate server, are destructive, meaning that the operation is difficult or impossible to reverse. For example, in some cases, a user who has accidentally deleted an email message will have a limited amount of time to recover the email message from a trash folder before the email message is permanently deleted. In order to prevent such unintentional operations from occurring, some existing methods cause the electronic device to request confirmation from a user who has entered an input (e.g., into the electronic device) requesting such a destructive operation. One disadvantage of these existing methods is that they are time consuming and require the user to enter additional input to confirm that the operation should be performed.
在下文描述的实施例中,提供了用于执行用户界面操作的改进方法。检测到与用户在触敏表面上的相应操作相关联的手势(例如,在电子邮件消息之上进行轻扫以删除该电子邮件消息)。响应于检测到该手势,如果该手势在触敏表面上具有高于第一强度阈值的最大强度,则设备在不向用户请求确认的情况下执行操作(例如,深按压轻扫被设备理解为指示对执行操作的请求是真正有意的)。另一方面,如果手势的最大强度低于第一强度阈值,则设备请求确认用户想要执行该操作,并且因此仍防止执行无意的破坏性操作。一些操作诸如滚动是在不向用户请求确认的情况下执行的,而不管与执行该操作的请求相关联的手势的强度如何。In the embodiments described below, an improved method for performing user interface operations is provided. A gesture associated with a corresponding operation by a user on a touch-sensitive surface is detected (e.g., swiping over an email message to delete the email message). In response to detecting the gesture, if the gesture has a maximum intensity on the touch-sensitive surface that is above a first intensity threshold, the device performs the operation without requesting confirmation from the user (e.g., a deep press swipe is understood by the device to indicate that the request to perform the operation was truly intentional). On the other hand, if the maximum intensity of the gesture is below the first intensity threshold, the device requests confirmation that the user wants to perform the operation, and thus still prevents unintentional destructive operations from being performed. Some operations, such as scrolling, are performed without requesting confirmation from the user, regardless of the intensity of the gesture associated with the request to perform the operation.
图5A-图5I根据一些实施例示出了用于执行用户界面操作的示例性用户界面。这些附图中的用户界面被用于示出下文描述的过程,包括图6A-图6B中的过程。在适用的情况下,图5A-图5I包括强度图,该强度图示出相对于包括第一强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的多个强度阈值的触敏表面上的当前接触强度。在一些实施例中,与下文参考“ITD”描述的那些操作类似的操作是参考不同的强度阈值(例如,“ITL”)来执行的。Figures 5A-5I illustrate exemplary user interfaces for performing user interface operations in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 6A-6B. Where applicable, Figures 5A-5I include intensity graphs that illustrate the current contact intensity on the touch-sensitive surface relative to multiple intensity thresholds including a first intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D "). In some embodiments, operations similar to those described below with reference to "IT D " are performed with reference to different intensity thresholds (e.g., "IT L ").
在一些实施例中,设备是具有独立显示器(例如,显示器450)和独立触敏表面(例如,触敏表面451)的电子设备。在一些实施例中,设备是便携式多功能设备100,显示器是触敏显示器系统112,并且触敏表面包括显示器上的触觉输出发生器167(图1A)。为了便于解释,参考图5A-图5I和图6A-图6B描述的实施例将参考触摸屏112来进行讨论,然而,当在显示器450上显示图5A-图5I所示的用户界面时,响应于在触敏表面451上检测到图5A-图5I中所描述的接触而任选地在具有显示器450和独立触敏表面451的设备上执行类似操作;在此类实施例中,焦点选择器任选地是在对应于图5A-图5I中所示的接触(例如,1806、1808和1810)的位置(例如,在该处或附近)的位置处所显示的光标或指针。In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device having an independent display (e.g., display 450) and an independent touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface 451). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device 100, the display is touch-sensitive display system 112, and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generator 167 ( FIG. 1A ) on the display. For ease of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 5A-5I and FIG. 6A-6B will be discussed with reference to touch screen 112. However, when the user interface shown in FIG. 5A-5I is displayed on display 450, similar operations are optionally performed on the device having display 450 and independent touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts described in FIG. 5A-5I on touch-sensitive surface 451. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally a cursor or pointer displayed at a location corresponding to (e.g., at or near) the locations of the contacts shown in FIG. 5A-5I (e.g., 1806, 1808, and 1810).
图5A示出了用于在具有触摸屏显示器112的电子设备300上执行用户界面操作的示例性用户界面。在一些实施例中,设备显示一个或多个用户界面对象(例如,用户界面对象1804-1至1804-4分别对应于电子邮件会话1至4)。具体地,图5A-图5I示出了从电子邮件消息列表删除电子邮件消息的实例,并且还示出了根据一些实施例的其他用户界面操作的实例,诸如滚动通过电子邮件列表。Figure 5A illustrates an exemplary user interface for performing user interface operations on an electronic device 300 having a touch screen display 112. In some embodiments, the device displays one or more user interface objects (e.g., user interface objects 1804-1 through 1804-4 correspond to email conversations 1 through 4, respectively). Specifically, Figures 5A-5I illustrate an example of deleting an email message from a list of email messages, and also illustrate examples of other user interface operations according to some embodiments, such as scrolling through a list of emails.
图5B示出了接触1806的检测。在一些实施例中,特定手势与特定相应操作相关联。例如,接触1806包括于在用户界面对象1804-1之上的轻扫手势中。图5B示出了其中在电子邮件消息(用户界面项目1804-1)之上的轻扫手势被理解为对删除或存档该消息的请求的实施例的实例。在一些实施例中,如果手势在电子邮件消息的预定义边界中开始,则轻扫手势被认为是在电子邮件消息之上。在一些实施例中,如果手势的主要部分发生在预定义边界内(或预定义区域内,其中显示电子邮件消息的表示),则轻扫手势被认为是在该电子邮件消息之上。5B shows the detection of contact 1806. In some embodiments, a specific gesture is associated with a specific corresponding operation. For example, contact 1806 is included in a swipe gesture above user interface object 1804-1. FIG. 5B shows an example of an embodiment in which a swipe gesture above an email message (user interface item 1804-1) is understood as a request to delete or archive the message. In some embodiments, if the gesture begins in the predefined boundaries of the email message, the swipe gesture is considered to be above the email message. In some embodiments, if the main part of the gesture occurs within the predefined boundaries (or within a predefined area in which the representation of the email message is displayed), the swipe gesture is considered to be above the email message.
在图5B所示的实例中,接触1806具有低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITD)的强度。在该实例中,设备检测手势并且基于预定义标准,请求确认用户想要删除电子邮件消息(例如,如果不满足标准)或在不向用户请求确认的情况下删除电子邮件消息(例如,如果满足标准)。在一些实施例中,预定义标准包括手势的相应强度(例如,最大强度)高于预定义阈值(例如,ITD)。预期当在电子邮件消息上方检测到手势时,可以任意种方式来限定和测量接触1806的强度。例如,在一些实施例中,在手势开始时测量强度。在一些实施例中,使用手势的平均强度。用于测量和限定手势的强度的其他度量对于本领域的技术人员而言将是显而易见的。In the example shown in Figure 5B, contact 1806 has an intensity that is below a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ). In this example, the device detects the gesture and, based on predefined criteria, requests confirmation that the user wants to delete the email message (e.g., if the criteria are not met) or deletes the email message without requesting confirmation from the user (e.g., if the criteria are met). In some embodiments, the predefined criteria include a corresponding intensity (e.g., maximum intensity) of the gesture being above a predefined threshold (e.g., IT D ). It is contemplated that the intensity of contact 1806 when a gesture is detected over the email message can be defined and measured in any number of ways. For example, in some embodiments, the intensity is measured at the start of the gesture. In some embodiments, the average intensity of the gesture is used. Other metrics for measuring and defining the intensity of a gesture will be apparent to those skilled in the art.
图5C示出了在用户界面对象1804-1上形成轻扫手势的接触1806的延续。图5B和图5C两者中的接触1806具有低于深按压强度阈值的强度。因此,设备请求确认用户想要删除电子邮件消息(例如,显示具有词“删除?”的示能表示)。对于低强度手势请求确认执行操作诸如破坏性操作(诸如删除用户界面对象),使得设备能够防止难以逆转或不可能逆转的无意操作。在一些实施例中,用户任选地选择示能表示(使用单独接触或相同手势的延续)来通知设备继续进行该操作。在一些实施例中,不同于示能表示的选择的单独手势取消该操作。例如,在一些实施例中,在电子邮件之上的第二轻扫取消对删除该电子邮件的请求。在一些实施例中,除了包括示能表示的选择的手势之外的多个手势中的任一个手势取消该删除操作。在该实例中,接触1806还低于轻按压强度阈值。在该实例中,没有附加功能与轻按压强度阈值相关联。然而,在一些其他实施例中,附加功能与轻按压输入相关联(例如,轻按压强度阈值是用于识别用于响应于检测到在一个用户界面对象1804上的轻按压输入而激活示能表示诸如图5B中的删除示能表示、图5B中的编辑示能表示和/或打开一个会话的轻按压输入的强度阈值,所述轻按压输入包括从低于ITL的强度增大到高于ITL的接触强度)。Figure 5C shows a continuation of contact 1806 forming a swipe gesture on user interface object 1804-1. Contact 1806 in both Figures 5B and 5C has an intensity below the deep press intensity threshold. Thus, the device requests confirmation that the user wants to delete the email message (e.g., displaying an affordance with the word "Delete?"). Requesting confirmation for a low-intensity gesture to perform an operation such as a destructive operation (such as deleting a user interface object) enables the device to prevent unintentional operations that are difficult or impossible to reverse. In some embodiments, the user optionally selects the affordance (using a separate contact or a continuation of the same gesture) to notify the device to proceed with the operation. In some embodiments, a separate gesture other than the selection of the affordance cancels the operation. For example, in some embodiments, a second swipe over the email cancels the request to delete the email. In some embodiments, any one of a plurality of gestures other than the gesture including the selection of the affordance cancels the delete operation. In this example, contact 1806 is also below the light press intensity threshold. In this example, no additional functionality is associated with the light press intensity threshold. However, in some other embodiments, additional functionality is associated with the light press input (e.g., the light press intensity threshold is an intensity threshold for identifying a light press input for activating an enable indication such as the delete enable indication in Figure 5B, the edit enable indication in Figure 5B, and/or opening a session in response to detecting a light press input on a user interface object 1804, wherein the light press input includes increasing from an intensity below IT L to a contact intensity above IT L ).
图5D类似于图5B,其不同之处在于图5D中所示的接触1808具有高于深按压强度阈值ITD的强度(例如,图5B中的接触1806具有低于ITD的强度)。图5E示出包括接触1808的手势的延续。图5E类似于图5C,其不同之处在于图5E中所示的接触1808具有高于深按压强度阈值的强度(例如,图5C中的接触1806)。为简明起见,此处不再分别参考图5D和图5E来重复已经参考图5B和图5C描述的其他细节。在一些实施例中,因为接触1808当在电子邮件消息上方时具有高于ITD的最大强度,所以在不向用户请求确认的情况下删除电子邮件消息。在该实例中,设备基于接触的高强度而确定手势不是意外的,并且因此在不请求用户输入更多用户输入(例如,确认输入)的情况下继续进行该操作(例如,删除),从而节省用户时间并且提高效率。在一些实施例中,接触1808在图5D-图5E中所示的整个手势中具有高于ITD的强度。在一些实施例中,接触1808在图5D-图5E中所示的手势的开始时具有高于ITD的强度,并且在图5D-图5E中所示的手势结束时具有低于ITD的强度。在一些实施例中,接触1808在图5D-图5E中所示的手势开始时具有低于ITD的强度,并且在图5D-图5E中所示的手势结束时具有高于ITD的强度。Figure 5D is similar to Figure 5B, except that contact 1808 shown in Figure 5D has an intensity greater than the deep press intensity threshold IT D (e.g., contact 1806 in Figure 5B has an intensity less than IT D ). Figure 5E shows a continuation of the gesture including contact 1808. Figure 5E is similar to Figure 5C, except that contact 1808 shown in Figure 5E has an intensity greater than the deep press intensity threshold (e.g., contact 1806 in Figure 5C). For the sake of simplicity, other details already described with reference to Figures 5B and 5C will not be repeated here with reference to Figures 5D and 5E, respectively. In some embodiments, because contact 1808 has a maximum intensity greater than IT D when over the email message, the email message is deleted without requesting confirmation from the user. In this example, the device determines that the gesture was not accidental based on the high intensity of the contact, and therefore continues with the operation (e.g., deletion) without requesting further user input (e.g., confirmation input), thereby saving the user time and improving efficiency. In some embodiments, contact 1808 has an intensity above IT D throughout the gesture shown in Figures 5D-5E . In some embodiments, contact 1808 has an intensity above IT D at the beginning of the gesture shown in Figures 5D-5E , and has an intensity below IT D at the end of the gesture shown in Figures 5D-5E . In some embodiments, contact 1808 has an intensity below IT D at the beginning of the gesture shown in Figures 5D-5E , and has an intensity above IT D at the end of the gesture shown in Figures 5D-5E .
在一些实施例中,显示吸引用户的注意力的戏剧性动画(例如,玻璃正在破碎的动画或电子邮件消息正在被“揉皱”的表示)来通知用户破坏性操作已被执行是有帮助的。在一些实施例中,在显示对应于破坏性操作的动画之后,向用户提供用于撤销该破坏性操作的选项(例如,显示“撤销”示能表示或摇动以撤销的指令)。图5F示出此类动画的静止帧图示。在这种情况下,动画以戏剧性方式显示词“正在删除”。In some embodiments, it is helpful to display a dramatic animation that draws the user's attention (e.g., an animation of glass breaking or a representation of an email message being "crumpled") to notify the user that a destructive operation has been performed. In some embodiments, after displaying the animation corresponding to the destructive operation, the user is provided with an option to undo the destructive operation (e.g., displaying an "undo" affordance or a shake-to-undo instruction). FIG5F shows a still frame illustration of such an animation. In this case, the animation displays the word "deleting" in a dramatic manner.
图5G示出了在参考图5F描述动画之后,从列表移除电子邮件消息。在一些实施例中,先前不可见的一个或多个附加电子邮件消息(例如,用户将必须滚动通过电子邮件消息列以便看到这些电子邮件消息)由于移除了用户界面对象1804-1所以现在是可见的。例如,用户界面对象1804-5现在在不滚动的情况下对用户而言是可见的。5G shows the removal of the email message from the list after the animation described with reference to FIG5F. In some embodiments, one or more additional email messages that were previously not visible (e.g., the user would have to scroll through the list of email messages to see them) are now visible due to the removal of user interface object 1804-1. For example, user interface object 1804-5 is now visible to the user without scrolling.
在一些实施例中,与某些操作相关联的某些输入可在不向用户请求确认的情况下来执行,而不管对应于输入的接触强度如何。例如,图5H示出了包括接触1810的向上移动的竖直轻扫输入。在该实例中,利用接触1810执行的竖直轻扫输入被设备理解为对滚动通过电子邮件消息列表的请求。图5I示出了所显示的电子邮件消息中所产生的变化(该列表已滚动,使得现在显示用户界面对象1804-5至1804-7)。利用接触1810执行的竖直轻扫手势的最大强度低于深按压强度阈值(并且就此而言,轻按压强度阈值)。然而,在该实例中,因为滚动操作不需要用户确认,所以在不请求用户确认的情况下滚动列表。在一些实施例中,基于操作可被逆转的容易性(例如,其是破坏性操作还是非破坏性操作)来将与轻按压手势相关联的操作分类为需要用户确认的操作或不需要用户确认的操作。In some embodiments, certain inputs associated with certain operations can be performed without requesting confirmation from the user, regardless of the contact intensity corresponding to the input. For example, Figure 5H shows a vertical swipe input including an upward movement of contact 1810. In this example, the vertical swipe input performed using contact 1810 is interpreted by the device as a request to scroll through a list of email messages. Figure 5I shows the resulting changes in the displayed email messages (the list has been scrolled so that user interface objects 1804-5 to 1804-7 are now displayed). The maximum intensity of the vertical swipe gesture performed using contact 1810 is lower than the deep press intensity threshold (and, for that matter, the light press intensity threshold). However, in this example, because the scrolling operation does not require user confirmation, the list is scrolled without requesting user confirmation. In some embodiments, the operation associated with the light press gesture is classified as requiring user confirmation or not requiring user confirmation based on the ease with which the operation can be reversed (e.g., whether it is a destructive operation or a non-destructive operation).
图6A-图6B是根据一些实施例示出执行用户界面操作的方法1900的流程图。方法1900在具有显示器和触敏表面的电子设备(例如,设备300,图3,或便携式多功能设备100,图1A)处执行。在一些实施例中,显示器是触摸屏显示器并且触敏表面在显示器上。在一些实施例中,显示器与触敏表面分开。方法1900中的一些操作任选地被组合和/或一些操作的顺序被任选地改变。Figures 6A-6B are flow diagrams illustrating method 1900 for performing user interface operations, according to some embodiments. Method 1900 is performed on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A). In some embodiments, the display is a touchscreen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 1900 may optionally be combined and/or the order of some operations may optionally be changed.
如下文描述,方法1900提供了执行用户界面操作的直观方式。该方法减小了当执行用户界面操作时用户的认知负担,从而创建更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动的电子设备,使用户能够更快且更有效地执行用户界面操作节省了功率并且增加了电池充电之间的时间。As described below, method 1900 provides an intuitive way to perform user interface operations. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user when performing user interface operations, thereby creating a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered electronic devices, enabling users to perform user interface operations faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.
设备在设备的显示器上显示(1902)用户界面(例如,在设备300的触摸屏112上所显示的用户界面,图5A)。设备检测(1904)用户在触敏表面上的手势,该手势包括与用户界面中的相应位置处的焦点选择器对应的接触(例如,接触1806,图5B)。手势与相应操作相关联。The device displays (1902) a user interface on a display of the device (e.g., a user interface displayed on touch screen 112 of device 300, FIG. 5A ). The device detects (1904) a user gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, the gesture including a contact (e.g., contact 1806, FIG. 5B ) corresponding to a focus selector at a corresponding location in the user interface. The gesture is associated with a corresponding operation.
在一些实施例中,手势是(1906)接触的轻扫手势,该接触的轻扫手势对应于焦点选择器在项目列表中的项目(例如,电子邮件收件箱中的消息或会话)的表示上的移动。在一些实施例中,用户界面包括(1908)多个用户界面对象,并且相应位置对应于多个用户界面对象中的相应对象。在一些实施例中,相应操作是(1910)破坏性操作(例如,删除操作)。In some embodiments, the gesture is a swipe gesture of the contact (1906), the swipe gesture of the contact corresponding to movement of the focus selector over a representation of an item in a list of items (e.g., a message or conversation in an email inbox). In some embodiments, the user interface includes (1908) a plurality of user interface objects, and the corresponding position corresponds to a corresponding object in the plurality of user interface objects. In some embodiments, the corresponding operation is a destructive operation (e.g., a delete operation) (1910).
响应于检测到手势,根据确定接触具有低于第一强度阈值的最大强度,设备请求(1912)确认用户想要设备执行相应操作(例如,以确认用户不是意外地执行该手势)。例如,图5C-图5D示出了具有低于ITD的最大强度的手势以及对删除电子邮件消息的确认的后续请求的实例。响应于该手势,根据确定接触的最大强度高于第一强度阈值,设备在不请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作的情况下执行该相应操作。例如,图5D-图5E示出了具有高于ITD的最大强度的手势以及在不请求确认的情况下对电子邮件消息的后续删除的实例。在一些实施例中,第一强度阈值是比最初检测的接触所处的输入检测强度阈值更高的强度阈值。在一些实施例中,设备基于手势是否满足确认标准来确定是请求确认还是在不请求确认的情况下执行操作。在一些实施例中,当接触(例如,图5D-图5E中的接触1808)具有在整个手势中被维持(例如,持续维持)为高于ITD的强度时满足确认标准。在一些实施例中,当接触(例如,图5D-图5E中的接触1808)在手势开始时(或在检测接触的移动之前)具有高于ITD的强度时满足该确认标准,而不考虑接触是否在手势结束时具有高于ITD的强度。在一些实施例中,当接触(例如,图5D-图5E中的接触1808)在手势结束时(或在停止检测接触的移动之后)具有高于ITD的强度时满足确认标准,而不考虑接触是否在手势开始时具有高于ITD的强度。In response to detecting a gesture, based on determining that the contact has a maximum intensity below a first intensity threshold, the device requests (1912) confirmation that the user wants the device to perform a corresponding action (e.g., to confirm that the user did not accidentally perform the gesture). For example, Figures 5C-5D illustrate an example of a gesture having a maximum intensity below IT D and a subsequent request for confirmation to delete an email message. In response to the gesture, based on determining that the maximum intensity of the contact is above the first intensity threshold, the device performs the corresponding action without requesting confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the action. For example, Figures 5D-5E illustrate an example of a gesture having a maximum intensity above IT D and the subsequent deletion of an email message without requesting confirmation. In some embodiments, the first intensity threshold is an intensity threshold that is higher than the input detection intensity threshold at which the contact was initially detected. In some embodiments, the device determines whether to request confirmation or perform the action without requesting confirmation based on whether the gesture satisfies confirmation criteria. In some embodiments, the confirmation criteria is satisfied when the contact (e.g., contact 1808 in Figures 5D-5E) has an intensity that is maintained (e.g., continuously maintained) above IT D throughout the gesture. In some embodiments, the confirmation criterion is satisfied when the contact (e.g., contact 1808 in Figures 5D-5E ) has an intensity above IT D at the start of the gesture (or before detecting movement of the contact), regardless of whether the contact has an intensity above IT D at the end of the gesture. In some embodiments, the confirmation criterion is satisfied when the contact (e.g., contact 1808 in Figures 5D-5E ) has an intensity above IT D at the end of the gesture (or after ceasing to detect movement of the contact), regardless of whether the contact had an intensity above IT D at the start of the gesture.
在一些实施例中,请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作包括(1914)显示确认消息,该确认消息包括用于继续执行相应操作的选项。在一些实施例中,确认消息包括用于取消相应操作的执行的显式选项。在一些实施例中,确认消息不包括用于取消相应操作的执行的显式选项,而是当焦点选择器位于确认消息之外时轻击/按压取消相应操作的执行。在一些实施例中,该确认识别(1916)待执行的相应操作(例如,显示“您是否想要删除该消息?是/否”的对话框或简单地显示“删除?”的示能表示,如图5C所示)。In some embodiments, requesting confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation includes (1914) displaying a confirmation message that includes an option to continue performing the corresponding operation. In some embodiments, the confirmation message includes an explicit option to cancel performance of the corresponding operation. In some embodiments, the confirmation message does not include an explicit option to cancel performance of the corresponding operation, but rather tapping/pressing when the focus selector is outside of the confirmation message cancels performance of the corresponding operation. In some embodiments, the confirmation identifies (1916) the corresponding operation to be performed (e.g., displaying a dialog box asking "Do you want to delete this message? Yes/No" or simply displaying an affordance saying "Delete?" as shown in FIG5C ).
在一些实施例中,显示吸引用户的注意力的戏剧性动画来通知用户破坏性操作已被执行是有帮助的。在一些实施例中,相应操作是(1918)删除操作,并且执行该操作包括显示使相应用户界面对象起皱(例如,使该对象像一张纸一样起皱)的动画。在一些实施例中,操作是(1920)删除操作,并且执行该操作包括显示使相应用户界面对象破碎(例如,使该对象像一片玻璃一样破碎)的动画。例如,图5F示出正像玻璃一样破碎的词“正在删除”的动画的静止帧。在一些实施例中,在显示对应于破坏性操作的动画之后,向用户提供用于撤销该破坏性操作的选项(例如,显示“撤销”示能表示或摇动以撤销的指令)。在一些实施例中,操作是删除操作,并且执行该操作包括显示将相应用户界面对象折叠起来(例如,将相应用户界面对象与其自身折叠起来和/或折叠包括该相应用户界面对象的多个用户界面对象)的动画。在一些实施例中,操作是删除操作,并且执行该操作包括显示相应用户界面对象向后移动到显示器中(例如,相应用户界面对象向后移动并且逐渐淡出)的动画。In some embodiments, it is helpful to display a dramatic animation that attracts the user's attention to notify the user that a destructive operation has been performed. In some embodiments, the corresponding operation is (1918) a delete operation, and performing the operation includes displaying an animation that causes the corresponding user interface object to wrinkle (e.g., wrinkle the object like a piece of paper). In some embodiments, the operation is (1920) a delete operation, and performing the operation includes displaying an animation that causes the corresponding user interface object to shatter (e.g., shatter the object like a piece of glass). For example, Figure 5F shows a still frame of an animation of the word "deleting" shattering like glass. In some embodiments, after displaying the animation corresponding to the destructive operation, the user is provided with an option to undo the destructive operation (e.g., display an "undo" affordance or a shake to undo instruction). In some embodiments, the operation is a delete operation, and performing the operation includes displaying an animation that causes the corresponding user interface object to fold up (e.g., fold the corresponding user interface object onto itself and/or fold up multiple user interface objects that include the corresponding user interface object). In some embodiments, the operation is a delete operation, and performing the operation includes displaying an animation of the corresponding user interface object moving back into the display (eg, the corresponding user interface object moves back and gradually fades out).
在一些实施例中,设备检测(1922)一个或多个输入,所述一个或多个输入包括具有低于第一强度阈值的最大强度的接触。响应于检测到一个或多个输入,设备在不向用户请求确认的情况下执行(1924)一个或多个对应操作(例如,非破坏性操作,诸如滚动操作或电子邮件查看操作)。例如,用户可使用强度低于第一强度阈值的一个或多个接触来查看或滚动电子邮件消息列表,如图5H-图5I所示。In some embodiments, the device detects (1922) one or more inputs, the one or more inputs including a contact with a maximum intensity below a first intensity threshold. In response to detecting the one or more inputs, the device performs (1924) one or more corresponding operations (e.g., non-destructive operations such as a scrolling operation or an email viewing operation) without requesting confirmation from the user. For example, a user can view or scroll a list of email messages using one or more contacts with an intensity below the first intensity threshold, as shown in Figures 5H-5I.
应当理解,对图6A-图6B中已经进行描述的操作的特定顺序仅仅是示例性的,并非旨在指示所述顺序是可以执行这些操作的唯一顺序。本领域的普通技术人员会想到各种方式来对本文所述的操作进行重新排序。另外,应当指出的是,本文中相对于本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的其他过程的细节也以类似的方式适用于上文相对于图6A-图6B所描述的方法1900。例如,上文参考方法1900描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值、焦点选择器、动画任选地具有本文中参考本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值、焦点选择器、动画的一个或多个特性。为简明起见,这里不重复这些细节。It should be understood that the specific order of the operations described in Figures 6A-6B is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the order is the only order in which these operations can be performed. Those skilled in the art will think of various ways to reorder the operations described herein. In addition, it should be noted that the details of the other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) are also applicable in a similar manner to the method 1900 described above with respect to Figures 6A-6B. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 1900 optionally have one or more characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]). For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.
根据一些实施例,图7示出了根据各种所述实施例的原理进行配置的电子设备2000的功能框图。该设备的功能块任选地由执行各种所述实施例的原理的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合来实现。本领域的技术人员应当理解,图7中所述的功能块任选地被组合或被分离为子块以实现各种所述实施例的原理。因此,本文的描述任选地支持本文所述功能块的任何可能的组合或分离或进一步限定。如图7所示,电子设备2000包括显示单元2002,该显示单元被配置为显示用户界面;触敏表面单元2004,该触敏表面单元被配置为检测用户在触敏表面单元上的手势,该手势包括与用户界面中的相应位置处的焦点选择器对应的接触,其中该手势与相应操作相关联;一个或多个传感器单元2006,该一个或多个传感器单元被配置为检测与触敏表面单元2004的接触强度;和处理单元2008,该处理单元耦接到显示单元2002、触敏表面单元2004和一个或多个传感器单元2006。在一些实施例中,处理单元2008包括确认请求单元2010、操作执行单元2012和动画单元2014。According to some embodiments, FIG7 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 2000 configured according to the principles of various described embodiments. The functional blocks of the device are optionally implemented by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software that implements the principles of various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional blocks described in FIG7 can be optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to implement the principles of various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination, separation, or further definition of the functional blocks described herein. As shown in FIG7 , the electronic device 2000 includes a display unit 2002 configured to display a user interface; a touch-sensitive surface unit 2004 configured to detect a user gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit, the gesture comprising contact corresponding to a focus selector at a corresponding location in the user interface, wherein the gesture is associated with a corresponding operation; one or more sensor units 2006 configured to detect the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface unit 2004; and a processing unit 2008 coupled to the display unit 2002, the touch-sensitive surface unit 2004, and the one or more sensor units 2006. In some embodiments, the processing unit 2008 includes a confirmation request unit 2010 , an operation execution unit 2012 , and an animation unit 2014 .
在一些实施例中,用户界面包括多个用户界面对象;并且相应位置对应于多个用户界面对象中的相应对象。In some embodiments, the user interface includes a plurality of user interface objects; and the respective positions correspond to respective objects in the plurality of user interface objects.
处理单元2008被配置为:响应于检测到手势:根据确定该接触具有低于第一强度阈值的最大强度,请求确认(例如,利用确认请求单元2010)用户想要设备执行该相应操作;以及根据确定该接触的最大强度高于第一强度阈值,在不请求确认用户想要设备执行相应操作的情况下执行该相应操作(例如,利用操作执行单元2012)。Processing unit 2008 is configured to: in response to detecting a gesture: request confirmation (e.g., using confirmation request unit 2010) that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation based on determining that the contact has a maximum intensity below a first intensity threshold; and perform the corresponding operation (e.g., using operation execution unit 2012) without requesting confirmation that the user wants the device to perform the corresponding operation based on determining that the maximum intensity of the contact is above the first intensity threshold.
在一些实施例中,手势是接触的轻扫手势,该接触的轻扫手势对应于焦点选择器在项目列表中的项目的表示上的移动。In some embodiments, the gesture is a swipe gesture of contact that corresponds to movement of the focus selector over the representation of the item in the list of items.
在一些实施例中,请求确认(例如,利用确认请求单元2010)用户想要执行相应操作包括显示确认消息,该确认消息包括用于继续执行相应操作的选项。In some embodiments, requesting confirmation (eg, using confirmation request unit 2010) that the user wants to perform the corresponding operation includes displaying a confirmation message that includes an option to continue performing the corresponding operation.
在一些实施例中,确认识别待执行的相应操作。In some embodiments, the confirmation identifies a corresponding operation to be performed.
在一些实施例中,相应操作是破坏性操作。In some embodiments, the corresponding operation is a destructive operation.
在一些实施例中,处理单元2008被进一步配置为:检测一个或多个输入,所述一个或多个输入包括具有低于第一强度阈值的最大强度的接触;并且响应于检测到一个或多个输入,在不向用户请求确认的情况下执行一个或多个对应操作。In some embodiments, processing unit 2008 is further configured to: detect one or more inputs, the one or more inputs comprising a contact having a maximum intensity below a first intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the one or more inputs, perform one or more corresponding operations without requesting confirmation from the user.
在一些实施例中,相应操作是删除操作;并且执行该操作包括显示使相应用户界面对象起皱的动画(例如,利用动画单元2014)。In some embodiments, the corresponding operation is a delete operation; and performing the operation includes displaying an animation that wrinkles the corresponding user interface object (eg, using animation unit 2014).
在一些实施例中,该操作是删除操作;并且执行该操作包括显示使相应用户界面对象破碎的动画(例如,利用动画单元2014)。In some embodiments, the operation is a delete operation; and performing the operation includes displaying an animation (eg, utilizing animation unit 2014) that causes the corresponding user interface object to break apart.
上述信息处理方法中的操作任选地通过运行信息处理装置中的一个或多个功能模块来实现,该信息处理装置诸如为通用处理器(例如,如以上相对于图1A和图3所描述的)或特定于应用的芯片。The operations in the above information processing method are optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in an information processing device, such as a general-purpose processor (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or an application-specific chip.
以上参考图6A-图6B所述的操作任选地由图1A-图1B或图7中所描绘的部件来实现。例如,显示操作1902、检测操作1904和起皱动画操作1918任选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180和事件处理程序190来实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171检测在触敏显示器112上的接触,并且事件分配器模块174将事件信息递送到应用程序136-1。应用程序136-1的相应的事件识别器180将事件信息与相应的事件定义186进行比较,并且确定触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或子事件,诸如对用户界面上的对象的选择。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或子事件时,事件识别器180激活与检测到该事件或子事件相关联的事件处理程序190。事件处理程序190任选地利用或调用数据更新器176或对象更新器177来更新应用程序内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理程序190访问相应GUI更新器178来更新由应用程序所显示的内容。类似地,本领域技术人员会清楚地知道基于在图1A-1B中所示的部件可如何实现其他过程。The operations described above with reference to Figures 6A-6B may optionally be implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 7. For example, display operation 1902, detection operation 1904, and wrinkle animation operation 1918 may optionally be implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as the selection of an object in a user interface. Upon detecting the corresponding predefined event or sub-event, event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, the event handler 190 accesses the corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, those skilled in the art will clearly know how other processes can be implemented based on the components shown in Figures 1A-1B.
响应于用户接触来显示附加信息Displaying additional information in response to user contact
许多电子设备具有图形用户界面,该图形用户界面包括在显示器上的特定位置处显示的用户界面对象。在一些情况下,一个或多个用户界面对象与隐藏信息相关联,该隐藏信息当用户将光标或接触放置于该用户界面对象上方持续预定义的时间周期(例如,工具提示)或点击并保持于用户界面对象上持续预定义的时间周期(例如,浏览器上的后退按钮)时显露。这些情况需要用户等待经过预定义的时间周期,从而看到最初隐藏的信息。向用户提供用于避免等待并且得到附加信息的立即显示的选项将是有利的。在一些情况下,单个激活区域或用户界面对象与设备的多个操作相关联(例如,浏览器上的后退按钮与导航到先前网页和显示先前访问的网页的弹出列表两者相关联)。在这些情况下,时间延迟有时被引入作为响应于与激活区域或用户界面对象相关联的用户输入来确定执行多个操作中的哪个操作的方式。但是,此类延迟打断用户的工作流程。提供用于立即执行特定操作的直观方式可使得用户与设备的交互更加有效。Many electronic devices have a graphical user interface that includes a user interface object displayed at a specific location on the display. In some cases, one or more user interface objects are associated with hidden information that is revealed when a user places a cursor or contact over the user interface object for a predefined time period (e.g., a tooltip) or clicks and remains on the user interface object for a predefined time period (e.g., a back button on a browser). These situations require the user to wait for a predefined time period to see the initially hidden information. Providing the user with an option to avoid waiting and obtain the immediate display of additional information would be advantageous. In some cases, a single activation area or user interface object is associated with multiple operations of the device (e.g., a back button on a browser is associated with navigating to a previous web page and displaying a pop-up list of previously visited web pages). In these cases, time delays are sometimes introduced as a way to determine which of multiple operations is to be performed in response to user input associated with the activation area or user interface object. However, such delays interrupt the user's workflow. Providing an intuitive way to immediately perform a specific operation can make the interaction between the user and the device more effective.
下文描述的实施例提供了使用触敏表面和检测触敏表面上的接触强度(例如,压力)的传感器来显示附加信息(或激活用户界面对象)的新的改进方法。为了避免等待预定义的延迟时间以便查看与用户界面对象或用户界面的区域相关联的附加信息,用户具有用于施加大于预定义强度阈值的接触强度(例如,压力)以立即看到附加信息的选项。例如,用户可通过利用高于强度阈值的强度按压触敏表面来立即显示工具提示或弹出菜单,而不必等待延迟时间。类似地,对于浏览器上的后退按钮,用户可通过利用高于强度阈值的强度按压触敏表面来立即显示先前访问的网页的列表。另一方面,如果用户没有用足够的强度来进行按压,则直到已经流逝延迟时间才显示附加信息。因此,所述实施例向用户提供与用户界面对象进行交互的更有效方式。The embodiments described below provide new and improved methods for displaying additional information (or activating user interface objects) using a touch-sensitive surface and a sensor that detects contact intensity (e.g., pressure) on the touch-sensitive surface. To avoid waiting for a predefined delay time in order to view additional information associated with a user interface object or area of the user interface, the user has the option of applying a contact intensity (e.g., pressure) greater than a predefined intensity threshold to immediately see the additional information. For example, a user can immediately display a tooltip or pop-up menu by pressing the touch-sensitive surface with an intensity greater than the intensity threshold without having to wait for the delay time. Similarly, for the back button on a browser, a user can immediately display a list of previously visited web pages by pressing the touch-sensitive surface with an intensity greater than the intensity threshold. On the other hand, if the user does not press with enough intensity, the additional information is not displayed until the delay time has elapsed. Thus, the embodiments provide users with a more efficient way to interact with user interface objects.
图8A-图8N示出了根据一些实施例的用于基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)来在显示器上显示与位置相关联的附加信息的示例性用户界面。这些附图中的用户界面被用于示出下文描述的过程,包括图9A-图9B中的过程。图8A-图8N包括强度图,该强度图示出触敏表面上的接触相对于包括相应阈值(例如,“ITD”)的多个强度阈值的当前强度。在一些实施例中,与下文参考ITD描述的那些操作类似的操作是参考不同的强度阈值(例如,“ITL”)来执行的。Figures 8A-8N illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying additional information associated with a location on a display based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure) and contact timing (e.g., duration) in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 9A-9B. Figures 8A-8N include an intensity graph that illustrates the current intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to multiple intensity thresholds including a corresponding threshold (e.g., “IT D ”). In some embodiments, operations similar to those described below with reference to IT D are performed with reference to a different intensity threshold (e.g., “IT L ”).
图8A示出了在显示器450上显示的用户界面(例如,网页),该用户界面具有多个可选择对象(例如,3606-1和3606-2)。图8A-图8C示出了当接触具有高于(例如,大于)强度阈值的强度时,在没有从检测到接触的时间开始等待预定义延迟时间的情况下响应于检测到接触(例如,通过滚动网页)而显示附加信息。Figure 8A shows a user interface (e.g., a web page) displayed on display 450 with multiple selectable objects (e.g., 3606-1 and 3606-2). Figures 8A-8C show that when the contact has an intensity above (e.g., greater than) an intensity threshold, additional information is displayed in response to detecting a contact (e.g., by scrolling a web page) without waiting for a predefined delay time from the time the contact is detected.
在图8A中,在T0之前的时间处,在触敏表面451上不存在或没有检测到接触,并且焦点选择器3607-a远离滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4。在图8B中,在时间T0处,在触敏表面451上检测到接触(例如,图8B中的接触3605)。响应于检测到触敏表面451上的接触,设备指导显示器450将焦点选择器(例如,图8B中的焦点选择器3607-a)定位在显示器450上的位置处(例如,图8B中的滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方)。在图8C中,在时间T1之后且在时间T2之前,当焦点选择器3607-a仍定位在显示器450上的位置处(例如,在图8C中的滚动条366-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方)时,触敏表面451上的接触(例如,图8C中的接触3605)的强度超过强度阈值ITD。当接触具有高于预定义强度阈值的强度时,在不等待经过预定义的延迟时间的情况下(例如,在不等待直到时间T2的情况下或在不等待直到已经流逝预定义延迟时间T延迟=T2-T0的情况下)在显示器450上(例如,通过滚动网页)显示附加信息(例如,另外可选择的对象3606-6和3606-7)。换句话讲,当焦点选择器3607-a位于滚动箭头3606-4上方时,如果用户放置强度高于强度阈值的接触,则滚动用户界面,即使延迟时间尚未过去。在一些实施例中,用户界面的控制用户界面的滚动的部分包括所显示的滚动用户界面(例如,如图8A所示)。在一些实施例中,用户界面的控制用户界面的滚动的部分是隐藏命中区域,其未显示但存在于应用程序的可滚动窗口的边缘处。例如,如果用户在移动相应图标或其他用户界面对象时或在选择文本时将光标3607移动到显示器的底部边缘,则设备响应于检测到光标在隐藏命中区域中持续超过延迟时间或响应于检测到接触的强度增大到高于预定义强度阈值而滚动用户界面。In Figure 8A, at a time before T0, no contact is present or detected on touch-sensitive surface 451, and focus selector 3607-a is away from scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3. In Figure 8B, at time T0, a contact is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., contact 3605 in Figure 8B). In response to detecting the contact on touch-sensitive surface 451, the device directs display 450 to position the focus selector (e.g., focus selector 3607-a in Figure 8B) at a location on display 450 (e.g., above scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3 in Figure 8B). In Figure 8C, after time T1 and before time T2, while focus selector 3607-a is still positioned at a location on display 450 (e.g., over scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 366-3 in Figure 8C), the intensity of a contact (e.g., contact 3605 in Figure 8C) on touch-sensitive surface 451 exceeds intensity threshold IT D. When the contact has an intensity above a predefined intensity threshold, additional information (e.g., additional selectable objects 3606-6 and 3606-7) is displayed on display 450 (e.g., by scrolling a web page) without waiting for a predefined delay time to pass (e.g., without waiting until time T2 or without waiting until a predefined delay time, T delay = T2 - T0, has elapsed). In other words, when focus selector 3607-a is located over scroll arrow 3606-4, if the user places a contact with an intensity above the intensity threshold, the user interface is scrolled even if the delay time has not yet passed. In some embodiments, the portion of the user interface that controls scrolling of the user interface includes a displayed scrolling user interface (e.g., as shown in FIG8A ). In some embodiments, the portion of the user interface that controls scrolling of the user interface is a hidden hit area that is not displayed but exists at the edge of the scrollable window of the application. For example, if the user moves the cursor 3607 to the bottom edge of the display while moving a corresponding icon or other user interface object or while selecting text, the device scrolls the user interface in response to detecting that the cursor remains in the hidden hit area for longer than a delay time or in response to detecting that the intensity of the contact increases to above a predefined intensity threshold.
图8D-图8G示出了当接触具有低于(例如,小于)强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的强度时,等待直到从在触敏表面451上检测到接触的时间开始(或从接触达到较低强度阈值诸如ITL的时间开始)已经流逝预定义的延迟时间来响应于所检测到的接触而(例如,通过滚动网页)显示附加信息。Figures 8D-8G show that when a contact has an intensity below (e.g., less than) an intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”), waiting until a predefined delay time has elapsed from the time the contact is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 (or from the time the contact reaches a lower intensity threshold such as IT L ) to display additional information in response to the detected contact (e.g., by scrolling a web page).
在图8D中,在T0之前的时间处,在触敏表面451上不存在或没有检测到接触并且焦点选择器3607-a远离滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4。在图8E中,在时间T0处,在触敏表面451上检测到接触(例如,图8E中的接触3608)。响应于检测到触敏表面451上的接触,设备指导显示器450将焦点选择器(例如,图8E中的焦点选择器3607-b)定位在显示器450上的相应位置处(例如,在图8E中的滚动条3606-3的边缘3606-4处)。在图8F中,在时间T2之前的时间处,当焦点选择器3607-b仍定位在显示器450上的相应位置处(例如,图8F中的滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方)时,触敏表面451上的接触(例如,图8F中的接触3608)的强度低于强度阈值ITD。当接触3608具有低于强度阈值的强度时并且当焦点选择器3607-b仍定位在显示器450上的相应位置处时,设备直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间(例如,预定义的延迟时间T延迟=T2-T0)或直到时间T2才显示与焦点选择器3607-b的相应位置相关联的附加信息。在图8G中,预定义的延迟时间(T延迟=T2-T0)过去之后或时间T2之后,当触敏表面451上的接触(例如,图8G中的接触3608)的强度仍低于强度阈值ITD时,并且当焦点选择器3607-b仍定位在显示器450上的位置处(例如,图8G中的滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方)时,在显示器450上(例如,通过滚动网页)显示附加信息(例如,另外可选择的对象3606-6和3606-7)。例如,如果用户在滚动区域中的滚动箭头上方放置强度低于强度阈值的接触并且等待超过延迟时间,则相应地滚动用户界面。在一些实施例中,延迟时间T延迟=T2-T1,并且接触在时间T1处达到较低强度阈值(例如,“ITL”),并且在等待直到从时间T1直到时间T2接触强度已被维持高于强度阈值ITL之后在显示器上显示附加信息。In Figure 8D, at a time before T0, there is no contact or no contact detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 and focus selector 3607-a is away from scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3. In Figure 8E, at time T0, a contact is detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., contact 3608 in Figure 8E). In response to detecting the contact on touch-sensitive surface 451, the device directs display 450 to position the focus selector (e.g., focus selector 3607-b in Figure 8E) at a corresponding location on display 450 (e.g., at edge 3606-4 of scroll bar 3606-3 in Figure 8E). In Figure 8F , at a time before time T2, while focus selector 3607-b is still positioned at a corresponding location on display 450 (e.g., over scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3 in Figure 8F ), the intensity of the contact on touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., contact 3608 in Figure 8F ) is below intensity threshold IT D . When contact 3608 has an intensity below the intensity threshold and while focus selector 3607-b is still positioned at the corresponding location on display 450, the device does not display additional information associated with the corresponding location of focus selector 3607-b until a predefined delay time has elapsed (e.g., predefined delay time T delay = T2 - T0) or until time T2. In Figure 8G, after a predefined delay time ( Tdelay = T2-T0) has elapsed or after time T2, when the intensity of the contact on touch-sensitive surface 451 (e.g., contact 3608 in Figure 8G) is still below intensity threshold IT D , and when focus selector 3607-b is still positioned at a location on display 450 (e.g., above scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3 in Figure 8G), additional information (e.g., additional selectable objects 3606-6 and 3606-7) is displayed on display 450 (e.g., by scrolling a web page). For example, if the user places a contact with an intensity below the intensity threshold above the scroll arrow in the scroll area and waits for more than the delay time, the user interface is scrolled accordingly. In some embodiments, the delay time Tdelay = T2-T1, and the contact reaches a lower intensity threshold (e.g., "IT L ") at time T1, and the additional information is displayed on the display after waiting until the intensity of the contact has been maintained above intensity threshold IT L from time T1 until time T2.
换句话讲,在一些实施例中,设备确定在焦点选择器位于显示器上的相应位置处时接触强度是否高于强度阈值。如果接触强度高于强度阈值,则设备不等待预定义的延迟时间来在显示器上显示附加信息,而是立即显示附加信息。另一方面,如果接触强度低于强度阈值,则设备等待直到预定义的延迟时间以在显示器上显示附加信息,因此在稍后时间(例如,根据预定义的延迟时间来确定)处显示附加信息。因此,如果用户将接触的强度增大到高于强度阈值,则用户可较早地在显示器上显示与对应于接触的位置相关联的附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息,而不必等待预定义的延迟时间。In other words, in some embodiments, the device determines whether the contact intensity is above an intensity threshold when the focus selector is at the corresponding position on the display. If the contact intensity is above the intensity threshold, the device does not wait for a predefined delay time to display the additional information on the display, but instead displays the additional information immediately. On the other hand, if the contact intensity is below the intensity threshold, the device waits until a predefined delay time to display the additional information on the display, and thus displays the additional information at a later time (e.g., determined according to the predefined delay time). Therefore, if the user increases the intensity of the contact to above the intensity threshold, the user can display additional (e.g., initially not displayed) information associated with the position corresponding to the contact on the display earlier without having to wait for the predefined delay time.
在一些实施例中,当焦点选择器显示于相应位置处时,设备确定从检测到接触的时间开始预定义的延迟时间是否过去。如果自从检测到接触以来已经流逝预定义的延迟时间,则设备在显示器450上显示附加信息。另一方面,如果预定义的延迟时间尚未过去,则设备确定(例如,重复地、反复地或多次检查)接触强度是否高于预定义阈值。如果设备确定接触强度高于预定义阈值,则设备在不等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间的情况下显示附加信息。In some embodiments, when the focus selector is displayed at the corresponding position, the device determines whether a predefined delay time has passed since the contact was detected. If the predefined delay time has elapsed since the contact was detected, the device displays additional information on display 450. On the other hand, if the predefined delay time has not elapsed, the device determines (e.g., repeatedly, repeatedly, or multiple times) whether the contact intensity is above a predefined threshold. If the device determines that the contact intensity is above the predefined threshold, the device displays the additional information without waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed.
图8H示出了在触摸屏112上显示的用户界面(例如,网页)。图8H-图8J还示出了当接触具有高于(例如,大于)强度阈值(例如,ITD)的强度(例如,压力)时,在不从检测到接触的时间开始等待预定义的延迟时间的情况下响应于在触摸屏112上直接检测到的接触而显示附加信息(例如,浏览历史,包括先前访问的网页的列表)。Figure 8H shows a user interface (e.g., a web page) displayed on touch screen 112. Figures 8H-8J also show that when the contact has an intensity (e.g., pressure) above (e.g., greater than) an intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ), additional information (e.g., a browsing history, including a list of previously visited web pages) is displayed in response to a contact being directly detected on touch screen 112 without waiting for a predefined delay time from the time the contact is detected.
在图8H中,在T0之前的时间处,在触摸屏112上在对应于浏览器后退按钮3610的位置处不存在或没有检测到接触(然而,接触任选地存在于触摸屏112上的另一个位置处)。在图8I中,在时间T0处,在相应位置处(例如,在图8I中的后退按钮3610的位置处)的触摸屏112上检测到接触(例如,图8I中的接触3609)。在一些实施例中,当设备具有触摸屏显示器并且在触摸屏上检测到接触时,焦点选择器的位置与触摸屏上的接触的位置重合。在图8J中,在时间T1之后且在时间T2之前,当接触3609仍定位在触摸屏112上的相应位置处(例如,在图8J中的后退按钮3610的位置处)时,触摸屏112上的接触(例如,图8J中的接触3609)的强度超过强度阈值ITD。当接触具有高于预定义强度阈值的强度时,在不等待已经流逝预定义的延迟时间的情况下(例如,在不等待直到时间T2的情况下或在不等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间T延迟=T2-T0的情况下)在触摸屏112上显示附加信息(例如,浏览历史,包括先前访问的网页的列表3611)。换句话讲,如果用户在浏览器后退按钮上放置强度高于强度阈值ITD的接触,则显示浏览器历史,即使延迟时间尚未过去。In FIG8H , at a time before T0, no contact is present or detected on touch screen 112 at a location corresponding to browser back button 3610 (however, a contact is optionally present at another location on touch screen 112). In FIG8I , at time T0, a contact (e.g., contact 3609 in FIG8I ) is detected on touch screen 112 at a corresponding location (e.g., at the location of back button 3610 in FIG8I ). In some embodiments, when the device has a touch screen display and a contact is detected on the touch screen, the location of the focus selector coincides with the location of the contact on the touch screen. In FIG8J , after time T1 and before time T2, while contact 3609 is still positioned at a corresponding location on touch screen 112 (e.g., at the location of back button 3610 in FIG8J ), the intensity of the contact on touch screen 112 (e.g., contact 3609 in FIG8J ) exceeds intensity threshold IT D . When the contact has an intensity above a predefined intensity threshold, additional information (e.g., browsing history, including a list 3611 of previously visited web pages) is displayed on touch screen 112 without waiting for a predefined delay time to elapse (e.g., without waiting until time T2 or without waiting until a predefined delay time Tdelay =T2-T0 has elapsed). In other words, if the user places a contact on the browser back button with an intensity above intensity threshold IT D , the browser history is displayed even if the delay time has not yet elapsed.
图8K-图8N示出了当接触具有低于(例如,小于)强度阈值ITD的强度时,等待直到从在触摸屏112上的相应位置处检测到接触的时间开始已经流逝预定义的延迟时间以显示对应于所检测到的接触的附加信息(例如,浏览历史,包括先前访问的网页的列表3611,有时称为浏览器历史)。Figures 8K-8N show that when a contact has an intensity below (e.g., less than) an intensity threshold IT D , waiting until a predefined delay time has elapsed from the time the contact is detected at the corresponding location on the touch screen 112 to display additional information corresponding to the detected contact (e.g., a browsing history, including a list 3611 of previously visited web pages, sometimes referred to as a browser history).
在图8K中,在T0之前的时间处,在触摸屏112上在对应于浏览器后退按钮3610的位置处不存在或没有检测到接触(然而,接触任选地存在于触摸屏112上的另一个位置处)。在图8L中,在时间T0处,在触摸屏112上在对应于浏览器后退按钮3610的位置处检测到接触(例如,图8L中的接触3613)。在一些实施例中,触摸屏112上的接触的位置与触摸屏112上的焦点选择器的位置(例如,在图8L中的后退按钮3610的位置处)重合。在图8M中,在时间T2之前的时间处,当接触(或焦点选择器)仍定位在触摸屏112上的相应位置处(例如,在图8M中的后退按钮3610的位置处)时,触摸屏112上的接触(例如,图8L中的接触3613)的强度低于强度阈值ITD。当接触具有低于强度阈值的强度并且接触(或焦点选择器)仍定位在触摸屏112上的相应位置处时,设备直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间(例如,预定义的延迟时间T延迟=T2-T0)或直到时间T2才显示附加信息。在图8N中,在预定义的延迟时间(T延迟=T2-T0)过去之后或在时间T2之后,当接触(或对应于接触的焦点选择器)仍定位在触摸屏112上的相应位置处(例如,在图8N中的后退按钮3610的位置处)时,在触摸屏112上显示附加信息(例如,浏览历史,包括先前访问的网页的列表3611)。换句话讲,如果用户在浏览器后退按钮上放置强度低于强度阈值ITD的接触并且等待超过延迟时间,则显示浏览器历史。In FIG8K , at a time before T0, no contact is present or detected on touch screen 112 at a location corresponding to browser back button 3610 (however, a contact is optionally present at another location on touch screen 112). In FIG8L , at time T0, a contact is detected on touch screen 112 at a location corresponding to browser back button 3610 (e.g., contact 3613 in FIG8L ). In some embodiments, the location of the contact on touch screen 112 coincides with the location of a focus selector on touch screen 112 (e.g., at the location of back button 3610 in FIG8L ). In FIG8M , at a time before time T2, while the contact (or focus selector) is still positioned at a corresponding location on touch screen 112 (e.g., at the location of back button 3610 in FIG8M ), the intensity of the contact on touch screen 112 (e.g., contact 3613 in FIG8L ) is below intensity threshold IT D . When the contact has an intensity below the intensity threshold and the contact (or focus selector) is still positioned at the corresponding position on the touch screen 112, the device does not display the additional information until a predefined delay time (e.g., a predefined delay time Tdelay = T2-T0) has elapsed or until time T2. In FIG8N , after the predefined delay time ( Tdelay = T2-T0) has passed or after time T2, when the contact (or the focus selector corresponding to the contact) is still positioned at the corresponding position on the touch screen 112 (e.g., at the position of the back button 3610 in FIG8N ), additional information (e.g., a browsing history, including a list 3611 of previously visited web pages) is displayed on the touch screen 112. In other words, if the user places a contact with an intensity below the intensity threshold IT D on the browser back button and waits for more than the delay time, the browser history is displayed.
图9A-图9B是示出根据一些实施例的基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)在显示器上显示与位置相关联的附加信息的方法3700的流程图。在具有显示器和触敏表面的电子设备(例如,设备300,图3,或便携式多功能设备100,图1A)处执行方法3700。在一些实施例中,显示器是触摸屏显示器并且触敏表面在显示器上。在一些实施例中,显示器与触敏表面分开。设备包括用于检测与触敏表面的接触的强度的一个或多个传感器。方法3700中的一些操作任选地被组合,和/或一些操作的顺序被任选地改变。Figures 9A-9B are flowcharts illustrating method 3700 for displaying additional information associated with a location on a display based on contact intensity (e.g., pressure) and contact timing (e.g., duration) in accordance with some embodiments. Method 3700 is performed at an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. The device includes one or more sensors for detecting the intensity of contact with the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 3700 are optionally combined, and/or the order of some operations is optionally changed.
如下文描述,方法3700提供基于接触强度(例如,压力)和接触定时(例如,持续时间)来在显示器上显示与位置相关联的附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息的直观方式。所述方法通过使用户能够跳过延迟时间并且立即访问附加信息来减小当显示附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息时用户的认知负担,从而创建更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动的电子设备,使用户能够更快且更有效地显示附加(例如,最初未显示的)信息节省了功率并且增加了电池充电之间的时间。As described below, method 3700 provides an intuitive way to display additional (e.g., not initially displayed) information associated with a location on a display based on contact strength (e.g., pressure) and contact timing (e.g., duration). The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user when displaying additional (e.g., not initially displayed) information by enabling the user to skip the delay time and immediately access the additional information, thereby creating a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered electronic devices, enabling users to display additional (e.g., not initially displayed) information faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.
当对应于接触的焦点选择器位于显示器上的与最初未在显示器上显示的附加信息(例如,该附加信息在检测到焦点选择器在显示器上移动到相应位置或检测到相应位置处的触摸屏上的接触之前未立即显示)相关联的相应位置处时,设备检测(3702)触敏表面上的接触。在一些实施例中,附加信息与相应位置“相关联”,因为当在相应位置处执行预定义手势(例如,手指按压输入)时,在显示器上显示附加信息。When the focus selector corresponding to the contact is at a respective location on the display that is associated with additional information that was not initially displayed on the display (e.g., the additional information was not immediately displayed prior to detecting movement of the focus selector to the respective location on the display or detecting contact on the touch screen at the respective location), the device detects (3702) the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, the additional information is "associated with the respective location" because the additional information is displayed on the display when a predefined gesture (e.g., a finger press input) is performed at the respective location.
在一些实施例中,设备检测包括接触在触敏表面上的移动的手势,该移动对应于焦点选择器到显示器上的相应位置的移动(例如,光标响应于接触在触摸板上的移动而在显示器上的移动)。在此类实施例中,在检测到焦点选择器在显示器上移动到相应位置之前未立即显示附加信息。例如,如参考图8A-图8G所解释的,设备检测与显示器450分开的触敏表面451上的接触3605。在该实例中,对应于触敏表面451上的接触3608的焦点选择器(例如,图8A-图8G中的光标3607)定位在显示器450上的相应位置处(例如,在图8B中的滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方),并且根据接触3605的移动而移动。与焦点选择器3607-a的位置相关联的附加信息(例如,在显示器450上显示的另外可选择的对象3606-6和3606-7,图8C)最初未在显示器450上显示。In some embodiments, the device detects a gesture that includes movement of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the movement corresponding to movement of the focus selector to a corresponding location on the display (e.g., movement of a cursor on the display in response to movement of the contact on the touchpad). In such embodiments, additional information is not immediately displayed before detecting movement of the focus selector to the corresponding location on the display. For example, as explained with reference to Figures 8A-8G, the device detects contact 3605 on touch-sensitive surface 451 that is separate from display 450. In this example, a focus selector (e.g., cursor 3607 in Figures 8A-8G) corresponding to contact 3608 on touch-sensitive surface 451 is positioned at a corresponding location on display 450 (e.g., above scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3 in Figure 8B) and moves in accordance with the movement of contact 3605. Additional information associated with the position of focus selector 3607 - a (eg, additional selectable objects 3606 - 6 and 3606 - 7 displayed on display 450 , FIG. 8C ) is not initially displayed on display 450 .
在一些实施例中,接触是手指接触。在一些实施例中,在检测到相应位置处的触摸屏上的接触之前未立即显示附加信息。在一些实施例中,设备检测在触敏表面的对应于相应位置的一部分上的接触(例如,设备检测在触摸屏显示器上的与附加信息相关联的按钮的位置处的接触)。例如,如参考图8I-图8N所解释的,设备检测在相应位置处(例如,在图8I中的后退按钮3610的位置处)的触摸屏112上的接触3609。在一些实施例中,如图8I所示,当设备具有触摸屏显示器(例如,触摸屏112)且在触摸屏上检测到接触(例如,接触3609,图8I)时,焦点选择器的位置与接触的位置重合。与焦点选择器的位置相关联的附加信息(例如,浏览历史,包括先前访问的网页的列表3611,图8J)最初未在触摸屏112上显示。In some embodiments, the contact is a finger contact. In some embodiments, additional information is not immediately displayed before a contact on the touch screen at the corresponding location is detected. In some embodiments, the device detects a contact on a portion of the touch-sensitive surface corresponding to the corresponding location (e.g., the device detects a contact at the location of a button on the touch screen display associated with the additional information). For example, as explained with reference to Figures 8I-8N, the device detects contact 3609 on touch screen 112 at a corresponding location (e.g., at the location of back button 3610 in Figure 8I). In some embodiments, as shown in Figure 8I, when the device has a touch screen display (e.g., touch screen 112) and a contact is detected on the touch screen (e.g., contact 3609, Figure 8I), the position of the focus selector coincides with the position of the contact. Additional information associated with the position of the focus selector (e.g., a browsing history including a list 3611 of previously visited web pages, Figure 8J) is not initially displayed on touch screen 112.
在一些实施例中,设备在显示器上显示(3704)用户界面对象。在一些实施例中,用户界面对象(3706)与最初未在显示器上显示的附加信息相关联;并且相应位置对应于用户界面对象在显示器上的位置(例如,附加信息与用户界面的图标或其他所显示的元件相关联)。在一些实施例中,相应位置不与显示器上的特定用户界面对象相关联(例如,设备检测在触敏表面和/或显示器的激活区域或隐藏命中区域中的接触或光标,该接触或光标在通过等待延迟时间或将接触的强度增大到高于强度阈值而被激活时触发附加信息的显示)。In some embodiments, the device displays (3704) a user interface object on the display. In some embodiments, the user interface object (3706) is associated with additional information that is not initially displayed on the display; and the corresponding position corresponds to the position of the user interface object on the display (e.g., the additional information is associated with an icon or other displayed element of the user interface). In some embodiments, the corresponding position is not associated with a specific user interface object on the display (e.g., the device detects a contact or cursor in an activation area or a hidden hit area of the touch-sensitive surface and/or display that triggers display of the additional information when activated by waiting a delay time or increasing the intensity of the contact above an intensity threshold).
在一些实施例中,附加信息包括(3708)针对用户界面对象的帮助(例如,描述用户界面对象的信息和用于检索与用户界面对象相关的进一步帮助的一个或多个选项,诸如超链接或搜索框)。在一些实施例中,附加信息包括(3710)对用户界面对象的一种或多种功能的描述。在一些实施例中,附加信息包括对用户界面对象的简要描述和/或对与用户界面对象相关联的功能的描述。例如,如果用户界面对象是浏览器中的“创建书签”图标,则附加信息任选地为:“这样创建了新书签;书签是用于保存您最喜欢的站点的方式”。In some embodiments, the additional information includes (3708) help for the user interface object (e.g., information describing the user interface object and one or more options, such as a hyperlink or a search box, for retrieving further help related to the user interface object). In some embodiments, the additional information includes (3710) a description of one or more functions of the user interface object. In some embodiments, the additional information includes a brief description of the user interface object and/or a description of the functions associated with the user interface object. For example, if the user interface object is a "create bookmark" icon in a browser, the additional information optionally reads: "This creates a new bookmark; bookmarks are a way to save your favorite sites."
在一些实施例中,附加信息包括(3712)具有与用户界面对象相关的可选择选项的菜单。例如,如果用户界面对象是文件图标,则附加信息包括具有可选择选项诸如“打开”、“编辑”、“打印”、“复制”、“删除”、“重命名”等的菜单。In some embodiments, the additional information includes (3712) a menu with selectable options related to the user interface object. For example, if the user interface object is a file icon, the additional information includes a menu with selectable options such as "Open," "Edit," "Print," "Copy," "Delete," "Rename," etc.
在一些实施例中,用户界面对象是(3714)后退按钮。例如,用户界面对象是web浏览器或文件浏览器的后退按钮,诸如图8H-图8N中所示的后退按钮3610。在一些实施例中(例如,其中用户界面对象是后退按钮),附加信息包括浏览历史,该浏览历史包括先前访问信息的表示的列表。例如,如图8J和图8N中所示,附加信息包括浏览历史,该浏览历史包括先前访问的网页的列表3611。在该实例中,当焦点选择器位于后退按钮上方时,响应于检测到接触强度高于相应强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)或检测到接触持续超过预定义的延迟时间,设备显示先前访问的网站或文件夹的列表。在一些实施例中,如参考图8J所描述,响应于检测到触摸屏112上的接触3609的强度高于相应强度阈值,设备在触摸屏112上显示先前访问的网站或文件夹的列表3611。在一些实施例中,如参考图8N所描述,当焦点选择器(与触摸屏112上的接触3613重合)位于后退按钮3610上方时,响应于检测到接触3613持续超过预定义的延迟时间(T延迟=T2-T0),设备显示先前访问的网站或文件夹的列表3611。In some embodiments, the user interface object is (3714) a back button. For example, the user interface object is a back button for a web browser or file browser, such as back button 3610 shown in Figures 8H-8N. In some embodiments (e.g., where the user interface object is a back button), the additional information includes a browsing history that includes a list of representations of previously visited information. For example, as shown in Figures 8J and 8N, the additional information includes a browsing history that includes a list 3611 of previously visited web pages. In this example, when the focus selector is over the back button, in response to detecting that the intensity of the contact is above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D ") or detecting that the contact persists for more than a predefined delay time, the device displays a list of previously visited websites or folders. In some embodiments, as described with reference to Figure 8J, in response to detecting that the intensity of contact 3609 on touch screen 112 is above a corresponding intensity threshold, the device displays a list 3611 of previously visited websites or folders on touch screen 112. In some embodiments, as described with reference to FIGURE 8N , when the focus selector (coinciding with contact 3613 on touch screen 112) is located above the back button 3610, in response to detecting that the contact 3613 persists for more than a predefined delay time ( Tdelay = T2-T0), the device displays a list 3611 of previously visited websites or folders.
在一些实施例中,相应位置对应于(3718)用户界面的用于在电子文档中进行导航的边缘。在一些实施例中,用户界面的用于在电子文档中进行导航的边缘是滚动条。例如,如图8A-图8E所示,相应位置对应于用于在电子文档中进行导航的滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4,其中滚动条3606-3位于显示器450上所示的用户界面的底部边缘处。在一些实施例中,用户界面的用于在电子文档中进行导航的边缘是电子文档的与显示该电子文档的应用程序窗口的边缘邻近的一部分。例如,在一些情况下,用户选择电子文档的一部分(例如,通过拖动在文字处理文档中的文本上方或在网页上的光标或接触)将达到显示器上的电子文档的边缘。在该实例中,如果设备将在滚动电子文档之前以其他方式等待延迟周期(例如,0.1、0.2、0.3、0.4或0.5秒)过去,则设备将替代地在已经流逝延迟周期之前响应于强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITD)而开始滚动该电子文档。In some embodiments, the corresponding position corresponds to (3718) an edge of a user interface for navigating an electronic document. In some embodiments, the edge of the user interface for navigating an electronic document is a scroll bar. For example, as shown in Figures 8A-8E, the corresponding position corresponds to a scroll arrow 3606-4 in a scroll bar 3606-3 for navigating an electronic document, where the scroll bar 3606-3 is located at the bottom edge of the user interface shown on the display 450. In some embodiments, the edge of the user interface for navigating an electronic document is a portion of the electronic document that is adjacent to an edge of an application window displaying the electronic document. For example, in some cases, a user selecting a portion of an electronic document (e.g., by dragging a cursor or touch over text in a word processing document or on a web page) will reach the edge of the electronic document on the display. In this example, if the device would otherwise wait for a delay period (e.g., 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 seconds) to elapse before scrolling the electronic document, the device will instead begin scrolling the electronic document in response to an increase in intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT D ) before the delay period has elapsed.
在一些实施例中(例如,在相应位置对应于用户界面的用于在电子文档中进行导航的边缘处的隐藏命中区域的情况下),附加信息包括电子文档的当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时在检测到接触之前未立即显示的一部分。例如,当在用户正在应用程序窗口中选择对象(例如,文件管理器应用程序中的文件图标)或内容(例如,文字处理文档中的文本)或正在应用程序窗口内移动用户界面对象(例如,文件管理器应用程序中的文件图标)的情况下焦点选择器位于应用程序窗口的边缘处或附近时,当焦点选择器暂停在用户界面的边缘处持续超过预定义的延迟时间时或如果当焦点选择器位于应用程序窗口的边缘处或附近时检测到高于相应强度阈值的按压输入,滚动该应用程序窗口。以该方式滚动应用程序窗口使得用户能够保持移动用户界面对象或替代地使得用户能够在不中断的情况下(例如,在不放下当前选择的用户界面对象的情况下或在不取消选择先前选择的内容的情况下)保持选择对象或内容。In some embodiments (e.g., where the corresponding position corresponds to a hidden hit zone at an edge of a user interface for navigating within an electronic document), the additional information includes a portion of the electronic document that was not displayed immediately before the contact was detected when the focus selector was at the corresponding position. For example, when the focus selector is at or near an edge of an application window while the user is selecting an object (e.g., a file icon in a file manager application) or content (e.g., text in a word processing document) in the application window or moving a user interface object (e.g., a file icon in a file manager application) within the application window, the application window is scrolled when the focus selector pauses at the edge of the user interface for more than a predefined delay time or if a press input above a corresponding intensity threshold is detected while the focus selector is at or near an edge of the application window. Scrolling the application window in this manner enables the user to keep moving the user interface object or, alternatively, enables the user to keep selecting an object or content without interruption (e.g., without dropping a currently selected user interface object or without deselecting previously selected content).
例如,当焦点选择器位于用户界面的用于在电子文档中进行导航的边缘处时,响应于检测到接触强度高于相应强度阈值或检测到接触持续超过预定义的延迟时间,该设备滚动电子文档。具体地,如参考图8C所解释的,当焦点选择器3607-a位于滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方时,响应于检测到接触3605的强度高于相应强度阈值ITD,其中滚动条3606-3位于显示器450上所示的用户界面的底部边缘处,该设备滚动电子文档以显示附加信息(例如,另外可选择的对象3606-6和3606-7)。类似地,如参考图8G所解释的,当焦点选择器3607-b位于滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4上方时,响应于检测到接触3608持续超过预定义的延迟时间(例如,超过预定义的延迟时间T延迟=T2-T0),该设备滚动电子文档。For example, when the focus selector is located at an edge of a user interface for navigating an electronic document, in response to detecting a contact intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold or detecting a contact duration exceeding a predefined delay time, the device scrolls the electronic document. Specifically, as explained with reference to FIG8C , when focus selector 3607-a is located over scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3, in response to detecting an intensity of contact 3605 greater than a corresponding intensity threshold IT D , where scroll bar 3606-3 is located at the bottom edge of the user interface shown on display 450, the device scrolls the electronic document to display additional information (e.g., additional selectable objects 3606-6 and 3606-7). Similarly, as explained with reference to FIG8G , when focus selector 3607-b is located over scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3, in response to detecting a contact 3608 duration exceeding a predefined delay time (e.g., exceeding a predefined delay time T delay = T2 - T0), the device scrolls the electronic document.
又如,当焦点选择器邻近于滚动条或在其中显示电子文档的应用程序窗口的边缘附近时,当焦点选择器暂停于该位置中持续超过预定义的延迟时间时或如果检测到高于相应强度阈值的按压输入,该设备滚动文档。在一些实施例中,当检测到按压输入时,根据确定用户界面对象当前被选择并且正根据焦点选择器的移动而移动来滚动电子文档。例如,如果用户正在文件管理器应用程序(例如,系统文件管理器,诸如得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的Finder,或媒体管理器,诸如得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的iPhoto或得自Apple Inc.(Cupertino,California)的iTunes)的窗口中拖动文件或程序的表示(例如,文件或程序图标),并且用户将文件或程序的表示拖动到文件管理器应用程序的窗口的边缘并当位于虚拟桌面的边缘处时暂停持续超过预定义的延迟时间或将接触的强度增大到超过相应强度阈值,则设备将滚动文件管理器程序的窗口。For another example, when the focus selector is adjacent to a scroll bar or near an edge of an application window in which an electronic document is displayed, the device scrolls the document when the focus selector is paused in that position for more than a predefined delay time or if a press input above a corresponding intensity threshold is detected. In some embodiments, when the press input is detected, the electronic document is scrolled based on determining that a user interface object is currently selected and is moving in accordance with movement of the focus selector. For example, if a user is dragging a representation of a file or program (e.g., a file or program icon) in a window of a file manager application (e.g., a system file manager such as the Finder from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California), or a media manager such as iPhoto from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California) or iTunes from Apple Inc. (Cupertino, California)), and the user drags the representation of the file or program to the edge of the file manager application's window and pauses for more than a predefined delay time while at the edge of the virtual desktop or increases the intensity of the contact to above a corresponding intensity threshold, the device scrolls the window of the file manager application.
在一些实施例中,相应位置对应于(3720)显示器的边缘。例如,相应位置位于显示器的边缘的预定义距离(例如,0.1、0.5或1.0mm,或5、10或其他适当数目的像素)内的区域或条带上。在一些实施例中(例如,在相应位置对应于显示器的边缘的情况下),附加信息包括当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时在检测到接触之前未立即显示的虚拟桌面(例如,当焦点选择器位于显示器的边缘处时,响应于检测到接触强度超过相应强度阈值或检测到接触持续超过预定义的延迟时间,在虚拟桌面之间进行切换)。例如,如果用户正在具有多个虚拟桌面的操作系统的工作空间或虚拟桌面上拖动窗口,并且用户将应用程序的窗口拖动到虚拟桌面的边缘并当位于虚拟桌面的边缘处时暂停或将接触的强度增大到超过相应强度阈值,则设备将任选地从当前/第一虚拟桌面切换到与当前虚拟桌面的相应边缘相关联的不同/第二虚拟桌面。在该实例中,显示器的边缘与虚拟桌面相关联,因为当焦点选择器邻近于显示器的边缘时按压输入使得不同的虚拟桌面被显示。在一些实施例中,当检测到按压输入时,根据确定用户界面对象当前被选择并且正根据焦点选择器的移动而移动来显示不同的虚拟桌面。换句话讲,根据确定用户已执行与将用户界面对象从当前虚拟桌面移动到不同虚拟桌面相关联的手势来显示不同虚拟桌面。In some embodiments, the corresponding position corresponds to (3720) an edge of the display. For example, the corresponding position is located on an area or strip within a predefined distance (e.g., 0.1, 0.5, or 1.0 mm, or 5, 10, or other suitable number of pixels) of the edge of the display. In some embodiments (e.g., where the corresponding position corresponds to an edge of the display), the additional information includes a virtual desktop that was not immediately displayed before the contact was detected when the focus selector was at the corresponding position (e.g., switching between virtual desktops in response to detecting that the contact intensity exceeds a corresponding intensity threshold or detecting that the contact continues for more than a predefined delay time when the focus selector is at the edge of the display). For example, if a user is dragging a window on a workspace or virtual desktop of an operating system with multiple virtual desktops, and the user drags the window of an application to the edge of the virtual desktop and pauses when at the edge of the virtual desktop or increases the intensity of the contact to exceed a corresponding intensity threshold, the device will optionally switch from the current/first virtual desktop to a different/second virtual desktop associated with the corresponding edge of the current virtual desktop. In this example, the edge of the display is associated with the virtual desktop because pressing the input when the focus selector is adjacent to the edge of the display causes a different virtual desktop to be displayed. In some embodiments, when a press input is detected, a different virtual desktop is displayed based on determining that a user interface object is currently selected and is being moved based on movement of a focus selector. In other words, a different virtual desktop is displayed based on determining that a user has performed a gesture associated with moving a user interface object from a current virtual desktop to a different virtual desktop.
在一些实施例中,相应位置对应于(3722)超链接(例如,网页中的超链接),并且附加信息包括与该超链接相关联的内容。例如,响应于在web浏览器中显示的网页中的超链接上检测到接触强度超过相应强度阈值或检测到接触持续超过预定义的延迟时间,该设备在web浏览器的新应用程序窗口或当前应用程序窗口中加载与超链接相关联的网页(例如,在检测到接触强度增大之后或在检测到接触强度增大后检测到接触的抬离之后立即加载)。In some embodiments, the corresponding location corresponds to (3722) a hyperlink (e.g., a hyperlink in a web page), and the additional information includes content associated with the hyperlink. For example, in response to detecting a contact intensity exceeding a corresponding intensity threshold or detecting a contact duration exceeding a predefined delay time on a hyperlink in a web page displayed in a web browser, the device loads the web page associated with the hyperlink in a new application window or a current application window of the web browser (e.g., immediately after detecting an increase in contact intensity or after detecting a lift-off of the contact after detecting an increase in contact intensity).
当焦点选择器位于(3724)相应位置处时:根据确定(3726)在焦点选择器位于相应位置处的情况下在已经流逝预定义的延迟时间之前接触具有高于相应强度阈值(例如,图8A-图8N中的“ITD”)的强度,设备显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息而无需等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间。例如,如参考图8C所解释,当焦点选择器(例如,光标3607-a)位于相应位置处(例如,位于滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4处)时,根据确定在焦点选择器3607-a位于相应位置处的情况下在预定义的延迟时间(例如,T延迟=T2-T0)过去之前接触3605具有高于相应强度阈值的强度,设备显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息(例如,另外可选择的对象3606-6和3606-7)而无需等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间(例如,等待直到时间T2)。When the focus selector is located (3724) at the corresponding location: based on determining (3726) that the contact had an intensity above the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D " in Figures 8A-8N) before a predefined delay time has elapsed while the focus selector is located at the corresponding location, the device displays additional information associated with the corresponding location without waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed. For example, as explained with reference to Figure 8C, when the focus selector (e.g., cursor 3607-a) is located at the corresponding location (e.g., at scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3), based on determining that the contact 3605 had an intensity above the corresponding intensity threshold before a predefined delay time (e.g., T delay = T2-T0) has elapsed while the focus selector 3607-a is located at the corresponding location, the device displays additional information associated with the corresponding location (e.g., additional selectable objects 3606-6 and 3606-7) without waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed (e.g., waiting until time T2).
当焦点选择器位于(3724)相应位置处时:根据确定(3730)接触具有低于相应强度阈值的强度,当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时,设备等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间以显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息。例如,如参考图8F-图8G所解释的,当焦点选择器(例如,光标3607-b)位于相应位置(例如,滚动条3606-3中的滚动箭头3606-4)处时,根据确定接触3608具有低于相应强度阈值的强度,当焦点选择器(例如,光标3607-b)位于相应位置处时设备等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间(例如,T延迟=T2-T0)以显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息(例如,另外可选择的对象3606-6和3606-7)。例如,设备等待直到时间T2以显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息。When the focus selector is at (3724) the corresponding position: based on determining (3730) that the contact has an intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold, when the focus selector is at the corresponding position, the device waits until a predefined delay time has elapsed to display additional information associated with the corresponding position. For example, as explained with reference to Figures 8F-8G, when the focus selector (e.g., cursor 3607-b) is at the corresponding position (e.g., scroll arrow 3606-4 in scroll bar 3606-3), based on determining that contact 3608 has an intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold, when the focus selector (e.g., cursor 3607-b) is at the corresponding position, the device waits until a predefined delay time has elapsed (e.g., Tdelay = T2-T0) to display additional information associated with the corresponding position (e.g., additionally selectable objects 3606-6 and 3606-7). For example, the device waits until time T2 to display the additional information associated with the corresponding position.
在一些实施例中,当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时,设备检测(3734)触敏表面上的轻击手势。例如,设备检测触敏表面上的接触,该接触具有小于预定义最大轻击手势持续时间的持续时间和/或介于最小接触检测强度(例如,IT0)与相应强度阈值ITD(例如,不是“深按压”输入的简短规则按压手势)之间的最大强度。在一些实施例中,响应于检测到轻击手势,设备执行(3736)与用户界面对象相关联的操作(例如,在不显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息的情况下)。换句话讲,在一些实施例中,对应于用户界面对象的规则按压输入(例如,非深按压交互)执行与深按压输入不同的立即显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息的操作,(例如,非深按压交互导致通过在浏览器中加载最近先前访问的网页来在浏览器中导航“后退”而非显示先前访问的网站的列表)。In some embodiments, when the focus selector is at the corresponding location, the device detects (3734) a tap gesture on the touch-sensitive surface. For example, the device detects a contact on the touch-sensitive surface that has a duration less than a predefined maximum tap gesture duration and/or a maximum intensity between a minimum contact detection intensity (e.g., IT 0 ) and a corresponding intensity threshold IT D (e.g., a brief regular press gesture that is not a “deep press” input). In some embodiments, in response to detecting the tap gesture, the device performs (3736) an operation associated with the user interface object (e.g., without displaying additional information associated with the corresponding location). In other words, in some embodiments, a regular press input (e.g., a non-deep press interaction) corresponding to the user interface object performs an operation that is different from a deep press input, which immediately displays additional information associated with the corresponding location (e.g., a non-deep press interaction causes navigating “back” in the browser by loading the most recently visited web page in the browser rather than displaying a list of previously visited websites).
应当理解,对图9A-图9B中已经进行描述的操作的特定顺序仅仅是示例性的,并非旨在指示所述顺序是所述操作可被执行的唯一顺序。本领域的普通技术人员会想到各种方式来对本文所述的操作进行重新排序。另外,应当指出的是,本文中相对于本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所述的其他过程的细节也以类似的方式适用于上文相对于图9A-图9B所述的方法3700。例如,上文参考方法3700描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值和焦点选择器任选地具有本文中参考本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值和焦点选择器的一个或多个特性。为简明起见,这里不重复这些细节。It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations described in Figures 9A-9B are described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the order is the only order in which the operations can be performed. A person of ordinary skill in the art would appreciate various ways to reorder the operations described herein. In addition, it should be noted that the details of the other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) also apply in a similar manner to method 3700 described above with respect to Figures 9A-9B. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described above with reference to method 3700 optionally have one or more characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]). For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.
根据一些实施例,图10示出了根据各种所述实施例原理进行配置的电子设备3800的功能框图。该设备的功能块任选地由执行各种所述实施例的原理的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合来实现。本领域的技术人员应当理解,图10中所述的功能块任选地被组合或被分离为子块以实现各种所述实施例的原理。因此,本文的描述任选地支持本文所述功能块的任何可能的组合或分离或进一步限定。According to some embodiments, Figure 10 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 3800 configured according to various described embodiment principles. The functional block of this equipment is optionally realized by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software that performs the principles of various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional block described in Figure 10 is optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to realize the principles of various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further qualification of functional block described herein.
如图10所示,电子设备3800包括显示单元3802,该显示单元配置为显示与相应位置相关联的附加信息;触敏表面单元3804,该触敏表面单元被配置为接收触敏表面单元上的接触;一个或多个传感器单元3805,该一个或多个传感器单元被配置为检测与触敏表面单元3804的接触强度;和处理单元3806,该处理单元耦接到显示单元3802、触敏表面单元3804和传感器单元3805。在一些实施例中,处理单元3806包括检测单元3808、等待单元3810和显示使能单元3814。10 , electronic device 3800 includes a display unit 3802 configured to display additional information associated with a corresponding location, a touch-sensitive surface unit 3804 configured to receive a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit, one or more sensor units 3805 configured to detect an intensity of contact with touch-sensitive surface unit 3804, and a processing unit 3806 coupled to display unit 3802, touch-sensitive surface unit 3804, and sensor unit 3805. In some embodiments, processing unit 3806 includes a detection unit 3808, a waiting unit 3810, and a display enabling unit 3814.
处理单元3806被配置为:当对应于接触的焦点选择器位于显示单元3802上的与最初未在显示单元3802上显示的附加信息相关联的相应位置处时检测触敏表面单元3804上的接触(例如,利用检测单元3808);以及当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时:根据确定在焦点选择器位于相应位置处的情况下在已经流逝预定义的延迟时间之前接触具有高于相应强度阈值的强度,使能与相应位置相关联的附加信息的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元3814)而无需等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间;以及根据确定接触具有低于相应强度阈值的强度,当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时等待直到已经流逝预定义的延迟时间(例如,利用等待单元3810)以使能与相应位置相关联的附加信息的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元3814)。The processing unit 3806 is configured to: detect a contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 3804 (for example, using the detection unit 3808) when the focus selector corresponding to the contact is at a corresponding position on the display unit 3802 associated with additional information that was not initially displayed on the display unit 3802; and when the focus selector is at the corresponding position: based on determining that the contact has an intensity higher than a corresponding intensity threshold before a predefined delay time has elapsed when the focus selector is at the corresponding position, enable the display of additional information associated with the corresponding position (for example, using the display enabling unit 3814) without waiting until the predefined delay time has elapsed; and based on determining that the contact has an intensity lower than the corresponding intensity threshold, wait until the predefined delay time has elapsed when the focus selector is at the corresponding position (for example, using the waiting unit 3810) to enable the display of additional information associated with the corresponding position (for example, using the display enabling unit 3814).
在一些实施例中,处理单元3806被进一步配置为使能用户界面对象在显示单元3802上的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元3814),其中该用户界面对象与最初未在显示单元3802上显示的附加信息相关联;并且该相应位置对应于用户界面对象在显示单元3802上的位置。In some embodiments, processing unit 3806 is further configured to enable display of a user interface object on display unit 3802 (e.g., utilizing display enabling unit 3814), wherein the user interface object is associated with additional information that is not initially displayed on display unit 3802; and the corresponding position corresponds to the position of the user interface object on display unit 3802.
在一些实施例中,附加信息为选自由以下各项组成的组的信息:针对用户界面对象的帮助、对用户界面对象的一种或多种功能的描述,以及具有与用户界面对象相关的可选择选项的菜单。In some embodiments, the additional information is information selected from the group consisting of: help for the user interface object, a description of one or more functions of the user interface object, and a menu with selectable options related to the user interface object.
在一些实施例中,处理单元3806被进一步配置为当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时检测触敏表面单元上的轻击手势(例如,利用检测单元3808);并且响应于检测到轻击手势,执行与用户界面对象相关联的操作。In some embodiments, processing unit 3806 is further configured to detect a tap gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit (e.g., using detection unit 3808) when the focus selector is at the corresponding position; and in response to detecting the tap gesture, perform an operation associated with the user interface object.
在一些实施例中,用户界面对象是后退按钮;并且附加信息包括浏览历史,该浏览历史包括先前访问信息的表示的列表。In some embodiments, the user interface object is a back button; and the additional information includes a browsing history including a list of representations of previously accessed information.
在一些实施例中,相应位置对应于用户界面的用于在电子文档中进行导航的边缘;并且附加信息包括电子文档的当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时在检测到接触之前未立即显示的一部分。In some embodiments, the corresponding location corresponds to an edge of a user interface for navigating in the electronic document; and the additional information includes a portion of the electronic document that was not displayed immediately before the contact was detected when the focus selector was at the corresponding location.
在一些实施例中,相应位置对应于显示单元3802的边缘;并且附加信息包括当焦点选择器位于相应位置处时在检测到接触之前未立即显示的虚拟桌面。In some embodiments, the corresponding location corresponds to an edge of the display unit 3802; and the additional information includes a virtual desktop that was not displayed immediately before the contact was detected when the focus selector was at the corresponding location.
在一些实施例中,相应位置对应于超链接;并且附加信息包括与超链接相关联的内容。In some embodiments, the corresponding location corresponds to a hyperlink; and the additional information includes content associated with the hyperlink.
上述信息处理方法中的操作任选地通过运行信息处理装置中的一个或多个功能模块来实现,该信息处理装置诸如为通用处理器(例如,如以上相对于图1A和图3所描述的)或特定于应用的芯片。The operations in the above information processing method are optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in an information processing device, such as a general-purpose processor (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or an application-specific chip.
以上参考图9A-图9B所述的操作任选地由图1A-图1B或图10中所描绘的部件来实现。例如,检测操作3702、显示操作3704和3726以及等待操作3730任选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180和事件处理程序190来实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171检测触敏显示器112上的接触,并且事件分配器模块174将事件信息递送到应用程序136-1。应用程序136-1的相应的事件识别器180将事件信息与相应的事件定义186进行比较,并且确定触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或子事件,诸如对用户界面上的对象的选择。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或子事件时,事件识别器180激活与对该事件或子事件的检测相关联的事件处理程序190。事件处理程序190任选地利用或调用数据更新器176或对象更新器177来更新应用程序内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理程序190访问相应GUI更新器178以更新应用程序所显示的内容。类似地,本领域技术人员会清楚地知道基于在图1A-1B中所示的部件可如何实现其他过程。The operations described above with reference to Figures 9A-9B are optionally implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 10. For example, detection operation 3702, display operations 3704 and 3726, and wait operation 3730 are optionally implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects a contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as the selection of an object on a user interface. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, those skilled in the art will clearly understand how other processes can be implemented based on the components shown in Figures 1A-1B.
从预定义区域移除图标Remove an icon from a predefined area
许多电子设备具有包括应用程序任务栏或启动栏的图形用户界面。应用程序任务栏或启动栏包括应用程序图标,用户可激活该应用程序图标来启动应用程序。用户可将对应于他们偏爱或经常使用的应用程序的应用程序图标添加到应用程序任务栏中以实现快速访问,并且从应用程序任务栏移除应用程序图标。用户还可在应用程序任务栏内重新布置应用程序图标。一些方法需要多个输入以用于从应用程序任务栏移除应用程序图标,或有时导致从应用程序任务栏意外移除图标。下文描述的实施例通过允许用户在触敏表面上做出手势来改进这些方法,并且基于手势中的接触强度移动应用程序图标以用于重新布置或基于强度从应用程序任务栏移除应用程序图标。当用户利用重接触执行手势时,用户可从应用程序任务栏移除应用程序图标。当用户利用轻接触执行手势时,应用程序图标保留在应用程序任务栏中。用户因此具有用于从应用程序任务栏移除应用程序图标的更便利的方式,并且降低了从应用程序任务栏意外移除图标的可能性。Many electronic devices have a graphical user interface that includes an application taskbar or launcher bar. The application taskbar or launcher bar includes application icons that users can activate to launch applications. Users can add application icons corresponding to their favorite or frequently used applications to the application taskbar for quick access and remove application icons from the application taskbar. Users can also rearrange application icons within the application taskbar. Some methods require multiple inputs to remove application icons from the application taskbar, or sometimes result in icons being accidentally removed from the application taskbar. The embodiments described below improve on these methods by allowing users to perform gestures on a touch-sensitive surface and move application icons based on the contact intensity in the gesture for rearrangement or removal from the application taskbar based on intensity. When the user performs the gesture with a heavy touch, the user can remove the application icon from the application taskbar. When the user performs the gesture with a light touch, the application icon remains in the application taskbar. This provides users with a more convenient way to remove application icons from the application taskbar and reduces the likelihood of accidentally removing icons from the application taskbar.
图11A-图11U根据一些实施例示出了用于从预定义区域移除图标的示例性用户界面。这些附图中的用户界面被用于示出下文描述的过程,该过程包括图12A-图12B中的过程。图11A-图11U包括强度图,该强度图示出触敏表面上的接触相对于包括轻按压强度阈值(例如,“ITL”)和深按压强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的多个强度阈值的当前强度。在一些实施例中,与下文参考ITD描述的那些操作类似的操作是参考不同的强度阈值(例如,“ITL”)来执行的。Figures 11A-11U illustrate exemplary user interfaces for removing an icon from a predefined area, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the process described below, including the process in Figures 12A-12B. Figures 11A-11U include an intensity graph that illustrates the current intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to multiple intensity thresholds, including a light press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT L ") and a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D "). In some embodiments, operations similar to those described below with reference to IT D are performed with reference to a different intensity threshold (e.g., "IT L ").
图11A示出了在设备(例如,设备300)的显示器450上显示的用户界面3904。在用户界面3904中显示的是应用程序任务栏或托盘区域3916。在应用程序任务栏区域3916中任选地显示一个或多个图标。例如,在图11A中,在应用程序任务栏3912中显示应用程序图标3906、3908、3910、3912和3914。每个应用程序图标3906、3908、3910、3912和3914与相应应用程序相关联。例如,图标3908与媒体播放器或音频应用程序相关联。在一些实施例中,应用程序任务栏或托盘区域3916是显示器450上显示的预定义区域,其中任选地放置一个或多个应用程序图标(诸如图标3906、3908、3910、3912和3914)以用于快速访问。FIG11A shows a user interface 3904 displayed on a display 450 of a device (e.g., device 300). Displayed in the user interface 3904 is an application taskbar or tray area 3916. Optionally, one or more icons are displayed in the application taskbar area 3916. For example, in FIG11A , application icons 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, and 3914 are displayed in the application taskbar 3912. Each application icon 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, and 3914 is associated with a corresponding application. For example, icon 3908 is associated with a media player or audio application. In some embodiments, the application taskbar or tray area 3916 is a predefined area displayed on the display 450, in which one or more application icons (such as icons 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, and 3914) are optionally placed for quick access.
在显示器450上还显示光标3922。光标3922是焦点选择器的实例。用户任选地在显示器450上移动光标3922(例如,使用设备的触敏表面451)以指向用户界面对象(例如,图标3906、3908、3910、3912或3914)并且利用额外输入来选择并操纵对象。Also displayed on display 450 is a cursor 3922. Cursor 3922 is an example of a focus selector. The user optionally moves cursor 3922 on display 450 (e.g., using touch-sensitive surface 451 of the device) to point to a user interface object (e.g., icons 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, or 3914) and utilize additional input to select and manipulate the object.
图11B-图11C示出当光标3922位于图标3908上方时在设备的触敏表面451上检测到的手势。该手势是利用接触3920来执行。该手势包括接触3920在触敏表面451上的移动3924,如图11C所示。移动3924对应于光标3922在应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动;光标3922根据移动3924移动在应用程序任务栏区域3916之外。Figures 11B-11C illustrate a gesture detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 of the device when cursor 3922 is over icon 3908. The gesture is performed using contact 3920. The gesture includes movement 3924 of contact 3920 across touch-sensitive surface 451, as shown in Figure 11C. Movement 3924 corresponds to movement of cursor 3922 outside of application taskbar area 3916; cursor 3922 moves outside of application taskbar area 3916 in accordance with movement 3924.
接触3920的强度由设备中的一个或多个传感器检测。在手势的整个持续时间内检测强度。响应于检测到包括接触3920的手势,并且根据由设备确定接触3920在手势期间具有低于深按压强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的最大强度,在手势期间显示手势正在被执行的指示,并且图标3908(当检测到手势时光标3922位于其上方的图标)在手势结束之后保留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中。该指示任选地是例如根据光标3922的移动的对图标3908的移动的显示,如图11C所示。在检测到手势的结束(例如,检测到接触3920的抬离或检测到接触3920的强度从高于ITL的强度减小到低于ITL的强度)之后,图标3908保留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中,如图11D所示。The intensity of contact 3920 is detected by one or more sensors in the device. The intensity is detected throughout the duration of the gesture. In response to detecting a gesture including contact 3920, and based on a determination by the device that contact 3920 had a maximum intensity below a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D ") during the gesture, an indication that the gesture is being performed is displayed during the gesture, and icon 3908 (the icon over which cursor 3922 was positioned when the gesture was detected) remains in application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends. The indication is optionally, for example, a display of movement of icon 3908 based on movement of cursor 3922, as shown in FIG11C . After detecting the end of the gesture (e.g., detecting liftoff of contact 3920 or detecting a decrease in the intensity of contact 3920 from an intensity above IT L to an intensity below IT L ), icon 3908 remains in application taskbar area 3916, as shown in FIG11D .
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括改变图标3908的外观以例如显示图标3908的幻像3926,如图11E-图11F所示。在显示幻像3926时,图标3908的表示被显示为根据接触3920的移动3924而移动。根据移动3924而移动的图标3908的表示任选地为幻像3926(如图11F所示)或图标3908的复制图标3928(如图11G所示)。在手势结束之后,图标3908再次在应用程序任务栏区域3916中显示,如图11D所示。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes changing the appearance of icon 3908 to, for example, display a ghost image 3926 of icon 3908, as shown in Figures 11E-11F. While ghost image 3926 is displayed, a representation of icon 3908 is displayed as moving in accordance with movement 3924 of contact 3920. The representation of icon 3908 that moves in accordance with movement 3924 is optionally ghost image 3926 (as shown in Figure 11F) or a duplicate icon 3928 of icon 3908 (as shown in Figure 11G). After the gesture ends, icon 3908 is again displayed in application taskbar area 3916, as shown in Figure 11D.
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括显示光标3922的移动,同时将图标3908留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中的适当位置。例如,图11H示出了光标3922根据接触3920的移动3924移动到应用程序任务栏区域3916之外,而图标3908保持固定在其在应用程序任务栏区域3916中的位置处。In some embodiments, showing an indication that the gesture is being performed includes showing movement of cursor 3922 while leaving icon 3908 in place in application taskbar area 3916. For example, Figure 11H shows cursor 3922 moving outside of application taskbar area 3916 in accordance with movement 3924 of contact 3920, while icon 3908 remains fixed in its position in application taskbar area 3916.
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括显示图标3908在手势期间的移动,但将图标3908的移动约束于应用程序任务栏区域3916,如图11I所示。换句话讲,图标3908不完全移动到应用程序任务栏区域3916之外(或任选地,根本不移出应用程序任务栏区域3916)。在手势结束之后,图标3908再次在应用程序任务栏区域3916中在其原始位置处显示,如图11D所示。在一些实施例中,图标3908在应用程序任务栏区域3916内移动到左侧或右侧。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes displaying movement of icon 3908 during the gesture, but constraining the movement of icon 3908 to application taskbar area 3916, as shown in FIG11I . In other words, icon 3908 does not move completely outside of application taskbar area 3916 (or, optionally, does not move outside of application taskbar area 3916 at all). After the gesture ends, icon 3908 is again displayed in its original position in application taskbar area 3916, as shown in FIG11D . In some embodiments, icon 3908 moves to the left or right within application taskbar area 3916.
图11J示出了在设备的显示器450上显示的用户界面3904、图标3906、3908、3910、3912和3914、应用程序任务栏区域3916和光标3922,如图11A所示。在触敏表面451上检测到利用接触3930所执行的手势和接触3930的移动3934。在图11J中,设备检测接触3930在手势期间达到高于深按压强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的强度。Figure 11J shows user interface 3904, icons 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, and 3914, application taskbar area 3916, and cursor 3922 displayed on display 450 of the device, as shown in Figure 11A. A gesture performed with contact 3930 and movement 3934 of contact 3930 are detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. In Figure 11J, the device detects that contact 3930 reaches an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D ") during the gesture.
响应于检测到包括接触3930的手势,并且根据由设备确定接触3930在手势期间达到高于深按压强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的强度,图标3908(当检测到手势时光标3922位于其上方的图标)根据接触3930的移动3934而移动,如图11K所示,并且在设备检测到手势的结束(例如,检测到接触3930的抬离或检测到接触3930的强度减小到低于ITL)之后从应用程序任务栏区域3916移除图标3908,如图11M所示。从应用程序任务栏区域3916移除的图标3908任选地在应用程序任务栏区域3916外面显示或被删除。在一些实施例中,当移动图标3908时,在实际移除之前显示将从应用程序任务栏区域3916移除图标3908的指示。该指示任选地为图标3936在应用程序任务栏区域3916中取代图标3908,如图11L所示。In response to detecting a gesture including contact 3930, and in accordance with a determination by the device that contact 3930 reached an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”) during the gesture, icon 3908 (the icon over which cursor 3922 was positioned when the gesture was detected) moves in accordance with movement 3934 of contact 3930, as shown in FIG11K , and icon 3908 is removed from application taskbar area 3916 after the device detects the end of the gesture (e.g., detecting liftoff of contact 3930 or detecting a decrease in the intensity of contact 3930 below IT L ), as shown in FIG11M . Icon 3908 removed from application taskbar area 3916 is optionally displayed outside of application taskbar area 3916 or deleted. In some embodiments, when icon 3908 is moved, an indication that icon 3908 will be removed from application taskbar area 3916 is displayed before the actual removal. This indication is optionally that icon 3936 replaces icon 3908 in application taskbar area 3916, as shown in FIG11L .
图11N示出了当光标3922位于图标3908上方时在触敏表面451上检测到的利用接触3938所执行的手势。利用接触3938所执行的手势任选地是轻击手势或按压输入(或静止按压输入),其包括接触的强度增大到高于轻按压强度阈值(例如,“ITL”)以及后续减小。响应于检测到图11N中的利用接触3938所执行的手势,启动对应于图标3908(图11N)的应用程序,如图11O所示。Figure 11N shows a gesture performed with contact 3938 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451 when cursor 3922 is over icon 3908. The gesture performed with contact 3938 is, optionally, a tap gesture or a press input (or stationary press input) that includes an increase in the intensity of the contact above a light press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT L ") and a subsequent decrease. In response to detecting the gesture performed with contact 3938 in Figure 11N, the application corresponding to icon 3908 (Figure 11N) is launched, as shown in Figure 11O.
图11P-图11U示出了在设备(例如,设备100)的触摸屏112上实现的上文参考图11A-图11O所描述的用户界面的实例。图11P示出了在设备的触敏显示器112上显示的用户界面3944。在用户界面3944中显示的是应用程序任务栏或托盘区域3916。在应用程序任务栏区域3916中任选地显示一个或多个图标。例如,在图11P中,在应用程序任务栏3916中显示应用程序图标3906、3908、3910、3912和3914。11P-11U illustrate examples of the user interfaces described above with reference to FIG. 11A-11O implemented on touch screen 112 of a device (e.g., device 100). FIG. 11P illustrates a user interface 3944 displayed on touch-sensitive display 112 of the device. Displayed in user interface 3944 is an application taskbar or tray area 3916. Optionally, one or more icons are displayed in application taskbar area 3916. For example, in FIG. 11P , application icons 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, and 3914 are displayed in application taskbar 3916.
图11P-图11Q示出了在设备的触敏显示器112上检测到的手势。该手势利用在图标3908上检测到的接触3946来执行。该手势包括接触3946在触敏显示器112上的移动3948,如图11Q所示。移动3948包括应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动。11P-11Q illustrate a gesture detected on the device's touch-sensitive display 112. The gesture is performed using contact 3946 detected on icon 3908. The gesture includes movement 3948 of contact 3946 across touch-sensitive display 112, as shown in FIG11Q. Movement 3948 includes movement outside of application taskbar area 3916.
接触3946的强度由设备中的一个或多个传感器检测。在手势的整个持续时间内检测强度。响应于检测到包括接触3946的手势,并且根据由设备确定接触3946在手势期间具有低于深按压强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的最大强度,在手势期间显示手势正在被执行的指示,并且图标3908(当检测到手势时在其上面检测到接触3946的图标)在手势结束之后保留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中。该指示任选地是例如图标3908的根据移动3948的移动的显示,如图11Q所示。在手势结束(例如,检测到接触3946的抬离或检测到接触3946的强度从高于ITL的强度下降到低于ITL的强度)之后,图标3908保留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中,如图11R所示。The intensity of contact 3946 is detected by one or more sensors in the device. The intensity is detected throughout the duration of the gesture. In response to detecting a gesture including contact 3946, and based on a determination by the device that contact 3946 had a maximum intensity below a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D ") during the gesture, an indication that a gesture is being performed is displayed during the gesture, and icon 3908 (the icon on which contact 3946 was detected when the gesture was detected) remains in application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends. The indication is optionally, for example, display of icon 3908 in accordance with movement 3948, as shown in FIG11Q . After the gesture ends (e.g., lift-off of contact 3946 is detected or the intensity of contact 3946 is detected to decrease from an intensity above IT L to an intensity below IT L ), icon 3908 remains in application taskbar area 3916, as shown in FIG11R .
图11S-图11T示出了在设备的触敏显示器112上检测到的手势。该手势利用在图标3908上检测到的接触3950来执行。该手势包括接触3950在触敏显示器112上的移动3952,如图11T所示。移动3952包括应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动。11S-11T illustrate a gesture detected on the device's touch-sensitive display 112. The gesture is performed using contact 3950 detected on icon 3908. The gesture includes movement 3952 of contact 3950 across touch-sensitive display 112, as shown in FIG11T. Movement 3952 includes movement outside of application taskbar area 3916.
接触3950的强度由设备中的一个或多个传感器检测。在手势的整个持续时间内检测强度。响应于检测到包括接触3950的手势,并且根据由设备确定接触3950在手势期间达到高于深按压强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)的强度,图标3908(当检测到手势时接触3950位于其上面的图标)根据接触3950的移动3952而移动,如图11T所示,并且在手势结束之后从应用程序任务栏区域3916移除图标3908,如图11U所示。The intensity of contact 3950 is detected by one or more sensors in the device. The intensity is detected throughout the duration of the gesture. In response to detecting the gesture including contact 3950, and based on a determination by the device that contact 3950 reaches an intensity above a deep press intensity threshold (e.g., “IT D ”) during the gesture, icon 3908 (the icon over which contact 3950 was positioned when the gesture was detected) moves in accordance with movement 3952 of contact 3950, as shown in FIG11T , and icon 3908 is removed from application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends, as shown in FIG11U .
图12A-图12B是根据一些实施例示出从预定义区域移除图标的方法4000的流程图。方法4000在具有显示器和触敏表面的电子设备(例如,设备300,图3,或便携式多功能设备100,图1A)处执行。在一些实施例中,显示器是触摸屏显示器并且触敏表面在显示器上。在一些实施例中,显示器与触敏表面分开。方法4000中的一些操作任选地被组合,和/或一些操作的顺序任选地被改变。Figures 12A-12B are flow diagrams illustrating method 4000 for removing an icon from a predefined area, according to some embodiments. Method 4000 is performed on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 4000 may optionally be combined, and/or the order of some operations may optionally be changed.
如下文所述,方法4000提供从预定义区域移除图标的直观方式。该方法减小了当从预定义区域移除图标时用户的认知负担,从而创建更有效的人机界面。针对电池驱动的电子设备,使得用户能够更快且更有效地从预定义区域移除图标节省了功率并且增加了电池充电之间的时间。As described below, method 4000 provides an intuitive way to remove icons from a predefined area. This method reduces the cognitive burden on the user when removing icons from a predefined area, thereby creating a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered electronic devices, enabling users to remove icons from a predefined area more quickly and efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.
设备在显示器上的预定义区域(例如,应用程序任务栏或快速启动托盘)中显示多个图标,其中所述多个图标包括(4002)相应图标。例如,在图11A或图11P中,在应用程序任务栏区域3916中显示图标3906、3908、3910、3912和3914。The device displays a plurality of icons in a predefined area (e.g., an application taskbar or a quick launch tray) on the display, wherein the plurality of icons includes (4002) corresponding icons. For example, in FIG. 11A or FIG. 11P , icons 3906, 3908, 3910, 3912, and 3914 are displayed in the application taskbar area 3916.
设备检测包括(4004)当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时在触敏表面上的接触(例如,手指接触)的手势以及该接触在触敏表面上的后续移动,该后续移动对应于焦点选择器在预定义区域之外的移动。例如,图11B-图11C示出了在触敏表面451上检测到的包括接触3920的手势和接触3920的移动3924。当光标3922位于图标3908上方时检测到手势。移动3924对应于光标3922在应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动。又如,图11J-图11K示出在触敏表面451上检测到的包括接触3930的手势和接触3930的移动3934。当光标3922位于图标3908上方时检测到手势。移动3934对应于光标3922在应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动。The device detects a gesture comprising (4004) a contact (e.g., a finger contact) on the touch-sensitive surface while the focus selector is over a corresponding icon and subsequent movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the subsequent movement corresponding to movement of the focus selector outside of a predefined area. For example, Figures 11B-11C illustrate a gesture comprising contact 3920 and movement 3924 of contact 3920 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. The gesture is detected when cursor 3922 is over icon 3908. Movement 3924 corresponds to movement of cursor 3922 outside of application taskbar area 3916. As another example, Figures 11J-11K illustrate a gesture comprising contact 3930 and movement 3934 of contact 3930 detected on touch-sensitive surface 451. The gesture is detected when cursor 3922 is over icon 3908. Movement 3934 corresponds to movement of cursor 3922 outside of application taskbar area 3916.
作为另外的实例,图11P-图11Q示出了在触敏显示器112上检测到的包括接触3946的手势和接触3946的移动3948。在图标3908上方检测到接触3946,并且移动3948包括接触3946在应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动。图11S-图11T示出了在触敏显示器112上检测到的包括接触3950的手势和接触3950的移动3952。在图标3908上方检测到接触3950,并且移动3952包括接触3950在应用程序任务栏区域3916之外的移动。在这些实例中,接触(接触3946或3950)的位置类似于焦点选择器的位置。As another example, Figures 11P-11Q show a gesture including contact 3946 and movement 3948 of contact 3946 detected on touch-sensitive display 112. Contact 3946 is detected over icon 3908, and movement 3948 includes movement of contact 3946 outside of application taskbar area 3916. Figures 11S-11T show a gesture including contact 3950 and movement 3952 of contact 3950 detected on touch-sensitive display 112. Contact 3950 is detected over icon 3908, and movement 3952 includes movement of contact 3950 outside of application taskbar area 3916. In these examples, the location of the contact (contact 3946 or 3950) is similar to the location of the focus selector.
响应于(4006)检测到手势,并且根据确定(4008)接触在手势期间具有低于相应强度阈值的最大强度,设备在手势期间显示(4010)手势正在被执行的指示(例如,显示相应图标的移动或相应图标的幻像),并且在手势结束之后将相应图标保留(4018)在预定义区域中(例如,响应于检测到接触的抬离,相应图标弹回或以其他方式返回到其原始位置,或停止在预定义区域的边界处的移动)。响应于检测到利用接触3920所执行的手势并且根据确定接触3920在手势期间具有低于限定强度阈值的最大强度,设备根据接触3920的移动3924显示例如图标3908的移动(图11C)或幻像3926(图11F)或复制图标3928(图11G),并且在手势结束之后将图标3908保留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中,如图11D所示。又如,响应于检测到利用接触3946(图11P)所执行的手势,图标3908根据接触3946的移动3948而移动,然后在手势结束之后保留在应用程序任务栏区域3916中,如图11R所示。In response to detecting (4006) a gesture and in accordance with determining (4008) that the contact had a maximum intensity below a corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, the device displays (4010) an indication that the gesture is being performed (e.g., displaying movement of the corresponding icon or a ghost of the corresponding icon) during the gesture and retains (4018) the corresponding icon in the predefined area after the gesture ends (e.g., in response to detecting lift-off of the contact, the corresponding icon bounces or otherwise returns to its original position or stops moving at a boundary of the predefined area). In response to detecting a gesture performed with contact 3920 and in accordance with determining that contact 3920 had a maximum intensity below a defined intensity threshold during the gesture, the device displays, for example, movement of icon 3908 (Figure 11C) or ghost 3926 (Figure 11F) or a copy icon 3928 (Figure 11G) in accordance with movement 3924 of contact 3920 and retains icon 3908 in application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends, as shown in Figure 11D. As another example, in response to detecting a gesture performed using contact 3946 (Figure 11P), icon 3908 moves according to movement 3948 of contact 3946 and then remains in application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends, as shown in Figure 11R.
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括(4012)改变预定义区域中的相应图标的外观(例如,用图标的幻像替换相应图标),并且当在显示器上显示具有已改变外观的相应图标时,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标的表示。例如,响应于检测到利用接触3920所执行的手势,图标3908任选地改变为幻像3926,并且在显示幻像3926时,图标3908的表示(例如,复制图标3928或幻像3926)根据移动3924而移动,如图11E-图11G所示。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes (4012) changing the appearance of a corresponding icon in a predefined area (e.g., replacing the corresponding icon with a ghost of the icon), and while the corresponding icon having the changed appearance is displayed on the display, moving a representation of the corresponding icon in accordance with movement of the contact during the gesture. For example, in response to detecting a gesture performed using contact 3920, icon 3908 optionally changes to ghost 3926, and while ghost 3926 is displayed, a representation of icon 3908 (e.g., copy icon 3928 or ghost 3926) moves in accordance with movement 3924, as shown in Figures 11E-11G.
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括(4014)当将相应图标保持在预定义区域中的固定位置中时,根据接触的移动来移动显示器上的光标(例如,除非用户足够用力地按压,否则任务栏中的图标为静止的或“卡”在适当位置)。例如,响应于检测到利用接触3920所执行的手势,当图标3908保持在适当位置时,光标3922任选地根据移动3924而移动,如图11H所示。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes (4014) moving a cursor on the display in accordance with movement of the contact while the corresponding icon is held in a fixed position in a predefined area (e.g., icons in a taskbar are stationary or "stuck" in place unless the user presses hard enough). For example, in response to detecting a gesture performed with contact 3920, while icon 3908 is held in place, cursor 3922 optionally moves in accordance with movement 3924, as shown in FIG11H .
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括(4016)当将相应图标的移动约束于预定义区域时,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标(例如,图标在手势期间仍可重新定位在任务栏内,但无法移动到任务栏之外,除非用户较用力按压)。在一些实施例中,如果图标被约束于预定义区域,则图标沿着预定义区域的最靠近接触的边缘移动。例如,如果预定义区域是在显示器的底部边缘附近的水平条带,并且焦点选择器位于预定义区域上方,则图标的移动将跟踪接触的水平移动,但不会跟踪接触的竖直移动,除非焦点选择器移动到预定义区域中。例如,图标3908根据接触3920的移动3924的移动任选地被约束于应用程序任务栏区域3916内,如图11I所示。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes (4016) moving the corresponding icon in accordance with movement of the contact during the gesture when movement of the corresponding icon is constrained to a predefined area (e.g., the icon can still be repositioned within the taskbar during the gesture, but cannot be moved outside the taskbar unless the user presses harder). In some embodiments, if the icon is constrained to the predefined area, the icon moves along the edge of the predefined area closest to the contact. For example, if the predefined area is a horizontal strip near the bottom edge of the display and the focus selector is above the predefined area, the movement of the icon will track horizontal movement of the contact, but will not track vertical movement of the contact unless the focus selector is moved into the predefined area. For example, icon 3908 is optionally constrained to within application taskbar area 3916 in accordance with movement 3924 of contact 3920, as shown in FIG11I .
响应于(4006)检测到手势,并且根据确定(4020)接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,设备根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动(4022)相应图标(例如,在手势期间将相应图标移动到预定义区域之外,使得其跟随接触的移动),并且在手势结束之后从预定义区域移除(4024)相应图标(例如,响应于检测到接触的抬离,删除图标或将图标移动到在预定义区域外面的位置)。例如在图11J-图11K中,响应于检测到利用接触3930所执行的手势并且根据确定接触3930在手势期间达到高于限定强度阈值的强度,设备显示例如图标3908的根据接触3930的移动3934的移动,并且在手势结束之后从应用程序任务栏区域3916移除图标3908,如图11M所示。又如,在图11S-图11T中,响应于检测到利用接触3950所执行的手势,图标3908根据接触3950的移动3952而移动,并且然后在手势结束之后从应用程序任务栏区域3916移除该图标3908,如图11U所示。In response to (4006) detecting a gesture, and in accordance with determining (4020) that the contact reached an intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, the device moves (4022) a corresponding icon in accordance with the movement of the contact during the gesture (e.g., moves the corresponding icon outside the predefined area during the gesture so that it follows the movement of the contact), and removes (4024) the corresponding icon from the predefined area after the gesture ends (e.g., in response to detecting lift-off of the contact, deletes the icon or moves the icon to a location outside the predefined area). For example, in Figures 11J-11K, in response to detecting a gesture performed with contact 3930 and in accordance with determining that contact 3930 reached an intensity above a defined intensity threshold during the gesture, the device displays, for example, movement of icon 3908 in accordance with movement 3934 of contact 3930, and removes icon 3908 from application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends, as shown in Figure 11M. As another example, in Figures 11S-11T, in response to detecting a gesture performed using contact 3950, icon 3908 moves according to movement 3952 of contact 3950 and is then removed from application taskbar area 3916 after the gesture ends, as shown in Figure 11U.
在一些实施例中,在检测到手势的结束之前,根据确定接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,在从预定义区域移除相应图标之前,设备显示(4026)相应图标将从任务栏移除的视觉指示(例如,在检测到手势的结束之前,显示相应图标移出预定义区域和/或在其中相应图标将从预定义区域永久移除的情况下显示图标移除符号,诸如“云”或红色“X”)。图11L示出了例如在利用接触3930所执行的手势结束之前,在应用程序任务栏区域3916中在图标3908所在之处显示图标3936(例如,应用程序图标删除指示)。In some embodiments, before detecting the end of the gesture, based on determining that the contact reached an intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, before removing the corresponding icon from the predefined area, the device displays (4026) a visual indication that the corresponding icon will be removed from the taskbar (e.g., before detecting the end of the gesture, displaying the corresponding icon moving out of the predefined area and/or displaying an icon removal symbol, such as a “cloud” or a red “X”, in the case where the corresponding icon will be permanently removed from the predefined area). Figure 11L shows, for example, icon 3936 (e.g., an application icon removal indicator) displayed in application taskbar area 3916 where icon 3908 was located, before a gesture performed with contact 3930 ends.
在一些实施例中,当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时,设备检测(4028)触敏表面上的轻击手势,并且响应于检测到轻击手势,设备启动(4030)与相应图标相关联的相应应用程序。在一些实施例中,相应图标是利用默认应用程序打开特定文档的文档图标。在一些实施例中,相应图标是不利用文档或利用最初显示的默认/空白文档打开应用程序的应用程序图标。例如,在图11N-图11O中,响应于当光标3922位于图标3908上方时检测到触敏表面451上的轻击手势3938,启动与图标3908相关联的应用程序并且显示对应界面3940。In some embodiments, when the focus selector is over the corresponding icon, the device detects (4028) a tap gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, and in response to detecting the tap gesture, the device launches (4030) a corresponding application associated with the corresponding icon. In some embodiments, the corresponding icon is a document icon that opens a specific document using a default application. In some embodiments, the corresponding icon is an application icon that opens an application without a document or with an initially displayed default/blank document. For example, in Figures 11N-11O, in response to detecting a tap gesture 3938 on touch-sensitive surface 451 when cursor 3922 is over icon 3908, the application associated with icon 3908 is launched and a corresponding interface 3940 is displayed.
在一些实施例中,代替基于接触在对应于预定义区域之外的移动的手势期间具有高于还是低于相应强度阈值的最大强度来确定是否从预定义区域移除相应图标,设备基于接触具有高于还是低于相应强度阈值的最大强度来确定是否在预定义区域中重新布置多个图标。因此,在一些实施例中,设备在显示器上的预定义区域中显示多个图标,其中所述多个图标包括相应图标。设备检测手势,该手势包括当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时在触敏表面上的接触;以及接触在触敏表面上的后续移动,该后续移动对应于焦点选择器在预定义区域内的移动。响应于检测到手势:根据确定接触在手势期间具有低于相应强度阈值的最大强度,设备在手势期间显示手势正在被执行的指示;并且在手势结束之后不在预定义区域中重新布置(例如,重新排序)相应图标。相反,根据确定接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,设备根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标;并且在手势结束之后在预定义区域中相对于所述多个图标中的其他图标重新布置(例如,重新排序)相应图标。例如,在图11P中,如果设备检测到具有低于ITD的最大强度的接触3946移动到图标3910与图标3912之间的位置,则当接触强度降到低于ITL时,图标3908将返回到其原始位置,并且预定义区域3916中的图标将不会被重新布置,如图11R所示(例如,因为接触3946具有低于ITD的最大强度)。相反,在图11S中,如果设备检测到具有高于ITD的最大强度的接触3950移动到图标3910与图标3912之间的位置,则当接触强度降到低于ITL时,图标3908将被放置在图标3910与图标3912之间,并且预定义区域3916中的图标将因此被重新布置(例如,因为接触3950具有高于ITD的最大强度)。在预定义区域中无意地重新布置图标对于可能没有意识到图标已被重新布置并且然后难以找到已从其通常位置移走的图标的用户可能是令人沮丧的。使用较高强度阈值(例如,ITD)来控制用户手势是否重新布置预定义区域中的图标有助于防止用户无意地在预定义区域内重新布置图标,从而改进用户界面的效率和可预测性。In some embodiments, instead of determining whether to remove the respective icon from the predefined area based on whether the contact had a maximum intensity above or below a corresponding intensity threshold during a gesture corresponding to movement outside the predefined area, the device determines whether to rearrange the plurality of icons within the predefined area based on whether the contact had a maximum intensity above or below the corresponding intensity threshold. Thus, in some embodiments, the device displays a plurality of icons within a predefined area on the display, wherein the plurality of icons includes the respective icon. The device detects a gesture comprising a contact on the touch-sensitive surface while a focus selector is over the respective icon; and subsequent movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface, the subsequent movement corresponding to movement of the focus selector within the predefined area. In response to detecting the gesture: based on determining that the contact had a maximum intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, the device displays an indication that the gesture is being performed during the gesture; and does not rearrange (e.g., reorder) the respective icon within the predefined area after the gesture ends. Instead, based on determining that the contact reached an intensity above the corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, the device moves the respective icon in accordance with the movement of the contact during the gesture; and rearranges (e.g., reorders) the respective icon within the predefined area relative to other icons in the plurality of icons after the gesture ends. For example, in Figure 11P, if the device detects contact 3946 having a maximum intensity below IT D moving to a position between icon 3910 and icon 3912, then when the contact intensity drops below IT L , icon 3908 will return to its original position, and the icons in predefined area 3916 will not be rearranged, as shown in Figure 11R (e.g., because contact 3946 has a maximum intensity below IT D ). Conversely, in Figure 11S, if the device detects contact 3950 having a maximum intensity above IT D moving to a position between icon 3910 and icon 3912, then when the contact intensity drops below IT L , icon 3908 will be placed between icon 3910 and icon 3912, and the icons in predefined area 3916 will be rearranged accordingly (e.g., because contact 3950 has a maximum intensity above IT D ). Inadvertently rearranging icons in a predefined area can be frustrating for a user who may not realize that the icons have been rearranged and then have difficulty finding icons that have been moved from their usual locations. Using a higher intensity threshold (eg, IT D ) to control whether a user gesture rearranges icons in a predefined area helps prevent users from inadvertently rearranging icons within the predefined area, thereby improving the efficiency and predictability of the user interface.
应当理解,对图12A-图12B中已经进行描述的操作的特定顺序仅仅是示例性的,并非旨在指示所述顺序是这些操作可被执行的唯一顺序。本领域的普通技术人员会想到各种方式来对本文所述的操作进行重新排序。另外,应当指出的是,本文中相对于本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的其他过程的细节也以类似的方式适用于上文相对于图12A-图12B所描述的方法4000。例如,上文参考方法4000所描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值和焦点选择器任选地具有本文中参考本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值和焦点选择器的一个或多个特性。为简明起见,这里不重复这些细节。It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations described in Figures 12A-12B are described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the order is the only order in which the operations can be performed. A person of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate various ways to reorder the operations described herein. In addition, it should be noted that the details of the other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) also apply in a similar manner to the method 4000 described above with respect to Figures 12A-12B. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described above with reference to method 4000 optionally have one or more characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]). For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.
根据一些实施例,图13示出了根据各种所述实施例的原理进行配置的电子设备4100的功能框图。该设备的功能块任选地由执行各种所述实施例的原理的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合来实现。本领域的技术人员应当理解,图13中所述的功能块任选地被组合或被分离为子块以实现各种所述实施例的原理。因此,本文的描述任选地支持本文所述功能块的任何可能的组合或分离或进一步限定。According to some embodiments, Figure 13 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 4100 configured according to the principle of the various described embodiments. The functional block of this equipment is optionally realized by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software that performs the principle of the various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional block described in Figure 13 is optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to realize the principle of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further qualification of the functional block described herein.
如图13所示,电子设备4100包括显示单元4102,该显示单元被配置为在显示单元4102上的预定义区域中显示多个图标,其中所述多个图标包括相应图标;触敏表面单元4104,该触敏表面单元被配置为接收手势;一个或多个传感器单元4105,该一个或多个传感器单元被配置为检测与触敏表面单元4104的接触强度;和处理单元4106,该处理单元耦接到显示单元4102、触敏表面单元4104和传感器单元4105。在一些实施例中,处理单元4106包括检测单元4108、显示使能单元4110、保留单元4112、移动单元4114、移除单元4116和启动单元4118。13 , electronic device 4100 includes a display unit 4102 configured to display a plurality of icons in a predefined area on display unit 4102, wherein the plurality of icons includes a corresponding icon; a touch-sensitive surface unit 4104 configured to receive a gesture; one or more sensor units 4105 configured to detect intensity of contact with touch-sensitive surface unit 4104; and a processing unit 4106 coupled to display unit 4102, touch-sensitive surface unit 4104, and sensor unit 4105. In some embodiments, processing unit 4106 includes a detection unit 4108, a display enabling unit 4110, a retaining unit 4112, a moving unit 4114, a removing unit 4116, and an activating unit 4118.
处理单元4106被配置为:检测手势,该手势包括当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时在触敏表面单元4104上的接触以及该接触在触敏表面单元4104上的后续移动,该后续移动对应于焦点选择器在预定义区域之外的移动(例如,利用检测单元4108),并且响应于检测到手势:根据确定接触在手势期间具有低于相应强度阈值的最大强度,在手势期间使能手势正在被执行的指示的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元4110)并且在手势结束之后将相应图标保留在预定义区域中(例如,利用保留单元4112);以及根据确定接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标(例如,利用移动单元4114)并且在手势结束之后从预定义区域移除相应图标(例如,利用使用移除单元4116)。Processing unit 4106 is configured to: detect a gesture, which includes contact on touch-sensitive surface unit 4104 when the focus selector is over the corresponding icon and subsequent movement of the contact on touch-sensitive surface unit 4104, which subsequent movement corresponds to movement of the focus selector outside of the predefined area (for example, using detection unit 4108), and in response to detecting the gesture: based on determining that the contact has a maximum intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, enable display of an indication that the gesture is being performed during the gesture (for example, using display enabling unit 4110) and retain the corresponding icon in the predefined area after the gesture ends (for example, using retention unit 4112); and based on determining that the contact reaches an intensity above the corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture, move the corresponding icon according to the movement of the contact during the gesture (for example, using movement unit 4114) and remove the corresponding icon from the predefined area after the gesture ends (for example, using removal unit 4116).
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括:改变预定义区域中的相应图标的外观,并且当在显示单元4102上显示具有已改变外观的相应图标时,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标的表示。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes changing the appearance of a corresponding icon in a predefined area, and when the corresponding icon with the changed appearance is displayed on the display unit 4102, moving the representation of the corresponding icon according to movement of the contact during the gesture.
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括当将相应图标保持在预定义区域中的固定位置中时,根据接触的移动来移动显示单元4102上的光标。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes moving a cursor on the display unit 4102 in accordance with movement of the contact while the corresponding icon is maintained in a fixed position in the predefined area.
在一些实施例中,显示手势正在被执行的指示包括当将相应图标的移动约束于预定义区域时,根据接触在手势期间的移动来移动相应图标。In some embodiments, displaying an indication that a gesture is being performed includes moving the respective icon in accordance with movement of the contact during the gesture while constraining movement of the respective icon to a predefined area.
在一些实施例中,处理单元4106被配置为:当焦点选择器位于相应图标上方时检测触敏表面单元4104上的轻击手势(例如,利用检测单元4108),并且响应于检测到轻击手势,启动与相应图标相关联的相应应用程序(例如,利用启动单元4118)。In some embodiments, the processing unit 4106 is configured to detect a tap gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit 4104 when the focus selector is over the corresponding icon (e.g., using the detection unit 4108), and in response to detecting the tap gesture, launch the corresponding application associated with the corresponding icon (e.g., using the launch unit 4118).
在一些实施例中,处理单元4106被配置为:在检测到手势的结束之前,根据确定接触在手势期间达到高于相应强度阈值的强度,在从预定义区域移除相应图标之前,使能相应图标将从任务栏移除的视觉指示的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元4110)。In some embodiments, processing unit 4106 is configured to, before detecting the end of the gesture, enable display of a visual indication that the corresponding icon will be removed from the taskbar (e.g., using display enabling unit 4110) based on determining that the contact reaches an intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold during the gesture and before removing the corresponding icon from the predefined area.
上述信息处理方法中的操作任选地通过运行信息处理装置中的一个或多个功能模块来实现,该信息处理装置诸如为通用处理器(例如,如以上相对于图1A和图3所描述的)或特定于应用的芯片。The operations in the above information processing method are optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in an information processing device, such as a general-purpose processor (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or an application-specific chip.
以上参考图12A-图12B所述的操作任选地由图1A-图1B或图13中所描绘的部件来实现。例如,检测操作4004、显示操作4010、保留操作4018、移动操作4022和移除操作4024任选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180和事件处理程序190来实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171检测在触敏显示器112上的接触,并且事件分配器模块174将事件信息递送到应用程序136-1。应用程序136-1的相应事件识别器180将事件信息与相应事件定义186进行比较,并且确定触敏表面上第一位置处的第一接触是否(或该设备的旋转是否)对应于预定义的事件或子事件,诸如对用户界面上的对象的选择、或该设备从一个取向到另一个取向的旋转。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或子事件时,事件识别器180激活与检测到该事件或子事件相关联的事件处理程序190。事件处理程序190任选地利用或调用数据更新器176或对象更新器177来更新应用程序内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理程序190访问相应GUI更新器178以更新应用程序所显示的内容。类似地,本领域技术人员会清楚地知道基于在图1A-1B中所示的部件可如何实现其他过程。The operations described above with reference to Figures 12A-12B are optionally implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 13. For example, detection operation 4004, display operation 4010, retention operation 4018, move operation 4022, and removal operation 4024 are optionally implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface (or whether the rotation of the device) corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as the selection of an object on a user interface or the rotation of the device from one orientation to another. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, those skilled in the art will clearly understand how other processes can be implemented based on the components shown in Figures 1A-1B.
显示内容层Display content layer
许多电子设备包括其中可显示不同对应内容诸如内容层的应用程序或用户界面。例如,该对应内容可为位置在不同时间处的图像或位置的不同类型的地图。在一些方法中,为了显示不同内容层,用户必须打开菜单并且选择所需的内容层,这可为繁琐且耗时的。下文描述的实施例改进了这些方法。当焦点选择器位于内容层上方时,用户增大触敏表面上的接触强度。如果强度增大到高于阈值,则显示不同内容层的对应部分。不同内容层还可根据接触强度来逐渐显出,或通过移动焦点选择器来摇移。这些特征使内容层的显示和操纵更有效。Many electronic devices include applications or user interfaces in which different corresponding content, such as content layers, can be displayed. For example, the corresponding content may be an image of a location at different times or a map of different types of locations. In some approaches, in order to display different content layers, the user must open a menu and select the desired content layer, which can be cumbersome and time consuming. The embodiments described below improve upon these approaches. When the focus selector is over a content layer, the user increases the intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface. If the intensity increases above a threshold, corresponding portions of the different content layers are displayed. The different content layers can also be gradually revealed based on the intensity of the contact, or panned by moving the focus selector. These features make the display and manipulation of content layers more efficient.
图14A-图14L根据一些实施例示出了用于显示内容层的示例性用户界面。这些附图中的用户界面被用于示出下文描述的过程,包括图15A-图15C中的过程。图14A-图14L包括强度图,该强度图示出触敏表面上的接触相对于包括轻按压强度阈值(例如,“ITL”)和转变起始强度阈值(例如,“IT1”)的多个强度阈值的当前强度。在一些实施例中,与下文参考“ITL”描述的那些操作类似的操作是参考不同的强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)来执行的。Figures 14A-14L illustrate exemplary user interfaces for displaying content layers, in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 15A-15C. Figures 14A-14L include an intensity graph that illustrates the current intensity of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface relative to multiple intensity thresholds, including a light press intensity threshold (e.g., "IT L ") and a transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., "IT 1 "). In some embodiments, operations similar to those described below with reference to "IT L " are performed with reference to a different intensity threshold (e.g., "IT D ").
在一些实施例中,设备是具有独立显示器(例如,显示器450)和独立触敏表面(例如,触敏表面451)的电子设备。在一些实施例中,设备是便携式多功能设备100,显示器是触敏显示器系统112,并且触敏表面包括显示器上的触觉输出发生器167(图1A)。为了便于解释,参考图14A-图14L和图15A-图15C描述的实施例将参考显示器450和独立触敏表面451来讨论,然而,当在触敏显示器系统112上显示图14A-图14L中所示的用户界面时,响应于在触敏显示器系统112上检测到图14A-图14L所描述的接触而任选地在具有触敏显示器系统112的设备上执行类似操作;在此类实施例中,焦点选择器任选地为:相应接触、对应于接触的代表点(例如,相应接触的质心或与相应接触相关联的点)、或在触敏显示器系统112而不是光标6904上检测到的两个或更多个接触的质心。In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device having an independent display (e.g., display 450) and an independent touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface 451). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device 100, the display is touch-sensitive display system 112, and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generator 167 ( FIG. 1A ) on the display. For ease of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 14A-14L and FIG. 15A-15C will be discussed with reference to display 450 and independent touch-sensitive surface 451. However, similar operations are optionally performed on the device having touch-sensitive display system 112 in response to detecting the contacts described in FIG. 14A-14L on touch-sensitive display system 112 when the user interface shown in FIG. 14A-14L is displayed on touch-sensitive display system 112. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally: the corresponding contact, a representative point corresponding to the contact (e.g., the centroid of the corresponding contact or a point associated with the corresponding contact), or the centroid of two or more contacts detected on touch-sensitive display system 112 instead of cursor 6904.
图14A示出了设备在显示器450上显示内容6902。在一些实施例中,内容6902是位置在第一时间处(例如,在特定日期和时间处)的图像(例如,该位置的高空或卫星图像)。在一些其他实施例中,内容6902是位置的第一类型的地图(例如,街道地图)。14A shows the device displaying content 6902 on display 450. In some embodiments, content 6902 is an image (e.g., an aerial or satellite image of the location) of a location at a first time (e.g., at a specific date and time). In some other embodiments, content 6902 is a first type of map (e.g., a street map) of the location.
设备还在显示器450上显示焦点选择器(例如,光标6904)。在一些实施例中,光标6904是指针(例如,鼠标指针)。在图14A中,光标6904位于内容6902上方的位置6904-a处。光标6904与内容6902的光标6904位于其上方的部分相关联。例如,在图14A中,在位置6904-a处的光标6904与部分6902-1相关联。当光标6904在内容6902上移动时,内容6902的相关联部分也随光标6904的位置改变(例如,内容6902的与焦点选择器相关联的部分对应于在光标6904的预定义半径或距离内或在以光标6904为中心的预定义区域内的内容)。The device also displays a focus selector (e.g., cursor 6904) on display 450. In some embodiments, cursor 6904 is a pointer (e.g., a mouse pointer). In FIG14A , cursor 6904 is located at position 6904-a above content 6902. Cursor 6904 is associated with the portion of content 6902 over which cursor 6904 is located. For example, in FIG14A , cursor 6904 at position 6904-a is associated with portion 6902-1. As cursor 6904 moves over content 6902, the associated portion of content 6902 also changes with the position of cursor 6904 (e.g., the portion of content 6902 associated with the focus selector corresponds to content within a predefined radius or distance of cursor 6904 or within a predefined area centered on cursor 6904).
当内容的光标6904与其相关联的部分具有有限尺寸时,不向用户显示该部分的范围(例如,尺寸和边界),因此直到设备开始用第二内容的对应部分来替换第一内容的所述部分,所述部分与内容6902的其余部分的划界对用户而言才任选地显而易见,如下所述。例如,在图14A中,不在显示器450上向用户显示部分6902-1的边界。When the portion of content with which cursor 6904 is associated has a finite size, the extent of the portion (e.g., size and boundaries) is not displayed to the user, so that the demarcation of the portion from the rest of content 6902 is not optionally apparent to the user until the device begins replacing the portion of the first content with the corresponding portion of the second content, as described below. For example, in Figure 14A, the boundaries of portion 6902-1 are not displayed to the user on display 450.
在图14A中,当光标6904位于部分6902-1上方时,设备检测触敏表面451上的接触6906。当光标6904位于部分6902-1上方时,设备检测到接触6906的强度从低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL)增大到高于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL),如图14B-图14C所示。响应于检测到接触6906的强度增大(例如,从图14B中的低于ITL的强度增大到图14C中的高于ITL的强度),设备停止显示部分6902-1并且显示内容6908的部分6908-1,如图14C所示。部分6908-1具有与部分6902-1相同的尺寸和位置。在图14C中,不显示内容6908的全部;只显示部分6908-1。在一些实施例中,显示部分6908-1以给出通过虚拟放大镜或视口正在查看的视觉外观,正如用户正在穿过内容6902中的孔查看位于内容6902“下面”的内容6908。In Figure 14A , when cursor 6904 is over portion 6902-1, the device detects contact 6906 on touch-sensitive surface 451. While cursor 6904 is over portion 6902-1, the device detects an increase in the intensity of contact 6906 from below a light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) to above a light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), as shown in Figures 14B-14C . In response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact 6906 (e.g., from an intensity below IT L in Figure 14B to an intensity above IT L in Figure 14C ), the device stops displaying portion 6902-1 and displays portion 6908-1 of content 6908, as shown in Figure 14C . Portion 6908-1 has the same size and position as portion 6902-1. In Figure 14C , all of content 6908 is not displayed; only portion 6908-1 is displayed. In some embodiments, portion 6908 - 1 is displayed to give the visual appearance of being viewed through a virtual magnifying glass or viewport, as if the user were looking through a hole in content 6902 to view content 6908 “underneath” content 6902 .
在其中内容6902是位置在第一时间处的图像的一些实施例中,内容6908是相同位置在不同于第一时间的第二时间(例如,不同时间和日期)处的图像。在其中内容6902是第一类型的位置的地图的一些实施例中,内容6908是相同位置的不同于第一类型的第二类型(例如,公共交通地图)的地图。内容6908的部分与内容6902的对应部分相关。因此,部分6908-1对应于部分6902-1。例如,如果内容6902和6908是相同位置的不同类型的地图,则部分6902-1和6908-1是相同街道十字路口附近的相应地图的部分。在一些实施例中,内容6902是第一图像并且内容6908是对应于第一图像的第二图像(例如,相同对象或相同组对象的图像,其基于媒体捕获设置诸如曝光、白平衡、焦距等,或基于图像捕获条件诸如当日时间、照明等而不同于第一图像)。在一些实施例中,内容6902是第一文档并且内容6908是第一文档的早期版本(例如,文字处理、电子表格、呈现或PDF文档的早期版本)。虽然已经提供了许多实例,但这些实例不是限制性的,并且任选地在任一组第一内容和第二内容上执行类似操作,对此,当继续显示第一内容的其他部分时用第二内容来替换第一内容的特定部分是有利的。In some embodiments where content 6902 is an image of a location at a first time, content 6908 is an image of the same location at a second time different from the first time (e.g., a different time and date). In some embodiments where content 6902 is a map of a first type of location, content 6908 is a map of the same location of a second type different from the first type (e.g., a public transportation map). Portions of content 6908 are associated with corresponding portions of content 6902. Thus, portion 6908-1 corresponds to portion 6902-1. For example, if content 6902 and 6908 are different types of maps of the same location, portions 6902-1 and 6908-1 are portions of respective maps near the same street intersection. In some embodiments, content 6902 is a first image and content 6908 is a second image corresponding to the first image (e.g., an image of the same object or group of objects that differs from the first image based on media capture settings such as exposure, white balance, focus, etc., or based on image capture conditions such as time of day, lighting, etc.). In some embodiments, content 6902 is a first document and content 6908 is an earlier version of the first document (e.g., an earlier version of a word processing, spreadsheet, presentation, or PDF document). Although a number of examples have been provided, these examples are not limiting, and similar operations may optionally be performed on any set of first and second content, for which it may be advantageous to replace a particular portion of the first content with the second content while continuing to display other portions of the first content.
在一些实施例中,响应于检测到接触6906的强度下降到低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL),停止显示内容6908-1,并且总体上将内容6902-1作为内容6902的一部分重新显示(例如,如果接触6906降落回到图14B所示的低于ITL的强度,则停止显示第二内容的第一部分6908-1)。In some embodiments, in response to detecting that the intensity of contact 6906 drops below a light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), display of content 6908-1 stops, and content 6902-1 is redisplayed as part of content 6902 as a whole (e.g., if contact 6906 drops back to an intensity below IT L as shown in FIG. 14B , display of the first portion 6908-1 of the second content stops).
在图14C中,部分6908-1具有与图14A-图14B中的部分6902-1的尺寸相同的第一尺寸。在一些实施例中,该第一尺寸基于接触6906的强度(例如,当接触6906的强度增大到高于预定义强度阈值时,以对应方式增大第一内容6902的用第二内容6908替换的区域的尺寸)。响应于检测到接触6906的强度的增大,设备将部分6902-1的尺寸增大到第二尺寸。如果当显示部分6908-1时检测到强度增大,则将部分6908-1的尺寸增大到第二尺寸以匹配部分6902-1的尺寸增大。In FIG14C , portion 6908-1 has a first size that is the same as the size of portion 6902-1 in FIG14A-14B . In some embodiments, the first size is based on the intensity of contact 6906 (e.g., when the intensity of contact 6906 increases above a predefined intensity threshold, the size of the area of first content 6902 that is replaced with second content 6908 increases in a corresponding manner). In response to detecting an increase in the intensity of contact 6906, the device increases the size of portion 6902-1 to a second size. If an increase in intensity is detected while portion 6908-1 is displayed, the size of portion 6908-1 is increased to the second size to match the increase in size of portion 6902-1.
例如,图14D示出接触6906的强度增大到高于图14C中所示的强度。响应于检测到强度增大而将部分6902-1和部分6908-1的尺寸增大对应于接触6906的强度增大量的量。在显示器450上显示部分6908-1的尺寸增大,但部分6902-1的尺寸增大被显示为图14D中的内容6902中的孔的尺寸。类似地,图14E示出接触6906的强度增大到高于图14D中所示的强度。响应于检测到强度增大,部分6902-1和部分6908-1的尺寸从图14D中所示的尺寸进一步增大。同样,在显示器450上显示部分6908-1的尺寸增大,但部分6902-1的尺寸增大被显示为图14E中的内容6902中的孔的尺寸。在一些实施例中,响应于接触6906的强度减小而减小部分6902-1和6908-1的尺寸(例如,设备反转响应于图14C-图14E中所示的强度增大而执行的尺寸增大)。For example, FIG14D shows that the intensity of contact 6906 has increased to a level higher than that shown in FIG14C . In response to detecting the increase in intensity, the sizes of portion 6902-1 and portion 6908-1 are increased by an amount corresponding to the increase in the intensity of contact 6906. The increase in size of portion 6908-1 is displayed on display 450, but the increase in size of portion 6902-1 is displayed as the size of the hole in content 6902 in FIG14D . Similarly, FIG14E shows that the intensity of contact 6906 has increased to a level higher than that shown in FIG14D . In response to detecting the increase in intensity, the sizes of portion 6902-1 and portion 6908-1 are further increased from the size shown in FIG14D . Similarly, the increase in size of portion 6908-1 is displayed on display 450, but the increase in size of portion 6902-1 is displayed as the size of the hole in content 6902 in FIG14E . In some embodiments, portions 6902-1 and 6908-1 are reduced in size in response to a decrease in the intensity of contact 6906 (eg, the device reversal performed in response to the increase in intensity shown in Figures 14C-14E).
图14F示出了在显示器450上显示的包括部分6902-1以及光标6904的内容6902,如图14A所示。设备在触敏表面451上检测到具有低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL)和低于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1)的强度的接触6910。在图14A-图14L中,转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1)低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL)。Figure 14F shows content 6902, including portion 6902-1 and cursor 6904, displayed on display 450, as shown in Figure 14A. The device detects contact 6910 with an intensity below a light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) and below a transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ) on touch-sensitive surface 451. In Figures 14A-14L , the transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ) is lower than the light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ).
设备检测到接触6910的强度增大到仍低于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1)的较高强度,如图14G所示。根据确定新强度低于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1),继续显示部分6902-1而不显示部分6908-1。The device detects that the intensity of contact 6910 increases to a higher intensity that is still below the transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ), as shown in Figure 14G. Based on determining that the new intensity is below the transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ), portion 6902-1 continues to be displayed and portion 6908-1 is not displayed.
在图14H中,设备检测到接触6910的强度进一步增大到高于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1)而低于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL)的强度。根据确定新强度高于转变起始强度阈值(并且低于轻按压强度阈值ITL),显示部分6908-1,并且将部分6902-1的不透明度减小(例如,视觉上更透明)的版本显示为覆盖在部分6908-1之上。因此,从用户的角度来看,部分6908-1和部分6902-1均可被看到,其中通过更透明的部分6902-1看到部分6908-1。In Figure 14H, the device detects that the intensity of contact 6910 has further increased to an intensity that is above the transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT1 ) and below the light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). Based on determining that the new intensity is above the transition-start intensity threshold (and below the light press intensity threshold IT L ), portion 6908-1 is displayed, and a reduced-opaque (e.g., visually more transparent) version of portion 6902-1 is displayed overlying portion 6908-1. Thus, from the user's perspective, both portion 6908-1 and portion 6902-1 are visible, with portion 6908-1 visible through the more transparent portion 6902-1.
在一些实施例中,不透明度减小的部分6902-1的不透明度基于接触6910的介于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1)与轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL)之间的强度。响应于接触6910的强度增大而减小不透明度,并且响应于接触6910的强度减小而增大不透明度。因此,部分6908-1任选地具有在显示器450上正逐渐显露并且逐渐替换部分6902-1的外观。In some embodiments, the opacity of reduced-opacity portion 6902-1 is based on an intensity between a transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ) and a light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) of contact 6910. The opacity is reduced in response to an increase in the intensity of contact 6910, and the opacity is increased in response to a decrease in the intensity of contact 6910. Thus, portion 6908-1 optionally has the appearance of gradually revealing on display 450 and gradually replacing portion 6902-1.
在图14I中,设备检测到接触6910的强度增大到高于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL)。响应于检测到接触6910的强度增大到高于轻按压强度阈值(例如,ITL),设备停止显示部分6902-1(不透明度减小或以其他方式)并且显示内容部分6908-1。虽然已经参考转变起始阈值IT1和轻按压强度阈值ITL描述了逐渐停止显示第一内容6902的第一部分的前述实例,但在一些实施例中,ITL是第一内容6902的第一部分开始逐渐消失以显露第二内容6908的第一部分时的强度阈值,并且深按压强度阈值ITD是第一内容的第一部分完全消失以显露第二内容6908的第一部分时的强度阈值。In Figure 14I, the device detects that the intensity of contact 6910 has increased above a light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In response to detecting that the intensity of contact 6910 has increased above the light press intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device stops displaying portion 6902-1 (with reduced opacity or otherwise) and displays content portion 6908-1. Although the previous example of gradually stopping displaying the first portion of first content 6902 has been described with reference to transition initiation threshold IT 1 and light press intensity threshold IT L , in some embodiments, IT L is the intensity threshold at which the first portion of first content 6902 begins to gradually fade to reveal the first portion of second content 6908, and the deep press intensity threshold IT D is the intensity threshold at which the first portion of the first content completely fades to reveal the first portion of second content 6908.
图14J示出了在部分6908-1上方位于位置6904-1处的光标6904,以及位于位置6910-a处的接触6910。如图14J-图14L所示,设备在触敏表面451上检测到接触6910从位置6910-a朝向位置6910-b的移动6912(图14K-图14L)。响应于检测到接触6926的移动,光标6904从位置6904-a(图14J)移动到在内容6902的部分6902-2(如图14K所示)上方的位置6904-b(图14K-图14L)。设备停止显示部分6902-2并且显示对应于部分6902-2的部分6908-2,如图14L所示。FIG14J shows a cursor 6904 at position 6904-1 above portion 6908-1, and contact 6910 at position 6910-a. As shown in FIG14J-FIG14L, the device detects movement 6912 (FIG14K-FIG14L) of contact 6910 from position 6910-a toward position 6910-b on touch-sensitive surface 451. In response to detecting movement of contact 6926, cursor 6904 moves from position 6904-a (FIG14J) to position 6904-b (FIG14K-FIG14L) above portion 6902-2 (as shown in FIG14K) of content 6902. The device stops displaying portion 6902-2 and displays portion 6908-2 corresponding to portion 6902-2, as shown in FIG14L.
在图14J-图14L中,光标6904响应于接触6910的移动6912而移动,仍显示内容6908的一部分并且内容6908的所显示的部分随光标6904在内容6902的新部分上方移动而改变;内容6908的所显示的部分跟随光标6904。例如,如果内容6908的部分被显示为好像通过虚拟放大镜、视口或内容6902中的孔来查看,则虚拟放大镜、视口或内容6902中的孔连同光标6904一起移动并且通过虚拟放大镜或视口查看的内容6908的部分发生改变。在图14K中,为了便于理解光标6904在内容6902的不同部分上方的移动,未示出内容6908的所显示的部分。另外,如图14K所示,部分6902-1和6902-2任选地至少部分地重叠。In Figures 14J-14L , cursor 6904 moves in response to movement 6912 of contact 6910, with a portion of content 6908 still displayed and the displayed portion of content 6908 changing as cursor 6904 moves over the new portion of content 6902; the displayed portion of content 6908 follows cursor 6904. For example, if a portion of content 6908 is displayed as if viewed through a virtual magnifying glass, viewport, or hole in content 6902, the virtual magnifying glass, viewport, or hole in content 6902 moves along with cursor 6904, and the portion of content 6908 viewed through the virtual magnifying glass or viewport changes. In Figure 14K , the displayed portion of content 6908 is not shown to facilitate understanding of the movement of cursor 6904 over different portions of content 6902. Additionally, as shown in Figure 14K , portions 6902-1 and 6902-2 optionally at least partially overlap.
图15A-图15C是示出根据一些实施例的显示内容层的方法7000的流程图。方法7000在具有显示器和触敏表面的电子设备(例如,设备300,图3,或便携式多功能设备100,图1A)处执行。在一些实施例中,显示器是触摸屏显示器,并且触敏表面在显示器上。在一些实施例中,显示器与触敏表面分开。方法7000中的一些操作任选地被组合,和/或一些操作的顺序任选地被改变。Figures 15A-15C are flow diagrams illustrating method 7000 for displaying content layers according to some embodiments. Method 7000 is performed at an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A). In some embodiments, the display is a touch screen display and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 7000 may optionally be combined, and/or the order of some operations may optionally be changed.
如下文所述,方法7000提供显示内容层的直观方式。该方法减小了当显示内容层时用户的认知负担,从而创建更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动的电子设备,使用户能够更快且更有效地显示内容层节省了功率并且增加了电池充电之间的时间。As described below, method 7000 provides an intuitive way to display content layers. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user when displaying content layers, thereby creating a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered electronic devices, enabling users to display content layers faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.
设备在显示器上显示(7002)第一内容,其中第一内容的部分与第二内容的(最初)未在显示器上显示的对应部分相关(例如,在检测到触敏表面上的接触强度增大之前不显示第二内容的对应部分,如下文所述)。例如,图14A和图14F示出在显示器450上显示内容6902,其中内容6902的部分与内容6908的最初未显示的对应部分相关。The device displays (7002) first content on the display, where a portion of the first content is related to a corresponding portion of second content that was not (initially) displayed on the display (e.g., the corresponding portion of the second content is not displayed until an increase in contact intensity on the touch-sensitive surface is detected, as described below). For example, Figures 14A and 14F show content 6902 being displayed on display 450, where a portion of content 6902 is related to a corresponding portion of content 6908 that was not (initially) displayed.
当焦点选择器位于第一内容的第一部分上方时,设备检测(7014)到触敏表面上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)。例如,图14A-图14B示出当光标6904位于部分6902-1上方时检测到接触6906的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)。图14G-图14I示出在光标6904位于部分6902-1上方时检测到接触6910的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)。When the focus selector is over the first portion of the first content, the device detects (7014) that the intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). For example, Figures 14A-14B illustrate detecting that the intensity of contact 6906 increases above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) when cursor 6904 is over portion 6902-1. Figures 14G-14I illustrate detecting that the intensity of contact 6910 increases above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) when cursor 6904 is over portion 6902-1.
响应于检测到(7018)触敏表面上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL),设备停止(7020)显示第一内容的第一部分,并且显示(7022)第二内容的与第一内容的第一部分对应的第一部分。例如,在图14A-图14C中,响应于检测到接触6906的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL),设备停止显示部分6902-1(图14A和图14B),并且显示对应于部分6902-1的部分6908-1(图14C)。在图14G-图14I中,响应于检测到接触6910的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL),设备停止显示部分6902-1(图14G)并且显示部分6908-1(图14I)。In response to detecting (7018) that the intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface increases above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device ceases (7020) displaying the first portion of the first content and displays (7022) a first portion of the second content corresponding to the first portion of the first content. For example, in Figures 14A-14C , in response to detecting that the intensity of contact 6906 increases above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device ceases displaying portion 6902-1 ( Figures 14A and 14B ) and displays portion 6908-1 ( Figure 14C ) corresponding to portion 6902-1. In Figures 14G-14I , in response to detecting that the intensity of contact 6910 increases above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), the device ceases displaying portion 6902-1 ( Figure 14G ) and displays portion 6908-1 ( Figure 14I ).
在一些实施例中,在显示第二内容的第一部分之前(7004),设备检测(7006)到接触强度从低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)的第一强度增大到低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)的第二强度。响应于检测到(7008)接触的强度增大到低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)的第二强度,根据确定第二强度低于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1),设备继续(7010)显示第一内容的第一部分而不显示第二内容的第一部分;并且根据确定接触强度高于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1),设备显示(7012)覆盖在第二内容的第一部分之上的第一内容的第一部分的不透明度减小的版本。在一些实施例中,第一内容的第一部分的不透明度随强度增大到相应阈值而减小。如图14F-图14G所示,例如,在显示部分6908-1之前,设备检测到接触6910的强度增大到低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)的强度。根据确定新强度低于转变起始强度阈值IT1,如图14G所示,设备继续显示部分6902-1,而不显示部分6908-1。相反,根据确定新强度高于转变起始强度阈值IT1,如图14H所示,设备显示覆盖在部分6908-1之上的部分6902-1的不透明度减小的版本。In some embodiments, before displaying the first portion of the second content (7004), the device detects (7006) an increase in intensity of the contact from a first intensity below a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) to a second intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). In response to detecting (7008) the increase in intensity of the contact to a second intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), based on determining that the second intensity is below a transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ), the device continues (7010) displaying the first portion of the first content without displaying the first portion of the second content; and based on determining that the intensity of the contact is above the transition-start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ), the device displays (7012) a reduced-opacity version of the first portion of the first content overlaid on the first portion of the second content. In some embodiments, the opacity of the first portion of the first content decreases as the intensity increases to the corresponding threshold. As shown in Figures 14F-14G , for example, before displaying portion 6908-1, the device detects that the intensity of contact 6910 increases to an intensity below the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ). Based on the determination that the new intensity is below the transition-start intensity threshold IT 1 , as shown in FIG 14G , the device continues to display portion 6902-1 without displaying portion 6908-1. Conversely, based on the determination that the new intensity is above the transition-start intensity threshold IT 1 , as shown in FIG 14H , the device displays a reduced-opacity version of portion 6902-1 overlaid on portion 6908-1.
在一些实施例中,第一内容的第一部分(和第二内容的对应第一部分)的尺寸(例如,区域)基于接触强度来确定(7016)。在显示(7028)第二内容的第一部分之后,设备检测(7030)接触的强度的增大,并且响应于检测到接触的强度的增大,增大(7032)第二内容的第一部分(和第一内容的对应第一部分)的尺寸。例如,在图14C-图14E中,在显示部分6908-1之后,设备检测接触6906的强度的增大。响应于检测到强度的增大,设备增大部分6902-1的尺寸(在背景中),并且增大部分6908-1的尺寸以匹配部分6902-1的新尺寸,如图14E所示。In some embodiments, the size (e.g., area) of the first portion of the first content (and the corresponding first portion of the second content) is determined (7016) based on the intensity of the contact. After displaying (7028) the first portion of the second content, the device detects (7030) an increase in the intensity of the contact and, in response to detecting the increase in the intensity of the contact, increases (7032) the size of the first portion of the second content (and the corresponding first portion of the first content). For example, in Figures 14C-14E, after displaying portion 6908-1, the device detects an increase in the intensity of contact 6906. In response to detecting the increase in intensity, the device increases the size of portion 6902-1 (in the background) and increases the size of portion 6908-1 to match the new size of portion 6902-1, as shown in Figure 14E.
在一些实施例中,第一内容包括(7024)位置(例如,物理位置)在第一时间处的图像,第二内容包括该位置在不同于第一时间的第二时间处的图像,并且第一内容的第一部分和第二内容的第一部分对应于该位置的同一部分。例如,内容6902包括位置在第一时间处的图像,并且内容6908包括该位置在不同于第一时间的第二时间处的图像。部分6902-1对应于部分6908-1;它们显示位置在不同时间处的同一部分。In some embodiments, the first content includes (7024) an image of a location (e.g., a physical location) at a first time, the second content includes an image of the location at a second time different from the first time, and the first portion of the first content and the first portion of the second content correspond to the same portion of the location. For example, content 6902 includes an image of the location at a first time, and content 6908 includes an image of the location at a second time different from the first time. Portion 6902-1 corresponds to portion 6908-1; they display the same portion of the location at different times.
在一些实施例中,第一内容包括(7026)位置(例如,物理位置)的第一地图,第二内容包括该位置的第二地图,其中第一地图不同于第二地图,并且第一内容的第一部分和第二内容的第一部分对应于该位置的同一部分。例如,第一地图包括与第二地图中所包括的地图特征不同的地图特征(例如,代替San Francisco的2012年地图的San Francisco的1902年地图或覆盖在San Francisco的公共交通地图之上的San Francisco的街道地图)。例如,内容6902包括第一类型位置的地图(例如,街道地图),并且内容6908包括不同于第一类型的第二类型位置的地图(例如,公共交通地图)。部分6902-1对应于部分6908-1;它们示出位置的同一部分的不同地图类型。In some embodiments, the first content includes (7026) a first map of a location (e.g., a physical location) and the second content includes a second map of the location, wherein the first map is different from the second map and the first portion of the first content and the first portion of the second content correspond to the same portion of the location. For example, the first map includes map features that are different from map features included in the second map (e.g., a 1902 map of San Francisco instead of a 2012 map of San Francisco or a street map of San Francisco overlaid on a public transportation map of San Francisco). For example, content 6902 includes a map of a first type of location (e.g., a street map) and content 6908 includes a map of a second type of location that is different from the first type (e.g., a public transportation map). Portion 6902-1 corresponds to portion 6908-1; they show different map types for the same portion of the location.
在一些实施例中,在显示(7028)第二内容的第一部分之后,设备检测(7034)接触的移动。响应于检测到(7036)接触的移动,设备将焦点选择器移动(7038)到第一内容的第二部分上方,停止(7040)显示第一内容的第二部分,并且显示(7042)第二内容的与第一内容的第二部分对应的第二部分(例如,第二内容的“显露”区域根据触敏表面上的接触的移动而移动)。例如,在图14J-图14L中,在显示部分6908-1之后,设备检测触敏表面451上的接触6910的移动6912。响应于检测到接触6910的移动6912,设备移动显示器450上的光标6904,并且然后停止显示部分6902-2并且显示部分6908-2,所述部分6908-2是第一内容6902和第二内容6908的对应于光标6904在显示器450上的新位置的部分。In some embodiments, after displaying (7028) the first portion of the second content, the device detects (7034) movement of the contact. In response to detecting (7036) the movement of the contact, the device moves (7038) the focus selector over the second portion of the first content, stops (7040) displaying the second portion of the first content, and displays (7042) a second portion of the second content that corresponds to the second portion of the first content (e.g., the "revealed" area of the second content moves in accordance with the movement of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface). For example, in Figures 14J-14L, after displaying portion 6908-1, the device detects movement 6912 of contact 6910 on touch-sensitive surface 451. In response to detecting movement 6912 of contact 6910 , the device moves the cursor 6904 on the display 450 and then stops displaying portion 6902 - 2 and displays portion 6908 - 2 , which is the portion of the first content 6902 and the second content 6908 that corresponds to the new position of the cursor 6904 on the display 450 .
在一些实施例中,第一内容的第二部分与第一内容的第一部分至少部分地重叠(7044)。在一些实施例中,第二内容的第二部分与第二内容的第一部分至少部分地重叠(例如,第二内容的“显露”区域根据接触的移动平滑地改变,使得当在“显露”区域的右边缘上显露一行像素时,在“显露”区域的左边缘上停止显露对应行的像素)。例如,如图14K所示,部分6902-1和6902-2重叠。In some embodiments, the second portion of the first content at least partially overlaps the first portion of the first content (7044). In some embodiments, the second portion of the second content at least partially overlaps the first portion of the second content (e.g., the "revealed" area of the second content changes smoothly based on the movement of the contact, such that when a row of pixels is revealed on the right edge of the "revealed" area, the corresponding row of pixels stops being revealed on the left edge of the "revealed" area). For example, as shown in Figure 14K, portions 6902-1 and 6902-2 overlap.
应当理解,对图15A-图15C中已经进行描述的操作的特定顺序仅仅是示例性的,并非旨在指示所述顺序是这些操作可被执行的唯一顺序。本领域的普通技术人员会想到各种方式来对本文所述的操作进行重新排序。另外,应当指出的是,本文中相对于本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的其他过程的细节也以类似的方式适用于上文相对于图15A-图15C描述的方法7000。例如,上文参考方法7000描述的接触、强度阈值和焦点选择器任选地具有本文中参考本文描述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的接触、强度阈值和焦点选择器的一个或多个特性。为简明起见,这里不重复这些细节。It should be understood that the particular order in which the operations described in Figures 15A-15C are described is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the order is the only order in which these operations can be performed. One of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate various ways to reorder the operations described herein. In addition, it should be noted that the details of the other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) are also applicable in a similar manner to the method 7000 described above with respect to Figures 15A-15C. For example, the contacts, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described above with reference to method 7000 optionally have one or more characteristics of the contacts, intensity thresholds, and focus selectors described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]). For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.
根据一些实施例,图16示出了根据各种所述实施例的原理进行配置的电子设备7100的功能框图。该设备的功能块任选地由执行各种所述实施例的原理的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合来实现。本领域的技术人员应当理解,图16中所述的功能块任选地被组合或被分离为子块以实现各种所述实施例的原理。因此,本文的描述任选地支持本文所述功能块的任何可能的组合或分离或进一步限定。According to some embodiments, Figure 16 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 7100 configured according to the principle of the various described embodiments. The functional block of this equipment is optionally realized by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software that performs the principle of the various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional block described in Figure 16 is optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to realize the principle of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further qualification of functional block described herein.
如图16所示,电子设备7100包括显示单元7102,该显示单元被配置为在显示单元7102上显示第一内容,其中第一内容的部分与第二内容的未在显示单元7102上显示的对应部分相关;触敏表面单元7104,该触敏表面单元被配置为接收接触;一个或多个传感器7106,该一个或多个传感器被配置为检测与触敏表面单元7104的接触强度;和处理单元7108,该处理单元耦接到显示单元7102、触敏表面单元7104和传感器7106。在一些实施例中,处理单元7108包括检测单元7110、停止单元7112、显示使能单元7114、增大单元7116和移动单元7118。16 , electronic device 7100 includes a display unit 7102 configured to display first content on display unit 7102, wherein a portion of the first content is associated with a corresponding portion of second content that is not displayed on display unit 7102; a touch-sensitive surface unit 7104 configured to receive a contact; one or more sensors 7106 configured to detect intensity of contact with touch-sensitive surface unit 7104; and a processing unit 7108 coupled to display unit 7102, touch-sensitive surface unit 7104, and sensors 7106. In some embodiments, processing unit 7108 includes a detecting unit 7110, a stopping unit 7112, a display enabling unit 7114, an enlarging unit 7116, and a moving unit 7118.
处理单元7108被配置为:当焦点选择器位于第一内容的第一部分上方时,检测到触敏表面单元7104上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)(例如,利用检测单元7110);并且响应于检测到触敏表面单元7104上的接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值:停止显示第一内容的第一部分(例如,利用停止单元7112),并且使能第二内容的与第一内容的第一部分对应的第一部分的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元7114)。The processing unit 7108 is configured to: when the focus selector is over the first portion of the first content, detect that the intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 7104 increases to above the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) (e.g., using the detection unit 7110); and in response to detecting that the intensity of the contact on the touch-sensitive surface unit 7104 increases to above the corresponding intensity threshold: stop displaying the first portion of the first content (e.g., using the stopping unit 7112), and enable display of a first portion of the second content corresponding to the first portion of the first content (e.g., using the display enabling unit 7114).
在一些实施例中,第一内容的第一部分的尺寸基于接触强度来确定;并且处理单元7108被配置为在使能第二内容的第一部分的显示之后:检测接触的强度的增大(例如,利用检测单元7110),并且响应于检测到接触的强度的增大,增大第二内容的第一部分的尺寸(例如,利用增大单元7116)。In some embodiments, the size of the first portion of the first content is determined based on the contact strength; and the processing unit 7108 is configured to, after enabling display of the first portion of the second content: detect an increase in the strength of the contact (e.g., using the detection unit 7110), and in response to detecting the increase in the strength of the contact, increase the size of the first portion of the second content (e.g., using the increase unit 7116).
在一些实施例中,处理单元7108被配置为在使能第二内容的第一部分的显示之前:检测到接触强度从低于相应强度阈值的第一强度增大到低于相应强度阈值的第二强度(例如,利用检测单元7110);并且响应于检测到接触的强度增大到低于相应强度阈值的第二强度:根据确定第二强度低于转变起始强度,继续使能第一内容的第一部分的显示而不使能第二内容的第一部分的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元7114);并且根据确定接触强度高于转变起始强度阈值(例如,IT1),使能覆盖在第二内容的第一部分之上的第一内容的第一部分的不透明度减小的版本的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元7114)。In some embodiments, the processing unit 7108 is configured to, before enabling display of the first portion of the second content: detect an increase in contact intensity from a first intensity that is below a corresponding intensity threshold to a second intensity that is below the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., using the detection unit 7110); and in response to detecting the increase in intensity of the contact to the second intensity that is below the corresponding intensity threshold: based on determining that the second intensity is below the transition start intensity, continue to enable display of the first portion of the first content without enabling display of the first portion of the second content (e.g., using the display enabling unit 7114); and based on determining that the contact intensity is above the transition start intensity threshold (e.g., IT 1 ), enable display of a reduced-opaque version of the first portion of the first content overlying the first portion of the second content (e.g., using the display enabling unit 7114).
在一些实施例中,处理单元7108被配置为在使能第二内容的第一部分的显示之后:检测到接触的移动(例如,利用检测单元7110);并且响应于检测到接触的移动:将焦点选择器移动到第一内容的第二部分上方(例如,利用移动单元7118);停止使能第一内容的第二部分的显示(例如,利用停止单元7112);并且使能第二内容的与第一内容的第二部分对应的第二部分的显示(例如,利用显示使能单元7114)。In some embodiments, the processing unit 7108 is configured to, after enabling display of the first portion of the second content: detect movement of the contact (e.g., using the detection unit 7110); and in response to detecting movement of the contact: move the focus selector over the second portion of the first content (e.g., using the movement unit 7118); stop enabling display of the second portion of the first content (e.g., using the stop unit 7112); and enable display of a second portion of the second content corresponding to the second portion of the first content (e.g., using the display enabling unit 7114).
在一些实施例中,第一内容的第二部分与第一内容的第一部分至少部分地重叠。In some embodiments, the second portion of the first content at least partially overlaps with the first portion of the first content.
在一些实施例中,第一内容包括位置在第一时间处的图像,第二内容包括该位置在不同于第一时间的第二时间处的图像,并且第一内容的第一部分和第二内容的第一部分对应于该位置的同一部分。In some embodiments, the first content includes an image of a location at a first time, the second content includes an image of the location at a second time different from the first time, and the first portion of the first content and the first portion of the second content correspond to the same portion of the location.
在一些实施例中,第一内容包括位置的第一地图,第二内容包括该位置的第二地图,其中第一地图不同于第二地图,并且第一内容的第一部分和第二内容的第一部分对应于该位置的同一部分。In some embodiments, the first content includes a first map of a location and the second content includes a second map of the location, wherein the first map is different from the second map, and the first portion of the first content and the first portion of the second content correspond to the same portion of the location.
上述信息处理方法中的操作任选地通过运行信息处理装置中的一个或多个功能模块来实现,该信息处理装置诸如通用处理器(例如,如以上相对于图1A和图3所描述的)或特定于应用的芯片。The operations in the above information processing method are optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in an information processing device, such as a general-purpose processor (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or an application-specific chip.
以上参考图15A-图15C所述的操作任选地由图1A-图1B或图16中所描绘的部件来实现。例如,检测操作7014、停止操作7020和显示操作7022任选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180和事件处理程序190来实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171检测在触敏显示器112上的接触,并且事件分配器模块174将事件信息递送到应用程序136-1。应用程序136-1的相应的事件识别器180将事件信息与相应的事件定义186进行比较,并且确定触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或子事件,诸如选择用户界面上的一个对象。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或子事件时,事件识别器180激活与检测到该事件或子事件相关联的事件处理程序190。事件处理程序190任选地利用或调用数据更新器176或对象更新器177来更新应用程序内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理程序190访问相应GUI更新器178以更新应用程序所显示的内容。类似地,本领域技术人员会清楚地知道基于在图1A-图1B中所示的部件可如何实现其他过程。The operations described above with reference to Figures 15A-15C are optionally implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 16. For example, the detection operation 7014, the stop operation 7020, and the display operation 7022 are optionally implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at a first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as the selection of an object on a user interface. Upon detecting the corresponding predefined event or sub-event, event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the detected event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, the event handler 190 accesses the corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, those skilled in the art will clearly know how other processes can be implemented based on the components shown in Figures 1A-1B.
在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航Navigate between displayed user interfaces
许多电子设备包括具有相同对象(例如内容诸如电子邮件或照片)的不同表示的用户界面。在一些情况下,相同对象的不同表示被组织成分级结构(例如,包括多条消息的会话或包括多张照片的相册)。此类群组需要用于在对应于分级结构的层级的用户界面之间进行导航的方便方法。一些用于在具有触敏表面的设备上在用户界面之间进行导航的方法通常需要用户定位示能表示(例如,键或“按钮”)。然而,此类方法是有问题的,因为它们易于不准确(例如,当打算选择示能表示时,对示能表示的意外选择、对不同键的意外选择)。此类方法还通过需要另外的独立手势来增加用户的认知负担。下文描述的实施例提供用于当焦点选择器位于对象的表示上方时使用利用接触所执行的相似手势在对应于对象的不同表示的用户界面之间进行导航的方便且直观的方法。在下文所述的实施例中,提供了用于在第一用户界面与第二用户界面之间进行导航的改进的方法,该第一用户界面至少包括对象的第一表示,该第二用户界面至少包括对象的第二表示。当显示第一用户界面时,当设备检测到满足对象的某些导航标准的手势时,设备用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面。当显示第二用户界面时,当设备检测到满足某些导航标准的手势时,设备用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面。Many electronic devices include user interfaces with different representations of the same object (e.g., content such as emails or photos). In some cases, different representations of the same object are organized into a hierarchical structure (e.g., a conversation including multiple messages or an album including multiple photos). Such groups require convenient methods for navigating between user interfaces corresponding to the levels of the hierarchical structure. Some methods for navigating between user interfaces on devices with touch-sensitive surfaces typically require the user to locate an affordance (e.g., a key or "button"). However, such methods are problematic because they are prone to inaccuracies (e.g., accidental selection of an affordance when intended to select the affordance, accidental selection of a different key). Such methods also increase the user's cognitive burden by requiring additional independent gestures. The embodiments described below provide convenient and intuitive methods for navigating between user interfaces corresponding to different representations of an object using similar gestures performed using touch when a focus selector is located over the representation of the object. In the embodiments described below, an improved method for navigating between a first user interface and a second user interface is provided, the first user interface including at least a first representation of the object and the second user interface including at least a second representation of the object. When a first user interface is displayed, when the device detects a gesture that satisfies certain navigation criteria of the object, the device replaces the first user interface with a second user interface. When a second user interface is displayed, when the device detects a gesture that satisfies certain navigation criteria, the device replaces the second user interface with the first user interface.
图17A-图17H根据一些实施例示出了用于在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的示例性用户界面。这些附图中的用户界面被用于示出下文描述的过程,包括图18A-图18C中的过程。图17A-图17H包括强度图,该强度图示出了触敏表面上的接触相对于包括相应阈值(例如,“ITL”)的多个强度阈值的当前强度。在一些实施例中,与下文参考“ITL”描述的那些操作类似的操作是参考不同的强度阈值(例如,“ITD”)来执行的。Figures 17A-17H illustrate exemplary user interfaces for navigating between displayed user interfaces in accordance with some embodiments. The user interfaces in these figures are used to illustrate the processes described below, including the processes in Figures 18A-18C. Figures 17A-17H include an intensity graph that illustrates the current intensity of contacts on the touch-sensitive surface relative to a plurality of intensity thresholds, including a corresponding threshold (e.g., "IT L "). In some embodiments, operations similar to those described below with reference to "IT L " are performed with reference to different intensity thresholds (e.g., "IT D ").
在一些实施例中,设备是具有独立显示器(例如,显示器450)和独立触敏表面(例如,触敏表面451)的电子设备。在一些实施例中,设备是便携式多功能设备100,显示器是触敏显示器系统112,并且触敏表面包括显示器上的触觉输出发生器167(图1A)。为了便于解释,参考图17A-图17H和图18A-图18C描述的实施例将参考触摸屏112来讨论,然而,当在显示器450上显示图17A-图17H所示的用户界面时,响应于在触敏表面451上检测到图17A-图17H中所述的接触而任选地在具有显示器450和独立触敏表面451的设备上执行类似操作;在此类实施例中,焦点选择器任选地是在对应于图17A-图17H中所示的接触(例如,8406、8410和8412)的位置(例如,在该处或附近)的位置处所显示的光标或指针。In some embodiments, the device is an electronic device having an independent display (e.g., display 450) and an independent touch-sensitive surface (e.g., touch-sensitive surface 451). In some embodiments, the device is portable multifunction device 100, the display is touch-sensitive display system 112, and the touch-sensitive surface includes tactile output generator 167 ( FIG. 1A ) on the display. For ease of explanation, the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 17A-17H and FIG. 18A-18C will be discussed with reference to touch screen 112. However, when the user interface shown in FIG. 17A-17H is displayed on display 450, similar operations are optionally performed on the device having display 450 and independent touch-sensitive surface 451 in response to detecting the contacts described in FIG. 17A-17H on touch-sensitive surface 451. In such embodiments, the focus selector is optionally a cursor or pointer displayed at a location corresponding to (e.g., at or near) the locations of the contacts (e.g., 8406, 8410, and 8412) shown in FIG. 17A-17H.
图17A示出了在具有触摸屏显示器112的电子设备300上的示例性用户界面(例如,第一用户界面),响应于下文所述的特定手势而用第二用户界面来替换该用户界面,该第二用户界面不同于当前未在图17A中显示的第一用户界面。在一些实施例中,设备显示对象(例如,媒体对象诸如歌曲、图片和/或电子文档)的表示。在一些实施例中,对象中的一些或全部为电子消息(例如,电子邮件消息、SMS消息、即时消息等)或消息的群组(例如,会话)。在一些实施例中,设备显示具有多个条目的列表,并且所述条目是对象的表示。图17A所示的实例示出了会话的表示的所显示的列表(用户界面对象8404-1至8404-4分别表示会话1至4)。每个会话包含一条或多条消息。在一些情况下,需要将图17A所示的显示改变为不同的显示,该不同的显示包括特定会话(例如,从收件箱视图导航至会话视图)内的消息的列表。图17A-图17H示出了用于在例如这些不同视图之间进行导航的改进的用户界面的实例。Figure 17A shows an exemplary user interface (e.g., a first user interface) on an electronic device 300 with a touchscreen display 112, which is replaced with a second user interface in response to a specific gesture described below, the second user interface being different from the first user interface not currently displayed in Figure 17A. In some embodiments, the device displays representations of objects (e.g., media objects such as songs, pictures, and/or electronic documents). In some embodiments, some or all of the objects are electronic messages (e.g., email messages, SMS messages, instant messages, etc.) or groups of messages (e.g., conversations). In some embodiments, the device displays a list with multiple entries, and the entries are representations of objects. The example shown in Figure 17A shows a displayed list of representations of conversations (user interface objects 8404-1 to 8404-4 represent conversations 1 to 4, respectively). Each conversation contains one or more messages. In some cases, it is desirable to change the display shown in Figure 17A to a different display that includes a list of messages within a particular conversation (e.g., navigating from an inbox view to a conversation view). Figures 17A-17H show examples of improved user interfaces for navigating between these different views, for example.
图17B示出了当焦点选择器位于用户界面对象8404-1上方时对接触8406的检测。在一些实施例中,接触8406是手势的一部分,该手势任选地包括例如触敏表面上的其他移动和按压输入。17B shows detection of contact 8406 when the focus selector is over user interface object 8404-1. In some embodiments, contact 8406 is part of a gesture that optionally includes other movement and pressure inputs, for example, on a touch-sensitive surface.
在一些实施例中,当满足导航标准时,设备显示第二用户界面。在一些实施例中,导航标准包括手势具有大于相应强度阈值(例如,大于标称强度测量的强度阈值,所述标称强度测量指示接触是指触摸触敏表面,诸如大于接触检测强度阈值IT0的ITL)的最大强度,如图17B中的接触8406所示。在一些实施例中,导航标准包括当焦点选择器(例如,当手势)持续地位于对象的表示上方时,检测到强度从低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,检测到“向下冲程”)。在一些实施例中,导航标准包括当焦点选择器持续地位于对象的表示上方时,检测到强度从高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)减小到低于相应强度阈值(例如,检测到“向上冲程”)。在一些实施例中,导航标准包括当焦点选择器持续地位于对象的表示上方时,检测到强度从低于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)增大到高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL),并且随后检测到强度从高于相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)减小到低于相应强度阈值(例如,在不离开表示的情况下检测到向上冲程和向下冲程两者)。In some embodiments, when the navigation criteria are met, the device displays the second user interface. In some embodiments, the navigation criteria include the gesture having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., an intensity threshold greater than a nominal intensity measurement indicating that the contact is touching the touch-sensitive surface, such as IT L greater than a contact detection intensity threshold IT 0 ), as shown by contact 8406 in Figure 17B. In some embodiments, the navigation criteria include detecting an increase in intensity from below a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) to above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., detecting a "down stroke") while the focus selector (e.g., while the gesture) is continuously over a representation of an object. In some embodiments, the navigation criteria include detecting a decrease in intensity from above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) to below a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., detecting an "up stroke") while the focus selector is continuously over a representation of an object. In some embodiments, the navigation criteria include, while the focus selector is continuously positioned over a representation of the object, detecting an increase in intensity from below a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) to above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ), and subsequently detecting a decrease in intensity from above a corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) to below the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., detecting both an upstroke and a downstroke without leaving the representation).
图17A-图17H示出了这样的实例,在其中当焦点选择器位于对象的特定表示上方时检测到具有高于ITL的最大强度的接触足以满足导航标准。因此接触8406满足标准。因此,图17B中的接触8406将发起对第二用户界面的显示。然而,对于本领域的技术人员而言将显而易见的是,其他附加和/或另选标准任选地代替本文所述的标准使用或与本文所述的标准一起使用。Figures 17A-17H illustrate an example in which detecting a contact with a maximum intensity above the IT L when the focus selector is positioned over a particular representation of an object is sufficient to satisfy the navigation criteria. Thus, contact 8406 satisfies the criteria. Consequently, contact 8406 in Figure 17B will initiate display of the second user interface. However, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that other additional and/or alternative criteria may optionally be used in place of or in addition to the criteria described herein.
在一些实施例中,设备任选地显示第一用户界面与第二用户界面之间的动画过渡。图17C示出了此类过渡的实例。在所示的实例中,第一消息集(例如,用户界面对象8404-1和8404-3)沿一个方向滑动到一旁,并且第二消息集(例如,用户界面对象8404-2和8404-4)沿相反方向滑动到一旁,从而显露第一用户界面“下方”的第二用户界面(例如,会话视图)。In some embodiments, the device optionally displays an animated transition between the first user interface and the second user interface. Figure 17C shows an example of such a transition. In the example shown, the first message set (e.g., user interface objects 8404-1 and 8404-3) slides aside in one direction, and the second message set (e.g., user interface objects 8404-2 and 8404-4) slides aside in the opposite direction, thereby revealing the second user interface (e.g., conversation view) "below" the first user interface.
图17D根据实施例示出了动画的实例,其中该动画包括视觉提示,该视觉提示指示特定表示正在扩展以变成对应的文档、消息或消息列表。图17D示出了所选择的会话的实例,该所选择的会话扩展以显露对应于所选择的会话的消息列表。在一些实施例中,“扩展消息”动画,诸如图17D中示出的动画,在“滑动消息”动画(例如,诸如图17C中示出的动画)之后。在一些实施例中,扩展消息动画或滑动消息动画彼此独立地出现。此外,可预期任选地利用任何数量的可能的动画,并且针对不同类型的对象和/或不同情况的不同动画有时是合适的。相对于图18A-图18C中的方法8500来描述动画的附加具体实例,“蹦床”动画。Figure 17D shows an example of an animation according to an embodiment, wherein the animation includes a visual cue that indicates that a particular representation is expanding to become a corresponding document, message, or message list. Figure 17D shows an example of a selected conversation that expands to reveal a message list corresponding to the selected conversation. In some embodiments, an "expand message" animation, such as the animation shown in Figure 17D, follows a "slide message" animation (e.g., such as the animation shown in Figure 17C). In some embodiments, the expand message animation or the slide message animation appear independently of each other. In addition, it is contemplated that any number of possible animations may be optionally utilized, and different animations for different types of objects and/or different situations may sometimes be appropriate. An additional specific example of an animation, a "trampoline" animation, is described with respect to method 8500 in Figures 18A-18C.
图17E示出了从图17B中的第一用户界面导航至第二用户界面的结果。具体地,图17E示出用户现在已导航至会话视图。此外,图17E示出了包括在手势中并且满足导航标准的接触8410。Figure 17E shows the result of navigating from the first user interface in Figure 17B to the second user interface. Specifically, Figure 17E shows that the user has now navigated to the conversation view. In addition, Figure 17E shows contact 8410 included in the gesture and meeting the navigation criteria.
在一些实施例中,由于会话视图是不在用户界面的分级结构的任一极端上的用户界面的实例(例如,用户可在分级结构中向上导航以返回到收件箱视图或在分级结构中向下导航以查看单独消息),所以设备被配置为独立地响应于向上导航标准和向下导航标准。例如,在一些实施例中,向上导航标准包括具有深按压(例如,具有高于深按压强度阈值ITD的强度的按压输入)的手势而向下导航标准包括具有介于ITL与ITD之间的最大强度的手势。在一些实施例中,向下导航标准包括具有深按压(例如,具有高于深按压强度阈值ITD的强度的按压输入)的手势而向上导航标准包括具有介于ITL与ITD之间的最大强度的手势。在一些实施例中,单独地和/或组合地使用其他手势、移动、具有多个手指的手势、或轻按压输入和深按压输入的组合来区分向上导航输入和向下导航输入。In some embodiments, because a conversation view is an instance of a user interface that is not at either extreme of a hierarchy of user interfaces (e.g., a user can navigate up in the hierarchy to return to an inbox view or down in the hierarchy to view individual messages), the device is configured to respond independently to upward and downward navigation criteria. For example, in some embodiments, the upward navigation criteria include a gesture comprising a deep press (e.g., a press input having an intensity greater than a deep press intensity threshold IT D ) and the downward navigation criteria include a gesture having a maximum intensity between IT L and IT D. In some embodiments, the downward navigation criteria include a gesture comprising a deep press (e.g., a press input having an intensity greater than a deep press intensity threshold IT D ) and the upward navigation criteria include a gesture having a maximum intensity between IT L and IT D. In some embodiments, other gestures, movements, gestures with multiple fingers, or a combination of light press and deep press inputs are used, alone and/or in combination, to distinguish between upward and downward navigation inputs.
出于提供实例的目的,假设包括图17E中的接触8410的手势为向下导航输入。在一些实施例中,显示与在先前所描述的过渡(例如,参考图17B-图17E的从收件箱视图到会话视图的过渡)中显示的动画相同或不同的动画。For the purpose of providing an example, assume that the gesture including contact 8410 in Figure 17E is a downward navigation input. In some embodiments, an animation that is the same as or different from the animation displayed in the previously described transitions (e.g., the transition from the inbox view to the conversation view with reference to Figures 17B-17E) is displayed.
图17F通过示出图17E中的接触8410(由于满足导航标准和/或向上导航标准)已使得设备通过显示第三用户界面(即,消息视图)而作出响应来继续该实例。图17F包括接触8412。在该实例中,包括接触8412的手势至少由于具有高于ITL的最大强度而满足向上导航标准。Figure 17F continues this example by showing that contact 8410 in Figure 17E has caused the device to respond by displaying a third user interface (i.e., a message view) due to satisfying the navigation criteria and/or the upward navigation criteria. Figure 17F includes contact 8412. In this example, the gesture including contact 8412 satisfies the upward navigation criteria by having at least a maximum intensity above the IT L.
图17G示出了一些实施例的实例,其中设备显示第一消息集从第一方向“滑入”并且第二消息集从第二方向(例如,相反方向)“滑入”,从而“向上覆盖”先前所显示的消息并返回到第二用户界面(或在一些情况下,第一用户界面)的动画。Figure 17G shows an example of some embodiments in which the device displays an animation of a first set of messages "sliding in" from a first direction and a second set of messages "sliding in" from a second direction (e.g., the opposite direction), thereby "overlaying" the previously displayed messages and returning to the second user interface (or in some cases, the first user interface).
图17H示出了从图17F所示的消息视图向上导航的结果。在该实例中,再次显示会话视图。Figure 17H shows the result of navigating upward from the message view shown in Figure 17F. In this example, the conversation view is displayed again.
图18A-图18C是根据一些实施例示出在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的方法8500的流程图。方法8500在具有显示器和触敏表面的电子设备(例如,设备300,图3,或便携式多功能设备100,图1A)处执行。在一些实施例中,显示器是触摸屏显示器,并且触敏表面在显示器上。在一些实施例中,显示器与触敏表面分开。方法8500中的一些操作任选地被组合,和/或一些操作的顺序被任选地改变。Figures 18A-18C are flow diagrams illustrating method 8500 for navigating between displayed user interfaces, according to some embodiments. Method 8500 is performed on an electronic device having a display and a touch-sensitive surface (e.g., device 300, Figure 3, or portable multifunction device 100, Figure 1A). In some embodiments, the display is a touchscreen display, and the touch-sensitive surface is on the display. In some embodiments, the display is separate from the touch-sensitive surface. Some operations in method 8500 may optionally be combined, and/or the order of some operations may optionally be changed.
如下所述,方法8500提供用于在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航的直观方式。该方法减小了当在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航时用户的认知负担,从而创建更有效的人机界面。对于电池驱动的电子设备,使得用户能够更快且更有效地在所显示的用户界面之间进行导航节省了功率并且增加了电池充电之间的时间。As described below, method 8500 provides an intuitive way to navigate between displayed user interfaces. The method reduces the cognitive burden on the user when navigating between displayed user interfaces, thereby creating a more efficient human-computer interface. For battery-powered electronic devices, enabling users to navigate between displayed user interfaces faster and more efficiently saves power and increases the time between battery charges.
设备在显示器上显示(8502)第一用户界面(例如,收件箱视图,图17A)。当焦点选择器位于第一用户界面中的对象(例如,用户界面对象8404-1,图17B)的第一表示上方时,设备检测(8504)触敏表面上的第一手势,该第一手势包括在第一手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第一接触(例如,接触8406,图17B)。The device displays (8502) a first user interface (e.g., an inbox view, Figure 17A) on the display. When the focus selector is over a first representation of an object in the first user interface (e.g., user interface object 8404-1, Figure 17B), the device detects (8504) a first gesture on the touch-sensitive surface, the first gesture including a first contact (e.g., contact 8406, Figure 17B) having a maximum intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold during the first gesture.
在一些实施例中,相应强度阈值(例如,ITL)对应于(8506)大于标称强度测量(例如,IT0)的强度测量,所述标称强度测量指示接触接触是指触摸触敏表面。在一些实施例中,当检测接触强度的一个或多个传感器(例如,“强度传感器”)能够测量4个或更多个强度量化值时,在N为最低强度量化值(例如,对应于接触在触敏表面上的存在的强度值)的情况下,相应强度阈值比N高至少一个等级。例如,如果存在4个强度量化值且1为最低等级,则相应强度阈值为2或为大于2的等级。又如,如果存在256个强度量化值且1为最低等级,则相应强度阈值为2或为大于2的等级,诸如5、10或15。In some embodiments, the corresponding intensity threshold (e.g., IT L ) corresponds ( 8506 ) to an intensity measurement that is greater than a nominal intensity measurement (e.g., IT 0 ) indicating that the contact is touching the touch-sensitive surface. In some embodiments, when one or more sensors that detect contact intensity (e.g., "intensity sensors") are capable of measuring four or more intensity quantization values, the corresponding intensity threshold is at least one level higher than N, where N is the lowest intensity quantization value (e.g., the intensity value corresponding to the presence of a contact on the touch-sensitive surface). For example, if there are four intensity quantization values and 1 is the lowest level, the corresponding intensity threshold is 2 or a level greater than 2. For another example, if there are 256 intensity quantization values and 1 is the lowest level, the corresponding intensity threshold is 2 or a level greater than 2, such as 5, 10, or 15.
响应于检测到第一手势,设备(8508)用包括对象(例如,会话视图,图17E,或消息视图,图17F)的第二表示的第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面。In response to detecting the first gesture, the device (8508) replaces the first user interface with a second user interface that includes a second representation of the object (e.g., a conversation view, FIG. 17E, or a message view, FIG. 17F).
在一些实施例中,对象为(8510)电子文档(例如,文字处理文档、电子表格文档、呈现文档或PDF),第一表示为对应于电子文档的图标,并且第二表示为电子文档的视图(例如,用于查看和/或响应于电子文档的应用程序窗口、用于编辑电子文档的文档编辑用户界面或用于与电子文档进行交互的另一个界面)。In some embodiments, the object is (8510) an electronic document (e.g., a word processing document, a spreadsheet document, a presentation document, or a PDF), the first representation is an icon corresponding to the electronic document, and the second representation is a view of the electronic document (e.g., an application window for viewing and/or responding to the electronic document, a document editing user interface for editing the electronic document, or another interface for interacting with the electronic document).
在一些实施例中,对象为(8512)电子消息(例如,电子邮件、文本消息、即时消息、或SMS、MMS、或社交网络消息),第一表示为电子消息列表中的消息列表条目(例如,收件箱中的电子邮件的表示,诸如用户界面对象8404-1,图17A),并且第二表示为与消息列表条目对应的电子消息的视图(例如,消息视图,图17F)。虽然利用会话/消息分级结构的实例示出了本文所述的许多实施例,其中对象的第一表示为会话内的消息的表示并且对象的第二表示为全消息的视图,但本文所述的原理以类似的方式适用于其他分级结构中的项目。具体地,对象可以是另一个分级项目,诸如讨论线程(例如,具有顶层讨论的第一表示和子讨论的第二表示)、专辑(例如,具有专辑视图中的歌曲的第一表示和该歌曲的第二扩展表示)、或新闻报道(例如,具有作为具有相关联的概要或图像的标题的第一表示和具有完整新闻报道的第二表示)。In some embodiments, the object is (8512) an electronic message (e.g., an email, text message, instant message, or SMS, MMS, or social network message) with a first representation as a message list entry in an electronic message list (e.g., a representation of an email in an inbox, such as user interface object 8404-1, FIG17A), and a second representation as a view of the electronic message corresponding to the message list entry (e.g., a message view, FIG17F). Although many of the embodiments described herein are illustrated using the example of a conversation/message hierarchy, where the first representation of the object is a representation of a message within a conversation and the second representation of the object is a view of the full message, the principles described herein apply in a similar manner to items in other hierarchies. Specifically, the object can be another hierarchical item, such as a discussion thread (e.g., having a first representation of a top-level discussion and a second representation of a sub-discussion), an album (e.g., having a first representation of a song in an album view and a second expanded representation of the song), or a news story (e.g., having a first representation as a headline with an associated summary or image and a second representation as the full news story).
在一些实施例中,第一用户界面包括(8514)具有表示对应对象的多个条目的列表(例如,参考操作8512所描述的电子消息的列表,或替代地,专辑中的歌曲的列表等),其中对象的第一表示为列表中的条目中的一个条目,并且用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面包括沿第一方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第一集合滑动远离对象的第一表示以及沿不同于第一方向的第二方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第二集合滑动远离对象的第一表示。在一些实施例中,用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面还包括显示第一表示(列表条目)扩展以变成对应文档或消息(例如,消息列表扩展,图17D)的动画。在一些实施例中,第一方向向右并且第二方向向左,或反之亦然。在一些实施例中,第一方向向上并且第二方向向下,或反之亦然。In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (8514) a list having a plurality of entries representing corresponding objects (e.g., a list of electronic messages as described with reference to operation 8512, or alternatively, a list of songs in an album, etc.), wherein a first representation of the object is one of the entries in the list, and replacing the first user interface with the second user interface includes sliding a first set of one or more of the entries away from the first representation of the object in a first direction and sliding a second set of one or more of the entries away from the first representation of the object in a second direction different from the first direction. In some embodiments, replacing the first user interface with the second user interface also includes displaying an animation of the first representation (list entry) expanding to become a corresponding document or message (e.g., a message list expanding, FIG. 17D ). In some embodiments, the first direction is right and the second direction is left, or vice versa. In some embodiments, the first direction is upward and the second direction is downward, or vice versa.
当焦点选择器位于第二用户界面中对象的第二表示上方时,设备检测(8516)触敏表面上的第二手势,该第二手势包括在第二手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第二接触(例如,接触8412,图17F)。响应于检测到第二手势,设备(8518)用第一用户界面(例如,显示会话视图,图17G)来替换第二用户界面。When the focus selector is over a second representation of an object in the second user interface, the device detects (8516) a second gesture on the touch-sensitive surface that includes a second contact (e.g., contact 8412, Figure 17F) having a maximum intensity above a corresponding intensity threshold during the second gesture. In response to detecting the second gesture, the device replaces the second user interface with the first user interface (e.g., displaying the conversation view, Figure 17G).
在一些实施例中,第二手势为(8520)第一手势的重复(例如,第二手势包括与第一手势相同的基本移动和/或强度改变分量,尽管第二手势在较晚的时间处出现)。In some embodiments, the second gesture is (8520) a repetition of the first gesture (eg, the second gesture includes the same basic movement and/or intensity change components as the first gesture, although the second gesture occurs at a later time).
在一些实施例中,第一用户界面包括(8522)具有表示对应对象的多个条目的列表,其中对象的第一表示为列表中的条目中的一个条目,并且用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面包括沿第一方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第一集合朝对象的第一表示滑动以及沿不同于第一方向的第二方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第二集合朝对象的第一表示滑动(例如,滑动图17G中的列表条目)。在一些实施例中,用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面还包括显示文档或消息折叠以变成对应的第一表示(列表条目)的动画。In some embodiments, the first user interface includes (8522) a list having a plurality of entries representing corresponding objects, wherein a first representation of the object is one of the entries in the list, and replacing the second user interface with the first user interface includes sliding a first set of one or more of the entries toward the first representation of the object in a first direction and sliding a second set of one or more of the entries toward the first representation of the object in a second direction different from the first direction (e.g., sliding the list entries in FIG17G ). In some embodiments, replacing the second user interface with the first user interface also includes displaying an animation of the document or message collapsing to become the corresponding first representation (the list entry).
在一些实施例中,在用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面之前,设备检测(8524)到第一接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值。响应于检测到第一接触强度增大,设备显示(8526)第一表示的根据第一接触强度增大而扭曲的第一动画(例如,像其上放置有重量的蹦床一样向后拉伸到显示器中)。在一些实施例中,响应于检测到第一接触的强度减小和/或抬离而用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面,并且这包括显示第一表示的扭曲的反向的动画(例如,第一表示像在将重量抬离蹦床之后的蹦床一样弹回)。在一些实施例中,在用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面之前,设备检测(8528)到第二接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值。响应于检测到第二接触强度增大,设备显示(8530)第二表示的根据第二接触强度增大而扭曲的第二动画(例如,像其上放置有重量的蹦床一样向后拉伸到显示器中)。在一些实施例中,响应于检测到第二接触的强度减小和/或抬离而用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面,并且这包括显示第二表示的扭曲的反向的动画(例如,第二表示像在将重量抬离蹦床之后的蹦床一样弹回)。In some embodiments, before replacing the first user interface with the second user interface, the device detects (8524) an increase in the strength of the first contact above a corresponding strength threshold. In response to detecting the increase in the strength of the first contact, the device displays (8526) a first animation of the first representation distorting in accordance with the increase in the strength of the first contact (e.g., stretching back into the display like a trampoline with a weight placed on it). In some embodiments, the first user interface is replaced with the second user interface in response to detecting a decrease in the strength and/or lift-off of the first contact, and this includes displaying a reverse animation of the distortion of the first representation (e.g., the first representation rebounds like a trampoline after a weight is lifted off the trampoline). In some embodiments, before replacing the second user interface with the first user interface, the device detects (8528) an increase in the strength of the second contact above a corresponding strength threshold. In response to detecting the increase in the strength of the second contact, the device displays (8530) a second animation of the second representation distorting in accordance with the increase in the strength of the second contact (e.g., stretching back into the display like a trampoline with a weight placed on it). In some embodiments, the second user interface is replaced with the first user interface in response to detecting a decrease in strength and/or lift-off of the second contact, and this includes displaying an animation of a reverse of the distortion of the second representation (e.g., the second representation bounces back like a trampoline after a weight is lifted off the trampoline).
在一些实施例中,第一动画包括(8532)通过根据第一接触强度而显示多个视觉提示(例如,与相应物理隐喻相关联的视觉提示)来调节第一表示的显示(例如,将第一表示的中心向下移动并示出第一表示的边缘的扭曲以指示第一表示正在根据第一接触强度向下拉伸)。第二动画包括通过根据第二接触强度而显示多个视觉提示(例如,与相同的相应物理隐喻相关联的视觉提示)来调节第二表示的显示(例如,将第二表示的中心向下移动并示出第二表示的边缘的扭曲以指示第二表示正在根据第二接触强度向下拉伸)。在一些实施例中,第一动画和第二动画包括在显示器上显示的对应用户界面元件的类似扭曲。意图在于许多其他过渡和/或动画落入当前公开的范围内。例如,本文参考图17A-图17H讨论了若干另选的动画。In some embodiments, the first animation includes (8532) adjusting the display of the first representation by displaying multiple visual cues (e.g., visual cues associated with corresponding physical metaphors) based on the first contact strength (e.g., moving the center of the first representation downward and showing a distortion of the edges of the first representation to indicate that the first representation is being stretched downward based on the first contact strength). The second animation includes adjusting the display of the second representation by displaying multiple visual cues (e.g., visual cues associated with the same corresponding physical metaphors) based on the second contact strength (e.g., moving the center of the second representation downward and showing a distortion of the edges of the second representation to indicate that the second representation is being stretched downward based on the second contact strength). In some embodiments, the first animation and the second animation include similar distortions of corresponding user interface elements displayed on the display. It is intended that many other transitions and/or animations fall within the scope of the present disclosure. For example, several alternative animations are discussed herein with reference to Figures 17A-17H.
应当理解,对图18A-18C图中已经进行描述的操作的特定顺序仅仅是示例性的,并非旨在指示所述顺序是这些操作可被执行的唯一顺序。本领域的普通技术人员会想到各种方式来对本文所述的操作进行重新排序。另外,应当指出的是,本文中相对于本文所述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的其他过程的细节也以类似的方式适用于上文相对于图18A-图18C所描述的方法8500。例如,上文参考方法8500所描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值、焦点选择器、动画任选地具有本文中参考本文所述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)所描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、强度阈值、焦点选择器、动画的一个或多个特性。为简明起见,这里不重复这些细节。It should be understood that the specific order of the operations described in Figures 18A-18C is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the order is the only order in which these operations can be performed. A person of ordinary skill in the art will think of various ways to reorder the operations described herein. In addition, it should be noted that the details of the other processes described herein with respect to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) are also applicable in a similar manner to the method 8500 described above with respect to Figures 18A-18C. For example, the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described above with reference to method 8500 optionally have one or more characteristics of the contacts, gestures, user interface objects, intensity thresholds, focus selectors, and animations described herein with reference to other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]). For the sake of brevity, these details are not repeated here.
根据一些实施例,图19示出了根据各种所述实施例的原理进行配置的电子设备8600的功能框图。该设备的功能块任选地由执行各种所述实施例的原理的硬件、软件、或硬件和软件的组合来实现。本领域的技术人员应当理解,图19中所述的功能块任选地被组合或被分离为子块以实现各种所述实施例的原理。因此,本文的描述任选地支持本文所述的功能块的任何可能的组合或分离或进一步限定。According to some embodiments, Figure 19 shows a functional block diagram of an electronic device 8600 configured according to the principle of the various described embodiments. The functional block of this equipment is optionally realized by hardware, software, or a combination of hardware and software that performs the principle of the various described embodiments. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that the functional block described in Figure 19 is optionally combined or separated into sub-blocks to realize the principle of the various described embodiments. Therefore, the description herein optionally supports any possible combination or separation or further qualification of the functional block described herein.
如图19所示,电子设备8600包括显示单元8602,该显示单元被配置为显示包括对象的第一表示的第一用户界面和包括对象的第二表示的第二用户界面;触敏表面单元8604,该触敏表面单元被配置为当焦点选择器位于第一用户界面中的对象的第一表示上方时检测触敏表面单元上的第一手势,该第一手势包括在第一手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第一接触,并且当焦点选择器位于第二用户界面中的对象的第二表示上方时检测触敏表面单元上的第二手势,该第二手势包括在第二手势期间具有高于相应强度阈值的最大强度的第二接触;一个或多个传感器单元8606,该一个或多个传感器单元被配置为检测与触敏表面单元8604的接触强度;和处理单元8608,该处理单元耦接到显示单元8602、触敏表面单元8604和一个或多个传感器单元8606。在一些实施例中,处理单元8608包括替换单元8610、动画单元8612和显示使能单元8614。As shown in FIG19 , electronic device 8600 includes a display unit 8602 configured to display a first user interface including a first representation of an object and a second user interface including a second representation of an object; a touch-sensitive surface unit 8604 configured to detect a first gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit when a focus selector is located over the first representation of the object in the first user interface, the first gesture including a first contact having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold during the first gesture, and to detect a second gesture on the touch-sensitive surface unit when the focus selector is located over the second representation of the object in the second user interface, the second gesture including a second contact having a maximum intensity greater than a corresponding intensity threshold during the second gesture; one or more sensor units 8606 configured to detect intensity of contact with touch-sensitive surface unit 8604; and a processing unit 8608 coupled to display unit 8602, touch-sensitive surface unit 8604, and one or more sensor units 8606. In some embodiments, processing unit 8608 includes a replacement unit 8610, an animation unit 8612, and a display enabling unit 8614.
处理单元8608被配置为:响应于检测到第一手势,用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面(例如,利用替换单元8610);以及响应于检测到第二手势,用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面。Processing unit 8608 is configured to: replace the first user interface with the second user interface in response to detecting the first gesture (for example, using replacement unit 8610); and replace the second user interface with the first user interface in response to detecting the second gesture.
在一些实施例中,相应强度阈值对应于大于标称强度测量的强度测量,所述标称强度测量指示接触是指触摸触敏表面单元8604。In some embodiments, the corresponding intensity threshold corresponds to an intensity measurement that is greater than a nominal intensity measurement, which indicates that the contact is touching touch-sensitive surface unit 8604.
在一些实施例中,第二手势是第一手势的重复。In some embodiments, the second gesture is a repetition of the first gesture.
在一些实施例中,对象是电子消息;第一表示为电子消息列表中的消息列表条目;并且第二表示为与消息列表条目对应的电子消息的视图。In some embodiments, the object is an electronic message; the first representation is a message list entry in a list of electronic messages; and the second representation is a view of the electronic message corresponding to the message list entry.
在一些实施例中,对象为电子文档;第一表示为对应于电子文档的图标;并且第二表示为电子文档的视图。In some embodiments, the object is an electronic document; the first representation is an icon corresponding to the electronic document; and the second representation is a view of the electronic document.
在一些实施例中,第一用户界面包括具有表示对应对象的多个条目的列表,其中对象的第一表示为列表中的条目中的一个条目;并且用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面包括:沿第一方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第一集合滑动远离对象的第一表示;以及沿不同于第一方向的第二方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第二集合滑动远离对象的第一表示。In some embodiments, the first user interface includes a list having multiple entries representing corresponding objects, wherein a first representation of the object is one of the entries in the list; and replacing the first user interface with the second user interface includes: sliding a first set of one or more of the entries away from the first representation of the object in a first direction; and sliding a second set of one or more of the entries away from the first representation of the object in a second direction different from the first direction.
在一些实施例中,第一用户界面包括具有表示对应对象的多个条目的列表,其中对象的第一表示为列表中的条目中的一个条目;并且用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面包括:沿第一方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第一集合朝对象的第一表示滑动;以及沿不同于第一方向的第二方向将条目中的一个或多个条目的第二集合朝对象的第一表示滑动。In some embodiments, the first user interface includes a list having multiple entries representing corresponding objects, wherein a first representation of the object is one of the entries in the list; and replacing the second user interface with the first user interface includes: sliding a first set of one or more entries in the entries along a first direction toward the first representation of the object; and sliding a second set of one or more entries in the entries toward the first representation of the object along a second direction different from the first direction.
在一些实施例中,处理单元8608被进一步配置为:在用第二用户界面来替换第一用户界面之前:检测到第一接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值;并且响应于检测到第一接触的强度的增大,显示第一表示的根据第一接触强度增大而扭曲的第一动画;在用第一用户界面来替换第二用户界面之前:检测到第二接触的强度增大到高于相应强度阈值;并且响应于检测到第二接触的强度的增大,显示第二表示的根据第二接触强度增大而扭曲的第二动画。In some embodiments, the processing unit 8608 is further configured to: before replacing the first user interface with the second user interface: detect that the intensity of the first contact increases to above the corresponding intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the increase in the intensity of the first contact, display a first animation of the first representation that is distorted according to the increase in the intensity of the first contact; before replacing the second user interface with the first user interface: detect that the intensity of the second contact increases to above the corresponding intensity threshold; and in response to detecting the increase in the intensity of the second contact, display a second animation of the second representation that is distorted according to the increase in the intensity of the second contact.
在一些实施例中,第一动画包括通过根据第一接触强度而显示多个视觉提示来调节第一表示的显示;并且第二动画包括通过根据第二接触强度而显示多个视觉提示来调节第二表示的显示。In some embodiments, the first animation includes adjusting display of the first representation by displaying a plurality of visual cues as a function of the first contact intensity; and the second animation includes adjusting display of the second representation by displaying a plurality of visual cues as a function of the second contact intensity.
上述信息处理方法中的操作任选地通过运行信息处理装置中的一个或多个功能模块来实现,该信息处理装置诸如为通用处理器(例如,如以上相对于图1A和图3所描述的)或特定于应用的芯片。The operations in the above information processing method are optionally implemented by running one or more functional modules in an information processing device, such as a general-purpose processor (e.g., as described above with respect to Figures 1A and 3) or an application-specific chip.
上文参考图18A-图18C所述的操作任选地由图1A-图1B或图19中所描绘的部件来实现。例如,检测操作8504、替换操作8508以及动画化操作8532任选地由事件分类器170、事件识别器180和事件处理程序190来实现。事件分类器170中的事件监视器171检测触敏显示器112上的接触,并且事件分配器模块174将事件信息递送到应用程序136-1。应用程序136-1的相应的事件识别器180将事件信息与相应的事件定义186进行比较,并且确定触敏表面上的第一位置处的第一接触是否对应于预定义的事件或子事件,诸如选择用户界面上的一个对象。当检测到相应的预定义的事件或子事件时,事件识别器180激活与检测到该事件或子事件相关联的事件处理程序190。事件处理程序190任选地利用或调用数据更新器176或对象更新器177来更新应用程序内部状态192。在一些实施例中,事件处理程序190访问相应GUI更新器178来更新应用程序所显示的内容。类似地,本领域技术人员会清楚地知道基于在图1A-1B中所示的部件可如何实现其他过程。The operations described above with reference to Figures 18A-18C are optionally implemented by the components depicted in Figures 1A-1B or Figure 19. For example, detection operation 8504, replacement operation 8508, and animation operation 8532 are optionally implemented by event classifier 170, event recognizer 180, and event handler 190. Event monitor 171 in event classifier 170 detects contact on touch-sensitive display 112, and event dispatcher module 174 delivers the event information to application 136-1. The corresponding event recognizer 180 of application 136-1 compares the event information with the corresponding event definition 186 and determines whether the first contact at the first location on the touch-sensitive surface corresponds to a predefined event or sub-event, such as selecting an object on the user interface. When a corresponding predefined event or sub-event is detected, event recognizer 180 activates the event handler 190 associated with the detection of the event or sub-event. Event handler 190 optionally utilizes or calls data updater 176 or object updater 177 to update application internal state 192. In some embodiments, event handler 190 accesses corresponding GUI updater 178 to update the content displayed by the application. Similarly, those skilled in the art will clearly understand how other processes can be implemented based on the components shown in Figures 1A-1B.
应当理解,其中上文已描述的操作的特定顺序仅仅是示例性的,并非旨在表明所述顺序是这些操作可被执行的唯一顺序。本领域的普通技术人员会想到各种方式来对本文所述的操作进行重新排序。另外,应当指出的是,本文独立描述的各种过程(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些过程)可以不同的布置方式彼此组合。例如,上文参考本文独立所述的各种过程(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些过程)中的任一者所描述的接触、用户界面对象、触感、强度阈值、和/或焦点选择器任选地具有本文参考本文所述的其他方法(例如,段落[0057]中列出的那些方法)中的一种或多种方法所描述的接触、手势、用户界面对象、触感、强度阈值、和焦点选择器的特性中的一个或多个特性。为简明起见,这里不具体枚举所有各种可能的组合,但应当理解,上文所述的权利要求可以互相排斥的权利要求特征所不排除的任何方式来组合。It should be understood that the specific order of the operations described above is merely exemplary and is not intended to indicate that the order is the only order in which these operations can be performed. A person of ordinary skill in the art will think of various ways to reorder the operations described herein. In addition, it should be noted that the various processes described independently herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) can be combined with each other in different arrangements. For example, the contact, user interface object, touch, intensity threshold, and/or focus selector described above with reference to any of the various processes described independently herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]) optionally have one or more of the contact, gesture, user interface object, touch, intensity threshold, and focus selector characteristics described herein with reference to one or more of the other methods described herein (e.g., those listed in paragraph [0057]). For the sake of simplicity, not all possible combinations are specifically enumerated here, but it should be understood that the claims described above can be combined in any way that is not excluded by mutually exclusive claim features.
为了解释的目的,前面的描述是通过参考具体实施例来进行描述的。然而,上述示例性的讨论并非旨在是穷尽的或将各种所述实施例局限于本发明所公开的精确形式。根据以上教导内容,很多修改形式和变型形式都是可能的。选择和描述实施例是为了最佳阐释各种所述实施例的原理及其实际应用,从而使本领域的其他技术人员能够最佳地利用具有适合于所构想的特定用途的各种修改的各种所述实施例。For purposes of explanation, the foregoing description has been described with reference to specific embodiments. However, the foregoing exemplary discussion is not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the various described embodiments to the precise forms disclosed herein. Numerous modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings. The embodiments have been chosen and described in order to best illustrate the principles of the various described embodiments and their practical application, thereby enabling others skilled in the art to best utilize the various described embodiments with various modifications as are appropriate for the particular application contemplated.
Claims (9)
Applications Claiming Priority (6)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US201261688227P | 2012-05-09 | 2012-05-09 | |
| US61/688,227 | 2012-05-09 | ||
| US201261747278P | 2012-12-29 | 2012-12-29 | |
| US61/747,278 | 2012-12-29 | ||
| US201361778171P | 2013-03-12 | 2013-03-12 | |
| US61/778,171 | 2013-03-12 |
Publications (2)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| HK1219145A1 HK1219145A1 (en) | 2017-03-24 |
| HK1219145B true HK1219145B (en) | 2019-11-22 |
Family
ID=
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US11354033B2 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for managing icons in a user interface region | |
| US20240302954A1 (en) | Device, Method, and Graphical User Interface for Switching Between User Interfaces | |
| US12340075B2 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting user interface objects | |
| US10775999B2 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying user interface objects corresponding to an application | |
| US10775994B2 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for moving and dropping a user interface object | |
| AU2015101231A4 (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact | |
| HK1219145B (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact | |
| HK1208541B (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact | |
| HK1207170B (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for displaying additional information in response to a user contact | |
| HK1208540B (en) | Device, method, and graphical user interface for selecting user interface objects |